PROFESSIONAL DISC CAMCORDER
PDW-510/510P
PDW-530/530P
OPERATION MANUAL [English]
1st Edition (Revised 8)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur
in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can
be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures;
For the customers in Europe
The manufacturer of this product is Sony Corporation, 1-7-1
Konan, Minato-ku, Tokyo, Japan.
The Authorized Representative for EMC and product safety is
Sony Deutschland GmbH, Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327
Stuttgart, Germany. For any service or guarantee matters
please refer to the addresses given in separate service or
guarantee documents.
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
For the customers in Taiwan only
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different
from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for
help.
You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not
expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to
operate this equipment.
All interface cables used to connect peripherals must be
shielded in order to comply with the limits for a digital device
pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.
For the customers in the USA
Lamp in this product contains mercury. Disposal of these
materials may be regulated due to environmental
considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please
contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries
Alliance (www.eiae.org).
For the customers in the USA and Canada
RECYCLING LITHIUM-ION BATTERIES
Lithium-Ion batteries are recyclable.
You can help preserve our environment by
returning your used rechargeable batteries to
the collection and recycling location nearest
you.
For more information regarding recycling of rechargeable
batteries, call toll free 1-800-822-8837, or visit
http://www.rbrc.org/
Caution: Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium-ion
batteries.
For the State of California, USA only
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Perchlorate Material : Lithium battery contains perchlorate.
For the customers in Europe
This product with the CE marking complies with the EMC
Directive issued by the Commission of the European
Community.
Compliance with this directive implies conformity to the
following European standards:
• EN55103-1: Electromagnetic Interference (Emission)
• EN55103-2: Electromagnetic Susceptibility (Immunity)
This product is intended for use in the following
Electromagnetic Environment(s):
E1 (residential), E2 (commercial and light industrial), E3
(urban outdoors) and E4 (controlled EMC environment, ex. TV
studio).
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
3-2-4 Starting a Shoot With a Few Seconds of
1-1-1 Principal Differences Between the
1-1-3 Features of the Optical Disc Drive
Function)..........................................44
3-2-5 Time-Lapse Video (Interval Rec
1-4 MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License
3-2-7 Auto Clip List Recoding for Automatic
..........................................................52
3-2-8 Assigning User-Defined Clip Titles
3-2-9 Assigning User-Defined Clip and Clip
3-2-11 Recording Proxy Data to Memory
2-4 Shooting and Recording/Playback
2-9 Warnings and Indications on the LCDs
3-3-2 Checking the Last Two Seconds of the
3-3-3 Checking the Recording on the Color
3-4 Recording Video Signals From External
3-4-1 Recording a DV Stream From External
3-4-2 Recording Analog Composite Signals
3-1-1 Discs Used for Recording and Playback
3-1-6 Handling of Discs When Recording
Function)..........................................38
4
Table of Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-3-1 Loading a Clip List From Disc Into Unit
Memory............................................78
6-4 Recording Continuous Time Code With
4-3-3 Clearing the Current Clip List From the
Unit Memory....................................79
4-3-4 Setting the Start Time Code of the
Current Clip List ..............................79
4-4 Using the PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing
7-2 Status Display on the Viewfinder
7-2-1 Layout of the Status Display on the
Viewfinder Screen .........................121
7-2-3 Display Modes and Setting Change
5-2 Adjusting the Black Balance and the
5-3-2 Selecting the Shutter Mode and Shutter
Speed................................................88
Messages........................................124
7-2-6 Recording Shot Data Superimposed on
the Color Bars ................................126
7-2-8 Displaying the Status Confirmation
Windows ........................................128
7-2-9 Confirming the Image of the Return
Video Signal in the Viewfinder .....129
7-3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus
7-3-1 Setting Gain Values for the GAIN
Selector Positions...........................130
7-3-3 Setting the Color Temperature Manually
........................................................132
7-3-4 Specifying an Offset for the Auto White
Balance Setting ..............................133
7-3-5 Assigning Functions to ASSIGN 1/2/3/4
Switches .........................................133
5-5-1 Manually Adjusting the Audio Levels of
CH1/CH2 Connectors......................93
5-5-2 Manually Adjusting the Audio Level of
the Front Microphone ......................94
5-5-3 Recording Audio on Channels 3 and 4
.........................................................95
5-6-2 Saving the Actual Time in the Time
Code.................................................96
Table of Contents
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-4 Resetting USER Menu Settings to the
9-5-3 Attaching a UHF Portable Tuner (for a
UHF Wireless Microphone System)162
9-5-4 Connecting Line Input Audio
Equipment......................................164
9-9 Connecting the Remote Control Unit
8-1 Saving and Loading User Files to and
8-1-2 Saving User Menu Data to the “Memory
Stick” .............................................145
8-1-3 Loading Saved Data From a “Memory
Stick” .............................................147
8-2-3 Resetting the Settings of the Camcorder
Reference File................................152
9-1-2 Avoiding Breaks in Operation Due to an
Exhausted Battery..........................155
9-1-4 Using the Anton Bauer Ultralight
System............................................155
9-2-2 Adjusting the Viewfinder Focus and
Screen.............................................156
9-2-5 Using the BKW-401 Viewfinder
Rotation Bracket ............................157
6
Table of Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
1
Chapter
PDW-530/530P recording format and internal optical
filters
1-1 Features
Recording DVCAM
Video
Audio
25 Mbps
DVCAM format
format
compatible
recording
1)
The PDW-510/510P/530/530P is a camcorder for ENG
16 bits, 48 kHz,
4 channels
2)
2
and EFP , in which a color video camera using / -inch
3
high-definition CCDs of a 16:9 aspect ratio and a
Professional Disc drive are combined integrally. The
camera’s CCDs have approximately 1,000,000 picture
elements (pixels) (the number of effective pixels:
approximately 500,000).
In addition to the well-established high image quality and
vibration resistant, dustproof, and dripproof constructions
of the Betacam SP/SX camcorders, this unit adds a range
of new functionality exploiting the capabilities of optical
discs.
Recording 85 minutes
time
2)
MPEG IMX Video
compatible
recording
MPEG IMX format
(4:2:2 high image
quality video
recording using
MPEG2 intra
frames)
3)
Audio
16 bits or 24 bits
48 kHz sampling,
4 channels
,
1) ENG: Electronic News Gathering
2) EFP: Electronic Field Production
Recording 50 Mbps: 45 minutes
time
40 Mbps: 55 minutes
30 Mbps: 68 minutes
1-1-1 Principal Differences Between
the PDW-510/510P and PDW-
530/530P
Optical
filters
Separate CC filters and ND filters; two filters
can be used simultaneously
1) DVCAM is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
2) MPEG IMX is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
3) For analog audio input, the effective bit length is maximum 20 bits.
There are the following differences between the PDW-
510/510P and PDW-530/530P in the specifications of
recording format, internal optical filters, and so on.
The following characteristics are common to the PDW-
510/510P and PDW-530/530P.
PDW-510/510P recording format and internal optical
filters
1-1-2 Camera Features
Recording DVCAM
Video
25 Mbps
DVCAM format
format
compatible
recording
1)
2
/ -inch Power HAD EX CCDs
3
Audio
16 bits, 48 kHz,
4 channels
2
The three high sensitivity, low smear / -inch Power
3
1)
Recording 85 minutes
time
HAD EX CCDs provide high image quality which is at
the top of its class for a standard definition camcorder.
• The unit is switchable between a 16:9 aspect ratio wide
image and 4:3 standard aspect ratio.
Optical
filters
Single integrated filter system for CC (color
correction) and ND (neutral density)
1-1 Features
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• You can select an interlaced scan mode or progressive
scan mode (30 fps (frames per second) for the PDW-
You can also assign any settings to the USER menu, to
create customized menus.
2)
510/530, 25 fps for the PDW-510P/530P).
• With the optional CBK-FC01 Pull Down Board
installed, a 24 fps progressive scan video can be
recorded subjected to pull-down, providing imaging
quality close to that of film. (PDW-510/530 only)
Saving and recalling settings in a “Memory
Stick”
Using an optional “Memory Stick” , you can save menu
3)
1)
settings for particular shooting conditions, for recall as
required.
1) Abbreviation of “Power Hole-Accumulated Diode.” “Power HAD” is a
registered trademark of Sony Corporation.
2) More precisely, 29.97 fps
1) “Memory Stick” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
3) More precisely, 23.98 fps
High-functionality viewfinder
The 2-inch monochrome viewfinder allows accurate
focusing.
The switch settings, automatic black balance and white
balance items, status, warnings and so on appear on the
viewfinder screen.
Camera signal processing for high quality
video
• The 12-bit A/D converter provides high image quality,
stability, and reliability.
• The high-performance electronic shutter allows you to
1)
select extended clear scan mode (ECS ) and high
2)
vertical resolution mode (EVS ), to obtain clear, high-
quality video.
1-1-3 Features of the Optical Disc
Drive (VDR)
1) ECS: Extended Clear Scan
2) EVS: Super Enhanced Vertical Definition System
Recording and playback in clip units
Shooting functions to cope with different
shooting conditions
• A slow shutter function (up to / second) is provided as
Each time you start and stop recording, this creates an
independent clip.
1
2
• During recording, material is always written to unused
parts of the disc. Therefore, even when playing back
between shooting sessions, there is no danger of
inadvertently overwriting the previous recording.
• Immediately after recording, you can delete clips you
decide not to keep, allowing efficient use of the available
disc capacity.
a standard feature. This allows noiseless shooting under
very poor lighting conditions and a variety of expressive
possibilities, such as shots of flowing streams which are
smoothed out by afterimages.
• You can easily recall sets of adjustment values from
memory, to match the particular lighting conditions.
1)
• The ATW function provides automatic white balance
• During playback, you can check the recorded video and
audio by viewing thumbnail images of clips on the disc
and jumping instantly to the first frames of other clips.
adjustment in response to changing lighting conditions.
TM 2)
• The TruEye
process yields distortion-free video,
even with high intensity colors.
• The TURBO GAIN button enables an instantaneous
boost of the video gain to the maximum 48 dB.
1)
• The i.LINK (FAM (File Access Mode)) function
allows you to transfer clip files by connecting a
computer, or by connecting the unit to a network with the
CBK-NC01 Network Adaptor (option).
1) ATW: Auto Tracing White balance
2) TruEye: “TruEye” is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation.
1) i.LINK is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
Freeze mix function
Picture cache recording
This allows a still image from the previously captured
video to be aligned with the video output from the camera.
Thus you can adjust the camera position to get exactly the
same framing for new shooting.
Video and audio for a maximum of 10 seconds is always
held in memory, so that when you start recording, it is
possible to record from just before the REC START button
was pressed.
Wide range of menu settings
The menus provide the following operations, among
others.
Time-lapse video (intermittent recording)
function
• Status display, message, and marker display settings
• Camera adjustment settings
• Switch function assignment
You can record video intermittently, capturing any number
of frames at any desired time interval.
• “Memory Stick” operations
8
1-1 Features
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Proxy AV data
High reliability under tough operating
conditions
With resistance to vibration and dust comparable to tape
based camcorders, this unit can be relied on just like a
conventional unit.
• Proxy AV data is low-resolution data with a video
bandwidth of 1.5 Mbps and an audio bandwidth of 64
Kbps per channel. This unit records proxy AV data on
the Professional Disc whenever MPEG IMX or
DVCAM format data is recorded on the main channel.
• Proxy AV data is much smaller in size than the full-
resolution IMX or DVCAM data. It can be transferred
quickly over computer networks, easily edited in the
field with laptop computers, and readily used in a wide
variety of applications, such as content management on
small-scale servers.
1-1-4 Inputs and Outputs
Range of audio inputs and outputs
• A super-cardioid directional monaural microphone with
external power supply is supplied as standard
equipment. By changing the connector (service
component replacement), a stereo microphone can be
fitted.
• The optional slot-in type WRR-855A/855B UHF
Synthesized Tuner Unit can be installed in the unit.
• The two AUDIO IN connectors (XLR type, 3-pin) on the
rear panel of the unit can be switched to line input,
microphone input, or + 48V external power, and also to
AES/EBU digital audio inputs (maximum 24 bits).
• When audio cables are connected to the two AUDIO IN
connectors (XLR type, 3-pin) on the rear panel of the
unit, an automatic detection function forces the
recording of the audio input signals from these
connectors as channels 1 and 2.
Wide range of metadata recording
In addition to video and audio, various types of additional
information can be recorded on the Professional Disc as
metadata.
• Essence marks can be added to mark important locations
in the video and audio data.
Essence marks can be added manually at any frame by
pressing the lens RET button or an assignable button.
They can also be added automatically at locations where
there is a sudden change in luminance or audio input
above a specified threshold.
1)
• The supplied logging software can be used to add titles,
comments, and other text data to clips.
• Computer-readable text files can be recorded on the
Professional Disc to enable systematic content
management.
• The AUDIO OUT connectors (XLR type, 5-pin) provide
two channels of audio output.
The ability to search metadata for the required audio and
video scenes brings greater efficiency to various stages of
the video production process, such as editing, and
archiving.
(i.LINK) connector
The i.LINK connector of this unit supports the following
two functions.
1) Professional Disc is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
Input and output of DV streams (AV/C (Audio/
Video Control) mode)
Thumbnail search
DV streams can be output from this unit and recorded on
1)
Thumbnail images of the clips on the disc can be displayed
on the LCD panel and in the viewfinder by pressing the
THUMBNAIL button. They can also be shown in external
video output.
You can check the content of a clip simply by moving the
cursor to its thumbnail and pressing the play button.
standard DV equipment.
In the same way, the output from external DV devices
(VTRs, nonlinear editors, etc.) can be input to this unit and
2)
recorded on Professional Discs.
DV-compliant nonlinear editors may also be connected.
1) In the case of the PDW-530/530P, DV stream output is also possible when
the unit is set to IMX recording mode. Audio data is recorded after
conversion according to the specifications of this unit.
2) In the case of the PDW-530/530P, this is possible only when the unit is set
to DVCAM recording mode.
Scene selection
You can create and play back clip lists of selected clips
from the disc, arranged in any order.
Computer access to files (File Access Mode)
1)
One disc can store up to 99 clip lists.
Use of application software which supports the XDCAM
Clip lists make it simple to perform offline editing in the
field for later use with full-scale nonlinear editing systems
seriesenables random access to video, audio, and metadata
files on Professional Discs, with the ability to display file
lists and perform file-based reads and writes.
1)
(XPRI , etc.).
Files can be transferred at high speed, and thumbnail lists
of disc contents can be viewed on computer screens.
1) XPRI is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
1) Such software includes the supplied PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software and
the XPRI series.
1-1 Features
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control connectors
Instant operation assignable switches
By connecting an optional RM-B150/B750 or similar
remote control unit, you can control the shooting functions
of this unit externally.
Two switches provided on the side panel and on the top of
the grip, respectively, can be assigned to any functions, by
a menu operation.
Furthermore, the TURBO GAIN button can also be used as
an assignable switch.
Function extension interface
• Installing the optional CBK-SD01 SDI Output Board
enables SDI signal output from the VIDEO OUT
connectors.
• By installing the optional CBK-SC01 Analog Composite
Input Board, a composite video signal input to the
GENLOCK connector can be recorded on this unit.
• An extension connector can be attached to the battery
attachment on the rear panel, to allow various camera
adapters to be fitted.
Alarm function
If a fault is detected on the optical disc drive, or if the disc
or battery capacity is low, notication is provided by
warning indicators and audible alarms.
SMPTE (PDW-510/530)/EBU (PDW-510P/
530P) color bars, and 1 kHz reference
signal output
Adjustment of a color monitor or external audio device is
easy. Color bars for an SNG uplink are also provided.
Network connector (option)
1)
The optional CBK-NC01 Network Adaptor can be
installed on this unit to enable connections to computers
and networks. This makes it possible to transfer files at
high speeds, and to display of lists of the video, audio, and
metadata files stored on Professional Discs. Workflows
can be improved by the ability to use FTP commands to
transfer files to remote locations over networks.
1) SNG: Satellite News Gathering
Viewfinder height adjustable
In addition to the front to rear and left to right directions,
the viewfinder can be adjusted vertically in two steps.
Supports SNMP for maintenance and
service (option)
1-1-5 Other Functions
The SNMP-compliant Sony Remote Maintenance and
Monitoring Software can be used when the optional CBK-
NC01 Network Adaptor is installed on this unit. Via a
TCP/IP network connection, this software can monitor the
hardware status of this unit in real time and record
monitoring logs. This allows you to analyze the problem
immediately and take the necessary steps whenever a
hardware failure is detected.
Usability-oriented design
• There is more space around the rear panel connectors
than on previous models, making cable connections and
switch operations easier.
• The adjustment range of the shoulder pad in the front to
rear direction is increased, making it easier to ensure
proper balance when using the unit.
2.5-inch color LCD panel
The side of the unit has an LCD that can be switched to
show the following images and data.
• Status information, including audio level meters and
time code
• Thumbnails of the video recorded on the Professional
Disc
• A playback image of the video recorded on the
Professional Disc
• The camera image
Monochrome LCD panel
Even when this unit is powered off, the time code,
remaining disc capacity, battery capacity, and other status
information appears on the monochrome LCD. (This
requires either a battery or a DC power supply connected.)
10
1-1 Features
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-2 Example of System Configuration
The diagram below shows a typical configuration of the
camcorder for ENG and EFP.
For more information about the fittings, connections, or
use of additional equipment and accessories, see Chapter
9 as well as the operation manuals for the connected
equipment.
Viewfinder-related equipment
AC power supply
Name / Purpose Magnification Part No.
Product
Model name
AC-550/550CE
AC-DN10
Fog-proof filter
Lens assembly
Lens assembly
Lens assembly
–
1-547-341-11
AC Adaptor
AC Adaptor
–2.8 D to +2.0 D A-8262-537-A
–3.6 D to –0.8 D A-8262-538-A
–3.6 D to +0.4 D A-8267-737-A
–2.4 D to +0.5 D A-8314-798-A
Battery
Product
Model name
Lens assembly
(3 × magnification)
Battery Charger BC-M150/L500/
L70
1)
BP-GL65/GL95/
L60S/L80S
Battery Pack
Connection through i.LINK interface
Devices with a DV connector
1) BP-L40/M50 cannot be used.
Extension board
Camera adaptor
Product
Model name
CBK-SD01
Product
Model name
SDI Output Board
Input of audio channels CA-701
3/4 and SDI output
Composite Input Board CBK-SC01
2)
Pull Down Board
Network Adaptor
CBK-FC01
CBK-NC01
CCZ (26-pin) output/
analog composite/SDI
input
CA-702/702P
Memory Card Adaptor CBK-PC01
2) For PDW-510/530 only
Audio signal source
“Memory Stick”
External microphone ECM-670/678 or similar
microphone
RM-B150/B750 Remote
Control Unit
CAC-12 Microphone Holder
Audio equipment
Video monitor for color image
check during shooting
WRR-861/862 series UHF Portable Tuner
WRR-855 series UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit
CCXA-53 audio cable
XLR 5-pin connector for stereo
microphone (service part)
DMX-P01 Portable Digital Mixer
1-2 Example of System Configuration
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
1-3 Precautions
1-4 MPEG-4 Visual
Patent Portfolio
License
Use and Storage
Do not subject the unit to severe shocks
The internal mechanism may be damaged or the body
warped.
This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent
Portfolio License. For the personal and non-commercial
use of a consumer for (i) encoding video in compliance
with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard (“MPEG-4 Video”)
and/or (ii) decoding MPEG-4 Video that was encoded by
a consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial
activity and/or was obtained from a video provider
licensed by MPEG LA to provide MPEG-4 Video.
After use
Always turn off the power.
Before storing the unit for a long period
Remove the battery pack.
Use and storage locations
Store in a level, ventilated place. Avoid using or storing the
unit in the following places.
• Places subject to temperature extremes
• Very damp places
• Places subject to severe vibration
• Near strong magnetic fields
No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use.
Additional information including that relating to
promotional, internal and commercial uses and licensing
may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC.
See http://www.mpegla.com
• In direct sunlight or close to heaters for extended periods
To prevent electromagnetic interference from
portable communications devices
The use of portable telephones and other communications
devices near this unit can result in malfunctions and
interference with audio and video signals.
It is recommended that the portable communications
devices near this unit be powered off.
Note on laser beams
Laser beams may damage the CCDs. If you shoot a scene
that includes a laser beam, be careful not to let the laser
beam be directed into the lens of the camera.
Use at a high temperature
If the unit is used at a high temperature, white flecks may
appear on the screen.
About the LCD panels
LCD panels are manufactured with extremely high-
precision technology that yields effective pixel rates of
99.99% or higher. However, very rarely, one or more
pixels may be permanently dark or permanently lit in
white, red, blue, or green.
This phenomenon is not a malfunction. Such pixels have
no effect on the recorded data, and the unit may be used
with confidence even if they are present.
12
1-3 Precautions / 1-4 MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locations and Functions
of Parts and Controls
2
Chapter
2-1 Power Supply
1 Battery attachment
2 DC IN connector
3 POWER switch
4 LIGHT switch
a Battery attachment
d LIGHT switch
This determines how a video light connected to the LIGHT
connector is turned on and off.
AUTO: When the switch on the video light is in the on
position, putting the camcorder in recording mode
turns the video light on automatically. When using the
auto interval recording mode, the video light is
automatically turned on immediately before recording
starts.
Attach a BP-GL65/GL95/L60S/L80S battery pack.
Furthermore, by attaching an AC-DN10 AC Adaptor, you
can operate the camcorder from AC power.
Note
For your safety, and to ensure proper operation of the unit,
Sony recommends the use of the following battery packs:
BP-GL65, BP-GL95, BP-L60S, and BP-L80S.
MANUAL: You can turn the video light on or off
manually, using its own switch.
b DC IN connector (XLR type, 4-pin, male)
To operate the camcorder using an AC power supply,
connect an AC-550/550CE AC Adaptor with the DC
output cable supplied with the adaptor.
Notes
• When AUTO is selected, unevenly lit video is recorded
between the start of recording and the time when the
light comes on. We recommend that you select
MANUAL when the start of a recording is important.
c POWER switch
This switch turns the main power supply on and off.
2-1 Power Supply
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
However, the light can be turned on before the start of
recording in auto interval recording mode.
• To ensure proper operation of the video light with the
unit, Sony recommends the use of the following battery
packs: BP-GL65, BP-GL95, BP-L60S, and BP-L80S.
14
2-1 Power Supply
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-2 Accessory Attachments
1 Shoulder strap posts
2 Light shoe
3 LIGHT connector
4 Lens mount
5 Lens locking lever
6 Lens mount cap
7 LENS connector
8 Tripod mount
9 Shoulder pad
Lens cable clamp
a Shoulder strap posts
Attach the supplied shoulder strap to these posts.
h Tripod mount
When using the camcorder on a tripod, attach the tripod
adaptor (option).
For details, see 9-7 “Attaching the Shoulder Strap” on
i Shoulder pad
You can move the shoulder pad forwards or backwards by
raising up the shoulder pad locking lever. Do this to ensure
the best balance when shooting with the camcorder on
your shoulder.
b Light shoe
Attach an optional accessory such as a video light to this
shoe.
c LIGHT connector (2-pin, female)
Connect the cable of an Anton Bauer Ultralight System
attached to the light shoe. The system operates with lights
powered by 12 V, with a maximum power consumption of
50 W.
For details, see 9-8 “Adjusting the Shoulder Pad
d Lens mount (special bayonet mount)
Use this for mounting the lens.
e Lens locking lever
After inserting the lens in the lens mount, rotate the lens
mount ring with this lever to lock the lens in position.
f Lens mount cap
Remove this cap by pushing up the lens locking lever.
When no lens is mounted, keep this cap fitted for
protection from dust.
g LENS connector (12-pin)
Fit the lens cable to this connector. Contact your Sony
representative for more information about the lens you can
use.
2-2 Accessory Attachments
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-3 Audio Functions
8 Built-in speaker
1 Microphone
2 MIC IN connector
4 EARPHONE jack (rear, stereo)
7 ALARM volume control
3 MIC LEVEL control
6 MONITOR volume control
5 MONITOR switch and CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch
4 EARPHONE jack (front, monaural)
Audio functions (1)
1) E-E: Abbreviation of “Electric-to-Electric.” In E-E mode, video and audio
signals input to the camcorder are output after passing through internal
electric circuits only. This can be used to check input signals.
a Microphone
This is a super-cardioid directional monaural microphone
with an external power supply (+48 V) system.
e MONITOR switch and CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch
These switches together determine the channel selection
for audio monitor output.
b MIC IN (microphone input) connector (XLR type,
3-pin, female)
Connect the supplied microphone to this connector. A
microphone other than the supplied one may also be
connected as long as it can operate with the power (+48 V)
supplied from this connector.
MONITOR switch
By fitting a 5-pin connector (service part number: A-1053-
453-A), you can also use a stereo microphone.
CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch
c MIC (microphone) LEVEL control
This control adjusts the audio level of the microphone
connected to the MIC IN connector.
MONITOR switch and CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch
d EARPHONE jack (front) (monaural, minijack) /
EARPHONE jack (rear) (monaural/stereo
switchable, minijack)
CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch:
This determines the pair of audio channels selected with
the MONITOR switch.
1)
You can monitor the E-E sound during recording and
CH-1/2 position: channels 1 and 2
CH-3/4 position: channels 3 and 4
The signals output from the AUDIO OUT connector and
EARPHONE jacks also depend on the setting of this
switch.
playback sound during playback. Plugging an earphone
into the jack automatically cuts off the built-in speaker.
When an alarm is indicated, you can hear the alarm sound
through the earphone.
You can use the rear EARPHONE jack for stereo output,
by setting the HEADPHONE OUT item in the AUDIO-1
page of the MAINTENANCE menu to “STREO”. You can
also connect a monaural earphone to the front jack and a
monaural/stereo earphone set to the rear jack
simultaneously.
MONITOR switch:
This selects the audio monitor channels output to the
monaural earphone or speaker, depending on the setting of
the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch.
16
2-3 Audio Functions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CH-1/2CH-3/4 MONITOR Audio output
switch
position
switch
position
CH-1/2
CH-1
MIX
Audio channel 1
Mix sound of channels 1 and 2
Audio channel 2
Minimum
Maximum
CH-2
CH-3
MIX
CH-3/4
Audio channel 3
ALARM volume control
Mix sound of channels 3 and 4
Audio channel 4
CH-4
h Built-in speaker
The speaker can be used to monitor E-E sound during
recording, and playback sound during playback. The
speaker also sounds alarms to reinforce visual warnings.
The output level of the speaker can be lowered by
changing the setting of the SP ATT LEVEL item on the
AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.
If you connect an earphone to the EARPHONE jack, the
speaker is automatically muted.
f MONITOR volume control
This control adjusts the speaker or earphone volume for
sounds other than the alarm sound. At the minimum
position, no sound can be heard.
g ALARM volume control
This control adjusts the speaker or earphone alarm volume.
At the minimum position, no sound can be heard.
However, if in the AUDIO-1 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu the MIN ALARM VOL item is
set to “SET”, the alarm tone is audible even when this
volume control is at the minimum position.
information about alarms.
THUMBNAIL
SEL/SET
9 LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls
ESSENCE MARK
SUB CLIP
S.SEL
0 AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 switches
CLIP MENU
SHIFT
qa AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 / CH-3/CH-4 switches
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
PRESET
REGEN
CLOCK
qs LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selectors
qd +48V/OFF switches
qf AUDIO OUT connector
qg AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors
qh DC OUT 12V connector
Audio functions (2)
i LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) (audio channel-1 and
These controls adjust the audio levels of channels 1 and 2
when the AUDIO SELECT switches are set to MANUAL.
channel-2 recording level) controls
2-3 Audio Functions
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
j AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 (audio channel-1
and channel-2 adjustment method selection)
switches
These switches select the audio level adjustment method
for each of audio channels 1 and 2.
AUTO: Select this setting for automatic adjustment.
MANUAL: Select this setting for manual adjustment.
n AUDIO OUT (audio output) connector (XLR type,
5-pin, male)
This connector outputs the audio signals recorded on audio
channels 1 and 2 or audio channels 3 and 4.
The MONITOR CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switches allow you to
select the audio signal to be monitored.
o AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 (audio channel-1 and
channel-2 input) connectors (XLR type, 3-pin,
female)
k AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 / CH-3/CH-4 (audio input
selection) switches
These are audio input connectors for channels 1 and 2 to
which you can connect audio equipment or a microphone.
When the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector is set to AES/
EBU, the CH1 connector is used for channel-1 and -2
inputs, and the CH2 connector, for channel-3 and -4 inputs.
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches
These switches select the audio input signals to be
recorded on audio channels 1 and 2.
FRONT: The input signal source is the microphone
connected to the MIC IN connector.
REAR: The input signal source is the audio equipment
connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors.
WIRELESS: The input signal source is a WRR-855A/
855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit (option).
p DC OUT 12 V (DC power output) connector (4-pin,
female)
This connector supplies power for a WRR-862 UHF
Portable Tuner (option). Do not connect any equipment
other than the UHF portable tuner.
AUDIO IN CH-3/CH-4 switches
These switches select the audio input signals to be
recorded on audio channels 3 and 4.
F (front): The input signal source is the microphone
connected to the MIC IN connector.
R (rear): The input signal source is the audio equipment
connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors.
W (wireless): The input signal source is a WRR-855A/
855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit.
With a CA-701 Camera Adaptor (option) connected to the
camcorder, you can record separate sounds on audio
channels 3 and 4.
l LINE /AES/EBU / MIC selectors
These select the audio source of the audio input signals
input to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors.
LINE: Line input audio equipment
AES/EBU: AES/EBU format audio signal
MIC: Microphone input
Note
When these switches are in the MIC position, and the
+48V switch described below is on, if you inadvertently
connect any audio device other than a microphone to the
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors, the device may be
damaged.
m +48V/OFF switches
Select either of the following positions for the
microphones to be connected.
+48V: For a microphone to use an external power supply
OFF: For a microphone to use an internal power supply
18
2-3 Audio Functions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-4 Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions
7 Viewfinder
8 Diopter adjustment ring
Eyecup
1 Tally indicator
2 BRIGHT control
3 CONTRAST control
4 PEAKING control
5 ZEBRA switch
6 TALLY switch
0 Viewfinder left-right positioning ring
qa Camera operator tally indicator
9 Viewfinder front-rear positioning lever
qs Viewfinder stopper
qd LOCK knob
Shooting and recording/playback functions (1)
1)
a Tally indicator
ON: The zebra pattern is displayed and stays.
OFF: No zebra pattern is displayed.
Setting the TALLY switch to HIGH or LOW enables this
indicator. The indicator lights during recording on the
VDR (video disc recorder). Like the REC indicator in the
viewfinder, it flashes to indicate a problem. You can set the
indicator brightness with the TALLY switch.
MOMENT: The zebra pattern is displayed and stays for 5
to 6 seconds.
The zebra pattern is factory set to indicate picture areas
where the video level is approximately 70%.You can use
the setup menu to change the setting so that areas where
the video level is 100% and above are also displayed at the
same time.
b BRIGHT (brightness) control
This control adjusts the picture brightness on the
viewfinder screen. It has no effect on the camera output
signal.
For information about how to change the zebra pattern
setting in the setup menu, see 7-2-5 “Setting the
c CONTRAST control
This control adjusts the picture contrast on the viewfinder
screen. It has no effect on the camera output signal.
1) The zebra pattern aids in manual iris adjustment by indicating areas of the
picture where the video level is approximately 70% and 100% and above.
d PEAKING control
f TALLY switch
This control adjusts the sharpness of the picture on the
viewfinder screen to make focusing easier. It has no effect
on the camera output signal.
This switch controls the tally indicator, setting its
brightness (HIGH or LOW) or turning it off.
HIGH: The tally indicator brightness is high.
OFF: The tally indicator is disabled.
LOW: The tally indicator brightness is low.
e ZEBRA switch
This switch controls the zebra pattern on the viewfinder
screen.
2-4 Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
g Viewfinder
j Viewfinder left-right positioning ring
Loosen this ring to move the viewfinder sideways.
The viewfinder lets you view the image in black and white
while shooting, recording or playing back. It also displays
various warnings and messages related to the settings or
operating conditions of the camcorder, a zebra pattern,
k Camera operator tally indicator
This indicator lights while the camcorder is recording.
Slide the window open when you shoot with your eye
away from the viewfinder. This indicator flashes when the
battery level is running low or the disc is almost full.
1)
2)
safety zone marker , and center marker
.
1) The safety zone marker is a rectangle indicating the effective picture area.
2) The center marker indicates the center of the picture with a crosshair.
For details, see 7-2-4 “Setting the Marker Display” on
l Viewfinder stopper
Pull up this stopper to detach the viewfinder from the
camera.
h Diopter adjustment ring
Use this ring to adjust the viewfinder image for your
vision.
m LOCK knob
To adjust the viewfinder position in the front-rear
direction, loosen this knob and the viewfinder front-rear
positioning lever. After adjustment, retighten this knob
and the viewfinder front-rear positioning lever.
i Viewfinder front-rear positioning lever
To adjust the viewfinder position in the front-rear
direction, loosen this lever and the LOCK knob. After
adjustment, retighten this lever and the LOCK knob.
ws ASSIGN 3/4 switches
wa TURBO GAIN button
qf FILTER selector
qg ASSIGN. 1/2 switches
w; WHITE BAL switch
ql OUTPUT/DCC selector
qk GAIN selector
qh SHUTTER selector
qj AUTO W/B BAL switch
Shooting and recording/playback functions (2)
n FILTER selector
For the PDW-510/510P
Use this selector to select the most appropriate filter to
match the light source illuminating the subject.
When this selector is used with the display mode set to 3,
the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for about
3 seconds. (e.g.: FILTER: 3)
The PDW-510/510P has one switchable filter, and the
PDW-530/530P has two switchable filters.
The relationships between the selector settings and filter
selections as well as examples of filters for different
shooting conditions are as follows.
FILTER selector setting and filter selection
FILTER selector setting
Filter selection
1
2
3200 K
1
5600 K + / ND
8
3
4
5600 K
1
5600 K + / ND
64
Examples of shooting conditions and appropriate filters
Shooting condition
Sunrise and sunset; inside studio
Clear skies
Filter
1 (3200 K)
1
2 (5600 K + / ND)
8
Cloudy or raining
3 (5600 K)
20
2-4 Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Examples of shooting conditions and appropriate filters
For details about the shutter speed and mode settings, see
Shooting condition
Filter
1
Very bright conditions such as snow, at
high altitudes, or at the seashore
4 (5600 K + / ND)
q AUTO W/B BAL (automatic white/black balance
adjustment) switch
64
This switch activates the white balance and black balance
automatic adjustment functions.
For the PDW-530/530P
FILTER selector (outer knob) setting and CC filter
selection
WHITE: Automatic adjustment of the white balance. If
the WHITE BAL switch is set to A or B, the white
balance setting is stored in the corresponding memory.
On the PDW-530/530P models with two switchable
filters, the memory stores a separate white balance
setting for each CC filter setting.
FILTER selector (outer knob) setting CC filter selection
1)
A
Cross filter
3200 K
B
C
D
BLACK: Automatic adjustment of the black set and black
balance.
4300 K
6300 K
1) A type of special effect filter. Generates a cross of light on a highlighted
portion.
r GAIN selector
This selector switches the gain of the video amplifier to
match the lighting conditions during shooting. The gains
corresponding to the L, M, and H settings can be selected
from the setup menu. The factory settings are L = 0 dB, M
= 9 dB, and H = 18 dB.
When this selector is adjusted, the new setting appears on
the setting change/adjustment progress message display
area of the viewfinder screen for about 3 seconds.
FILTER selector (inner knob) setting and ND filter
selection
FILTER selector (inner knob) setting ND filter selection
1
2
Clear
1
/4 ND
1
3
4
/16 ND
1
For details about setting the gain values, see 7-3-1
/64 ND
Examples of shooting conditions and appropriate filters
Shooting condition
CC filter
ND filter
s OUTPUT/DCC (output signal/dynamic contrast
control) selector
This selector switches the video signal that is output to the
VDR, viewfinder, and video monitor, between the
following two.
Sunrise and sunset; inside B (3200 K)
studio
1 (clear)
1
Clear skies
C (4300 K) or
D (6300 K)
2 ( /4 ND) or 3
1/
( 16 ND)
BARS: Outputs the color bar signal.
CAM: Outputs the video signal from the camera. When
Cloudy or raining
D (6300 K)
1 (clear) or 2
( /4 ND)
1
1)
this is selected, you can switch DCC on and off with
this selector.
1
Very bright conditions such C (4300 K) or
as snow, at high altitudes, D (6300 K)
or at the seashore
3 ( /16 ND) or
1
4 ( /64 ND)
1) DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control)
Against a very bright background with the iris opening adjusted to the
subject, objects in the background will be lost in the glare. The DCC
function will suppress the high intensity and restore much of the lost detail
and is particularly effective in the following cases.
• Shooting people in the shade on a sunny day
o ASSIGN. 1/2 switches
You can assign the desired functions to each of the
ASSIGN. 1 switch (push button) and ASSIGN. 2 switch
(sliding) on the FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu.
• Shooting a subject indoors, against a background through a window
• Any high contrast scene
For details, see 7-3-5 “Assigning Functions to ASSIGN 1/
p SHUTTER selector
Set this selector to ON to use the electronic shutter. Push it
down to SELECT to switch the shutter speed or mode
setting within the range previously set with the setup
menu.
When this selector is operated, the new setting appears on
the setting change/adjustment progress message display
area for about 3 seconds.
2-4 Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
switch and the FILTER selector.
BARS, DCC OFF
You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch even when
A color bar signal is output and the
DCC circuit does not operate. For
example, use the setting for the
following purposes.
• Adjusting the video monitor
• Recording the color bar signal
1)
ATW is in use.
B (ATW): When this switch is set to B and on the
FUNCTION 2 page of the OPERATION menu,
“WHITE B CH” is set to “ATW” , ATW is activated.
1)
1) ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance)
The white balance of the picture being shot is adjusted automatically for
varying lighting conditions.
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting appears on
the setting change/adjustment progress message display
area of the viewfinder screen for about 3 seconds.
CAM, DCC OFF
The video signal from the camera is
output, and the DCC circuit does not
operate.
You can assign the ATW ON/OFF function to the
ASSIGN 1 switch (push button) on the FUNCTION 1 page
of the USER menu.
CAM, DCC ON
The video signal from the camera is
output, and the DCC circuit operates.
For details, see 7-3-5 “Assigning Functions to ASSIGN 1/
OUTPUT/DCC selector
u TURBO GAIN button
t WHITE BAL (white balance memory) switch
This switch controls the white balance setting.
PRST (preset): Adjusts the color temperature
corresponding to the position of the FILTER selector.
Use the PRST setting when you have no time to adjust
the white balance.
When shooting under extremely poor lighting conditions,
press the button once to boost the video gain to the value
preset on the GAIN SW page of the USER menu (up to
48 dB). To stop boosting the gain, press the button once
more.
A or B: When the AUTO W/B BAL switch is pushed to
WHT, the white balance is automatically adjusted
according to the current position of the FILTER
selector, and the adjusted value is stored in either
memory A or memory B. (There are two memories for
each CC filter, allowing a total of eight adjustments to
be stored.) When this switch is set to A or B, the
camcorder automatically adjusts itself to the stored
value corresponding to the current settings of this
v ASSIGN 3/4 switches
You can assign the desired functions to each of the
ASSIGN 3 switch and ASSIGN 4 switch on the
FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu.
For details, see 7-3-5 “Assigning Functions to ASSIGN 1/
wf REMOTE connector
wg GENLOCK IN connector
wd VIDEO OUT connector
wh TEST OUT connector
wj
DV IN/OUT S400 connector
Shooting and recording/playback functions (3)
22
2-4 Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
w VIDEO OUT connector (BNC type)
wj
(i.LINK) DV IN/OUT S400 connector (6-pin,
This connector outputs a composite video signal for a
video monitor. With a video monitor connected to this
connector, you can monitor the picture being shot by the
camera or the picture played back by the VDR. To choose
between the composite video signal output and SDI signal
output, use the menu. When synchronizing the time code
of an external VDR with that of the camcorder, connect
this connector to the GENLOCK IN connector of the
external VDR.
By installing the CBK-SD01 extension board (not
supplied), you can output an SDI signal (supporting
embedded audio and the EDH function) from this
connector.
IEEE1394 compliant)
Connect to a device supporting the DV format or a
computer, using a i.LINK cable.
Notes
• If video and audio signals are not output to an external
device connected to the i.LINK DV IN/OUT S400
connector, try disconnecting the i.LINK cable and then
reconnecting it, making sure that it is firmly seated.
• When you connect this unit to an external device with a
6-pin i.LINK connector, always power this unit off and
disconnect the DC cable from the DC IN connector, or
remove the battery pack, before connecting or
disconnecting the i.LINK cable.
If you connect or disconnect the i.LINK cable while
power is being supplied to this unit, high voltage (8 to 40
V) can flow into this unit from the i.LINK connector of
the connected equipment, possibly damaging this unit.
• When you connect this unit to an external device with a
6-pin i.LINK connector, always connect the 6-pin
i.LINK connector on the external device first.
For details on how to select the output signal, see 7-3-2
x REMOTE connector (8-pin)
Connect the RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit, which
makes it possible to control the VDR and camera remotely.
y GENLOCK IN connector (BNC type)
• This connector inputs a reference signal when the
camera is to be genlocked or when time code is to be
synchronized with external equipment. Use the
MAINTENANCE menu to adjust the genlock H-phase
(phase of horizontal sync signal) and the sub-carrier
phase.
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
• This connector also inputs a return video signal. You can
display the return video signal in the viewfinder screen
while holding the RET button down with “RETURN
VIDEO” set to “ON” on the GENLOCK page of the
OPERATION menu.
• This connector also inputs an external analog composite
video signal.
When the CBK-SC01 extension board is installed, you
can record the external analog composite video signal
input to this connector.
z TEST OUT connector (BNC type)
This connector outputs the video signal for a video
monitor. The output signal can be selected from composite
or RGB. The factory setting is composite, and the setting
returns to composite whenever the unit is powered on.
Depending on internal board and menu settings, menus,
time code, and shot data can be superimposed on the image
on the monitor. Like the VIDEO OUT connector, this
connector can also be used to synchronize the time code of
an external VTR with the time code of the camcorder.
For details on how to select the test output signal, refer to
the Maintenance Manual.
2-4 Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
wk REC START button
wl VDR SAVE/STBY connector
e; EJECT button and indicator
ea F REV button and indicator
es PLAY/PAUSE button and indicator
ed F FWD button and indicator
ef NEXT button
E
S
U
A
/P
Y
LA
P
NEXT
V
E
R
P
eg STOP button
eh PREV button
Shooting and recording/playback functions (4)
wk REC START button
es PLAY/PAUSE button and indicator
Press this button to start recording. Press it again to stop
recording. The effect is exactly the same as that of the VTR
button on the lens.
Press this to view a playback image using the viewfinder
screen or a color video monitor. The indicator lights during
playback.
When the REC SWITCH function is assigned to the
ASSIGN 1, 3 or 4 switch (push button), you can use the
switch as the REC START button.
During playback, pressing this button pauses the playback,
showing a still image. At this time, the indicator flashes.
This camcorder is capable of color-image search at
approximately four-times normal playback speed, making
it easy to check recorded material. To use the color-image
search, press the F REV button or F FWD button during
playback. When the buttons are pressed, the PLAY
indicator and the F REV or F FWD indicator light.
wl VDR SAVE/STBY (standby) switch
This switch controls the VDR power mode during pauses
in recording.
SAVE: Power saving mode. Although an internal
operating sound is recorded as noise when you start
recording, power consumption in this mode is less than
in standby mode, so that battery life is extended. When
the switch is set to SAVE, the SAVE indicator in the
viewfinder lights.
ed F FWD (fast forward) button and indicator
Plays back at high speed in the forward direction. The
indicator lights during high-speed playback in the forward
direction.
STBY: Standby mode. Recording starts as soon as you
press the REC START button.
ef NEXT button
This jumps to the beginning of the next clip, and pauses.
During the jump, the F FWD indicator flashes.
Pressing this button together with the F FWD button jumps
to the last frame of the last clip recorded on the disc.
e; EJECT button and indicator
Press this button to eject or load a disc. The indicator
flashes while the disc is being ejected.
ea F REV (fast reverse) button and indicator
Plays back at high speed in the reverse direction. The
indicator lights during high-speed playback in the reverse
direction.
eg STOP button
Press this button to stop disc playback.
24
2-4 Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
eh PREV button
This jumps to the beginning of the current clip, and pauses.
During the jump, the F REV indicator flashes.Pressing this
button together with the F REV button jumps to the first
frame of the first clip recorded on the disc.
2-4 Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
25
2-5 Output Video Operating Section
1 SEL/SET dial
2 THUMBNAIL button
THUMBNAIL
3 Thumbnail indicator
SEL/SET
ESSENCE MARK
S.SEL
SUB CLIP
4 Sub clip indicator
5 SUB CLIP button
CLIP MENU
SHIFT
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
PRESET
REGEN
CLOCK
6 SHIFT button
Output video operating section
a SEL/SET (select/set) dial
e SUB CLIP button
When thumbnails (each representing a clip) are shown on
the color LCD, you can select a particular thumbnail with
this dial.
Turning the dial upward moves the cursor to the left, and
when it reaches the left edge, to the rightmost position in
the row above. Turning the dial downward moves the
cursor to the right, and when it reaches the right edge, to
the leftmost position in the row below. After selecting the
desired thumbnail with the cursor, press the dial in to
confirm.
Press this to play back according to a clip list.
You can play back a particular clip or sequential clips, or
carry out a search of the selected clip list.
When no clip list is selected, pressing this button has no
effect, and the operation is invalid.
To carry out operations such as saving, recalling, or
deleting a clip list, hold down the SHIFT button and press
this button.
f SHIFT button
To carry out a scene selection setting, hold down the
SHIFT button, and press in this dial.
Use this in combination with other buttons.
b THUMBNAIL button
To carry out a search using thumbnails, or to create a clip
list, press this button.
Pressing it switches from the whole-screen display to a
thumbnail display. Press once more to return to the whole-
screen display.
To search thumbnails by essence marks, hold down the
SHIFT button and press this button.
c Thumbnail indicator
This lights when thumbnails are shown.
d Sub clip indicator
This lights when playing back following a clip list.
26
2-5 Output Video Operating Section
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-6 Menu Operating Section
2 STATUS ON/SEL / OFF switch
3 MENU ON/OFF switch
MENU
4 CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch
5 “Memory Stick” compartment
Cover
1 MENU knob
a MENU knob
Use this knob to change the page selection or a setting
c MENU ON/OFF switch
To use this switch, open the cover.
within the menu.
This switch is used to display the menu on the viewfinder
screen or the test signal screen.
Press: If you press this knob when the arrow (b) is placed
at the page title on the menu, the arrow changes to a
question mark (?) and you can change the page by
turning this knob.
When the arrow mark is placed at a position other than
the page title, you can change the setting of the current
item by pressing and turning this knob.
Turn: Turn this knob to change the page or change item
settings.
Closing the cover automatically sets this switch to OFF.
ON: Displays the menu on the viewfinder screen or the test
signal screen, at the last accessed page. When the
menu is used for the first time, the first page is
displayed.
OFF: Removes the menu from the viewfinder screen or
the test signal screen.
d CANCEL/PRST (preset) / ESCAPE switch
To enable this switch, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to
ON.
b STATUS ON/SEL / OFF (menu display on/page
selection/display off) switch
To enable this switch, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to
OFF.
Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF.
Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF.
CANCEL/PRST: Pushing this switch up to this position
displays the message to confirm whether the previous
settings are cancelled or settings are reset to their
initial values, depending on the menu operating
condition.
ON/SEL: Each time this switch is pushed upward, a
window to confirm the menu settings and status of the
camcorder appears on the viewfinder screen. The
window consists of three pages, which are switched
each time the switch is pushed upward. Each page is
displayed for about 10 seconds.
Pushing this switch up to this position again cancels
the previous settings or resets the settings to their
initial values.
OFF: To clear the page immediately after display, push
this switch down to the OFF position.
ESCAPE: Use this switch when the menu page, which has
a hierarchical structure, is opened. Each time the
switch is pushed to this position, the page returns to
one stage higher in the hierarchy.
You can select the pages to be displayed on the menu.
2-6 Menu Operating Section
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
e “Memory Stick” compartment
“Memory Stick”
Access indicator
Label
“Memory Stick”
How to insert a “Memory Stick”
Open the lid of the menu operating section, and insert a
“Memory Stick”, with the notch facing downward, in the
direction shown by the arrow, so that it clicks into place.
To remove a “Memory Stick”, first press it in to release the
lock, then withdraw.
The “Memory Stick” access indicator lights when the
“Memory Stick” is being accessed (for reading or writing).
For details about types of “Memory Stick”, see “About a
Notes
• Do not insert/remove a “Memory Stick” while the
“Memory Stick” access indicator is lit or flashing. Doing
so may cause a loss of data.
• This device uses a standard “Memory Stick”, a “Memoy
Stick PRO”, and a “MagicGate Memory Stick” equipped
with MagicGate copyright protection technology.
28
2-6 Menu Operating Section
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-7 Time Code System
1 TC IN connector
2 TC OUT connector
3 GENLOCK IN connector
Time code functions (1)
a TC IN (time code input) connector (BNC type)
To synchronize the time code of this unit to an external
time code, input the reference time code to this connector.
b TC OUT (time code output) connector (BNC type)
To synchronize the time code of an external VTR to that of
the camcorder, connect this connector to the reference time
code input connector of the external VTR.
c GENLOCK IN connector (BNC type)
• This connector inputs a reference signal when the
camera is to be genlocked or when the time code is to be
synchronized with external equipment. Use the
MAINTENANCE menu to adjust the genlock H-phase
(phase of horizontal sync signal) and the sub-carrier
phase.
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
• This connector also inputs a return video signal.
You can display the return video signal in the viewfinder
screen while holding the RET button down with
“RETURN VIDEO” set to “ON” on the GENLOCK
page of the OPERATION menu.
• This connector also inputs an external analog composite
video signal.
When the CBK-SC01 extension board is installed, you
can record the external analog composite video signal
input to this connector.
For details, see 3-4 “Recording Video Signals From
2-7 Time Code System
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 DISPLAY switch
5 RESET button
6 HOLD button
THUMBNAIL
SEL/SET
S.SEL
ESSENCE MARK
SUB CLIP
7 SEL/SET dial
CLIP MENU
SHIFT
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
PRESET
REGEN
CLOCK
8 PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch
9 F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch
Time code functions (2)
d DISPLAY switch
Turning the dial upward increases the value of the flashing
digit, and turning it downward decreases the value.
This cycles the data displayed in the counter display
through the sequence COUNTER, TC, and U-BIT.
COUNTER: Display the elapsed recording/playback time
(hours, minutes, seconds, frames).
h PRESET/REGEN (regeneration)/CLOCK switch
This switch selects whether to set a new time code or to
follow the already recorded time code.
TC: Display time code.
U-BIT: Display user bit data.
PRESET: Records time code with a preset initial value.
REGEN: Records time code continuous with the existing
time code recorded on the disc. Regardless of the
setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch, the
For details, see “Time code display” on page 34.
e RESET button
camcorder operates in R-RUN mode.
Pressing this button resets the time data displayed on the
counter display section to “00:00:00:00” or the user bit
data to “00000000.”
CLOCK: Records time code synchronized to the internal
clock. Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-
RUN switch, the camcorder operates in F-RUN mode.
f HOLD (display hold) button
i F-RUN/SET/R-RUN (free run/set/recording run)
switch
This switch selects the operating mode for the internal time
Pressing this button instantly freezes the time data
displayed in the counter display section. (The time code
generator continues running.) Pressing this button again
releases the hold. You can use this button, for example, to
determine the exact time of a particular shot.
When the HOLD button is activated, the time data is
displayed in the following format:
code generator.
F-RUN: Time code keeps advancing, regardless of the
operating state of the VDR. Use this setting when
aligning the time code with real time or when
synchronizing the time code with an external time
code.
SET: Set the switch to this position to set the time code or
user bits.
R-RUN: The time code value advances only during
recording. Use this setting to have a consecutive time
code on the disc.
For details of the counter display, see 2-9 “Warnings and
g SEL/SET (select/set) dial
To set a time code, user bit, or real time value, press this
dial so that the digit you want to change flashes.
30
2-7 Time Code System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-8 Warnings and Indications
Besides the viewfinder, speaker and earphones, the
indicators and displays described in this section also
provide you with information such as the operating state of
the camcorder and warnings.
1 Tally indicator
2 DISPLAY switch
3 TALLY switch
4 Back tally indicator
5 Back tally switch
8 Color LCD
9 WARNING indicator
q; ACCESS indicator
6 Monochrome LCD
qa Rear tally indicator
7 DISP SEL switch
qs LCD switch
Warning and indication functions
a Tally indicator
Note
Setting the TALLY switch on the viewfinder to HIGH or
LOW enables this indicator. It lights when the VDR starts
recording. Like the REC indicator in the viewfinder, it also
flashes to provide warnings. The brightness of this
indicator when it is lit can be switched with the TALLY
switch.
Setting the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON displays the
menu on the viewfinder screen even if the DISPLAY
switch is set to OFF.
c TALLY switch
This switch controls the tally indicator as follows.
HIGH: The tally indicator brightness is high.
OFF: The tally indicator is disabled.
LOW: The tally indicator brightness is low.
b DISPLAY switch
This switches the indications on the viewfinder screen on
or off.
ON: The indications appear on the viewfinder screen.
OFF: The indications do not appear on the viewfinder
screen.
d Back tally indicator
When the back tally switch is set to ON, this indicator has
the same function as the tally indicator.
2-8 Warnings and Indications
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
e Back tally switch
This switch enables or disables the back tally and rear tally
indicators.
ON: The back tally and rear tally indicators are enabled.
OFF: The back tally and rear tally indicators are disabled.
2-9 Warnings and
Indications on the
LCDs
f Monochrome LCD
This shows the remaining battery capacity, remaining disc
capacity, time data, and so on.
2-9-1 Monochrome LCD
Disc status and battery status
g DISP SEL (display selection) switch
This switches the display in the color LCD.
Disc status indicator
CHAR: Display video with superimposed text. With the
MENU ON/OFF switch set to OFF, also display
camcorder status indications similar to those displayed
in the viewfinder (see 7-2 “Status Display on the
Full capacity is available.
MONI: Display video without superimposed text.
STATUS: Display counter, warnings, and audio levels.
Close to full state: “DISC” flashes.
Full (disc must be replaced):
“DISC” and “E” flash.
h Color LCD
This displays VDR-related warnings, remaining battery
capacity, remaining disc capacity, audio levels, time data,
and so on.
i WARNING indicator
This indicator lights up or flashes when there is a fault in
the VDR.
Battery status indicator
j ACCESS indicator
This lights when data is written to or read from the disc.
Fully charged
k Rear tally indicator
When the back tally switch is set to ON, this indicator has
the same function as the tally indicator.
Nearly dead: “BATT” flashes.
Dead battery (battery must be
charged): “BATT” and “E” flash.
l LCD switch
This controls the backlights of the color LCD and the
monochrome LCD.
OFF: The color LCD is turned off (the backlight of the
monochrome LCD is off).
L: The color LCD is adjusted for viewing indoors (the
backlight of the monochrome LCD is on).
H: The color LCD is adjusted for viewing outdoors (the
backlight of the monochrome LCD is on).
Display of remaining disc capacity and remaining battery capacity on
the monochrome LCD
32
2-9 Warnings and Indications on the LCDs
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Time code display
2-9-2 Color LCD
Lights when the time code or real time is
displayed.
Disc status, battery status and audio level
Time counter display: Shows the time
code, user bits, and real time.
Disc status indicator
Full capacity is available.
Close to full state: “DISC” flashes.
Full (disc must be replaced): “DISC” and “E” flash.
1)
Lights when the HOLD button is pressed.
1) When the HOLD button is pressed to hold the time code value,
the time code is displayed in the format shown below. When
the HOLD button is pressed again to release the hold, the time
code is displayed in the normal format
Formats of video and audio
signals to be redorded.
Audio level meters
Time code display on the monochrome LCD
Battery status indicator
Fully charged
Nearly dead: “BATT” flashes.
Dead battery (battery must be charged): “BATT”
and “E” flash.
Display of remaining disc capacity, remaining battery capacity, and
audio levels on the color LCD
2-9 Warnings and Indications on the LCDs
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VDR operation status and status
indicators
2-10 Indicators in the
Viewfinder
Several indicators are provided above and below the
viewfinder screen to indicate the current state and
adjustments of the camera.
1 TALLY indicator
2 REC (recording) indicator
3 BATT (battery) indicator
Warning display area
This shows a message if a recording fault or
condensation is detected.
Viewfinder screen
4
(warning) indicator
5 Spare indicator
VDR operation and status indicators on the color LCD
6 SAVE indicator
Time code display
Indicators on the viewfinder
Lights in playback mode.
Lights in non-drop frame
mode. (PDW-510/530 only)
a TALLY (green tallly) indicator
This indicator lights when the camcorder is in Picture Cash
mode. Also, this indicator lights when a green tally signal
is received from the camera control unit.
Lights when the camcorder is
synchronized with an external time code.
Lights when the time code
generator is on hold.
b REC (recording, red tally) indicator
This indicator lights red when recording starts and remains
lit during recording. It also lights when a red tally signal is
received from the camera control unit and flashes to give a
warning.
c BATT (battery) indicator
This indicator starts flashing when the battery connected to
the camcorder is nearly exhausted, and stays lit when the
battery is completely exhausted.
The battery power level at which the indicator starts
flashing can be set on the BATTERY 1 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu.
1)
Lights when the HOLD button is pressed
Lights when the time code or real time is displayed.
Time counter display: Shows the time code, user
bit data, and real time.
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
d
(warning) indicator
1) When the HOLD button is pressed to hold the time code value,
the time code is displayed in the format shown below. When the
HOLD button is pressed again to release the hold, the time code
is displayed in the normal format.
This indicator lights when any of the following conditions
occurs with the corresponding item set to ON on the “!”
LED page of the USER menu.
• The gain is set to other than 0 dB.
• The SHUTTER selector is set to ON (scan mode I).
• The shutter speed is set to a value other than 1/60 (scan
mode PsF).
Time code display on the color LCD
34
2-10 Indicators in the Viewfinder
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST.
• ATW is enabled.
• The lens extender is used.
• The FILTER selector is set to other than ND:1/CC:B.
• The reference value of auto iris adjustment is not the
standard value.
e Spare indicator
This is a spare indicator.
This can be used as a REC indicator by setting REC
TALLY to BOTH in the FUNCTION 3 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu.
f SAVE indicator
This indicator lights when the VDR SAVE/STBY switch
is set to SAVE, putting the VDR into power save mode.
2-10 Indicators in the Viewfinder
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Playback
3
Chapter
• Do not leave cartridges where dust may be able to gain
ingress.
• Store cartridges in their cases.
3-1 Handling Discs
Care of the discs
• Remove dust and dirt on the outside of a cartridge using
a soft dry cloth.
• If condensation forms, allow ample time to dry before
use.
3-1-1 Discs Used for Recording and
Playback
This camcorder uses the following disc for recording and
playback:
3-1-3 Write-Protecting Discs
PFD23 Professional Disc (capacity 23.3 GB)
To protect the content recorded on the disc from accidental
erasure, move the Write Inhibit tab on the lower surface of
the disc in the direction of the arrow, as shown in the
following figure.
Note
It is not possible to use the following discs for recording or
playback:
• Blu-ray Disc
• Professional Disc for Data
Lower surface of the disc
Write Inhibit tab
3-1-2 Notes on Handling
Handling
The Professional Disc is housed in a cartridge, and is
designed to allow handling free of risk from dust or
fingerprints. However, if the cartridge is subjected to a
severe shock, for example by dropping it, this can result in
damage or scratching of the disc. If the disc is scratched, it
may be impossible to record video/audio, or to play back
the content recorded on the disc. The discs should be
handled and stored carefully.
E
V
A
S
Slide in the direction of the arrow
• Do not touch the surface of the disc itself within the
cartridge.
Write Inhibit tab settings
• Deliberately opening the shutter may cause damage.
• Do not disassemble the cartridge.
SAVE
SAVE
Recording enabled
Recording disabled
• The supplied adhesive labels are recommended for
indexing discs. Apply the label in the correct position.
Storage
You can lock individual clips to prevent them from being
• Do not store discs where they may be subjected to direct
sunlight, or in other places where the temperature or
humidity is high.
36
3-1 Handling Discs
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-1-4 Loading and Unloading a Disc
Insert the disc.
Loading a disc
Proceed as follows.
V indication on
the outside
1
Turn on the POWER switch.
Push and
close the lid.
The disc is loaded.
POWER switch
HUMID indicator
Note
To insert the disc correctly, make sure that the
camcorder is in the upright position (the grip upside,
the bottom downside).
Note
Unloading a disc
If there is condensation inside the VDR section, the
message “HUMID” appears in the viewfinder screen
and the color LCD. If this happens, wait until the
indicator goes off before going on to step 2.
With the power supply on, press the EJECT button to open
the disc compartment lid and eject the disc. Then remove
the disc. If you are not going to insert another disc, close
the disc compartment lid.
2
Press the EJECT button.
Unloading a disc when the power supply is off
If the battery is exhausted, it is not possible to remove the
disc by pressing the EJECT button. In such cases, use the
following emergency procedure to remove the disc
manually.
This opens the lid of the disc compartment.
EJECT button
1
2
Turn off the POWER switch.
Carry out the operation shown in the following figure.
Lid of the disc
compartment
3
Insert the disc in the V direction, and close the disc
compartment lid manually.
3-1 Handling Discs
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Open this rubber cover.
2 Using a screwdriver or
similar implement, slide
the black metal plate
visible inside, in the
direction of the rear of the
camcorder.
The disc compartment lid
opens. A red Phillips
screw is visible inside the
rubber cap.
2
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to
“MAINTENANCE”, and press the MENU knob.
3 Insert a screwdriver into
the Phillips screw, and
turn counterclockwise
(the direction shown on
the rubber cap).
This ejects the disc.
4 Close the rubber cover
firmly.
If this is the first time the MAINTENANCE menu has
been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the
MAINTENANCE menu appears. If the menu has been
used before, the last accessed page appears.
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU
knob to move the b mark to “DISC”, and press the
MENU knob to display the DISC page.
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob
until the DISC page appears, then press the MENU
knob to select the page.
M19 DISC
TOP
DELETE LAST CLIP:
DELETE ALL CLIPS:
EXEC
EXEC
QUICK FORMAT
:
EXEC
Unloading a disc manually when the power supply is off
You need not return the screw to its original position after
taking out the disc. Turning on the power makes the disc
compartment mechanism operable again.
4
5
Press the MENU knob, then turn it to move the b mark
to “QUICK FORMAT”, and press the MENU knob
again.
3-1-5 Formatting a Disc
The message “EXECUTE OK? YES b NO” appears.
Using a new disc
An unused disc requires no formatting operation. The disc
is automatically formatted so that it is ready to use when
loaded into this unit.
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “YES”,
and press the MENU knob again.
Formatting is completed and the message
“COMPLETE” appears.
Using a disc on which material is recorded
To format a recorded disc, load the disc into the unit then
do as follows.
3-1-6 Handling of Discs When
Recording Does Not End
Normally (Salvage Function)
Note
Recording processing does not end normally if, for
example, the battery pack is removed during recording, or
if the power cord is disconnected during recording.
Because the file system is not updated, video and audio
data recorded in real time is not recognized as files and clip
contents recorded up to that point are lost.
When a recorded disc is formatted, all the data on the disc
1
Holding down the MENU knob, move the MENU ON/
OFF switch from OFF to ON.
The TOP menu appears.
38
3-1 Handling Discs
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
However, this unit has a salvage function which can hold
losses to the minimum by reconstructing clips on such
discs.
Note that no recorded clip contents are lost when the
POWER switch is turned off and when battery exhaustion
is detected, because the unit does not enter power saving
mode until after the end of recording processing.
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to YES,
then press the MENU knob.
Salvage processing starts, and the message
“EXECUTING.” appears.
A results message appears when the processing
finishes.
• If the salvage succeeded, the message
“COMPLETED.” appears.
• If the salvage failed, the message
“INCOMPLETED.” appears. Clips for which
recording did not end normally are lost.
Notes
• Do not disconnect the battery pack or power cord until
recording processing has finished and the ACCESS
indicator has gone out.
• This function salvages as much recorded material as
possible after an unforeseen accident, but 100%
restoration cannot be guaranteed.
• Even when this function is used, it is not possible to
recover data from immediately before the interruption of
recording. The amount of data lost is as follows.
- Quick salvage: From 2 to 4 seconds of data before the
interruption of recording.
To exit without salvaging
Select NO in step 2 to exit without performing salvage
processing.
However, the status of the disc does not change. Salvage is
still required to recover the clips for which recording did
not end normally. The salvage message will appear again
when that disc is inserted again, or when the camcorder is
powered on again.
- Full salvage: From 4 to 6 seconds of data before the
interruption of recording.
More data may be lost when functions such as Picture
Cache and Interval Rec are being used.
Note
If salvage processing is not done, sections which were
recorded normally can be played back, but no new
recording can be done on the disc.
Quick salvage
When the unit is powered on again after a recording
interruption due to a power interruption, with the disc still
loaded in the unit, clips are reconstructed on the basis of
backup data stored in nonvolatile memory and markers
recorded on the disc.
Processing time is about 5 seconds.
Full salvage
When recording on an XDCAM device is interrupted
because of a power interruption, and a disc is manually
ejected from that device with the power off, clips are
reconstructed on the basis of markers recorded on the disc
when the disc is loaded in this unit. Therefore, processing
takes longer than for a quick salvage (about 30 seconds,
although it depends on the state of the disc).
Proceed as follows to perform a full salvage.
1
Insert the disc on which recording did not end
normally.
The following salvage message appears.
SALVAGE
TO RECORD ON THE
DISC, IT IS NECESSARY
TO EXECUTE SALVAGE.
SALVAGE OK?
YES NO
3-1 Handling Discs
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
Attach a fully charged battery pack.
For details, see 9-1 “Power Supply” on page 154.
Turn on the POWER switch.
3-2 Recording
2
3
3-2-1 Basic Procedures
Set the DISP SEL switch to STATUS, and check on
the color LCD that the following conditions are met.
This section describes the basic procedures for shooting
and recording.
Before a shooting session, ensure that the camcorder is
functioning properly.
• The HUMID indicator is not showing.
If it is, wait until it disappears.
• The battery status indicator (x) shows at least five
segments.
If it does not, replace the battery pack with a fully
charged one.
Recording format settings (PDW-530/530P
only)
With the PDW-530/530P you can select the recording
formats for each of video and audio.
Note that it is not possible to use different recording
formats on a single disc.
4
5
Check that there are no obstructions such as cables
near the disc compartment lid. Then press the EJECT
button to open the disc compartment lid.
After checking that the disc is not write-protected (see
Be sure to select the same format as the existing recording
if you use a disc on which material is recorded, or
otherwise use a different disc.
Basic procedure for shooting: from
adjusting the black balance and white
balance to stopping recording
For details of the setting operations, see 5-1-1 “Setting the
Switch settings
After turning on the power and loading a disc, set the
switches and selectors as shown below and begin
operation.
Thumbnail image setting
As required, you can select the frame to display as the
thumbnail image of a clip.
(The factory default setting is to display the first frame in
the clip as the thumbnail image.)
DISPLAY: ON
AUDIO SELECT
CH-1/CH-2: AUTO
more information about how to make this setting.
Iris: Automatic
Zoom: Automatic
Basic procedure for shooting: from turning
on the camcorder to loading a disc
OUTPUT/DCC: CAM, DCC ON
Proceed as follows.
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN: F-RUN or R-RUN
(set as needed)
4
5
1
Switch and selector settings before shooting
Shooting
Proceed as follows.
3
2
Basic procedure for shooting: from power supply to disc loading
40
3-2 Recording
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For details, see 7-3-5 “Assigning Functions to
1,2
2
3,5
During recording, the REC indicator lights in the
viewfinder. Perform zooming and focus control, if
necessary.
Note
During recording (while the ACCESS indicator is lit)
do not remove the battery pack. If you do, the internal
processing for recording may not finish properly,
which may cause the last few seconds of recording to
be lost.
4
5,6
Basic procedure for shooting: from adjusting the black balance and
white balance to stopping recording
For details, see 3-1-6 “Handling of Discs When
1
Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to BLK to adjust the
black balance.
6
7
To stop recording, press the REC START button or the
VTR button on the lens again.
For details of black balance adjustment, see 5-2-1
The REC indicator in the viewfinder goes off.
The material recorded from step 5 to step 6 is saved as
a single clip.
2
Select the CC filter and ND filter to match the lighting
conditions, and adjust the white balance.
When the white balance settings are already in
memory
Set the WHITE BAL switch to A or B.
To play back the recorded clip
Press the PREV button, then press the PLAY/PAUSE
button to play from the beginning of the clip.
When the white balance setting is not in memory
and you do not have enough time to adjust the
white balance
Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.
This automatically adjusts the white balance as
follows, depending on the setting of the FILTER knob.
• For the PDW-530/530P:
Repeat steps 5 and 6 as required for shooting.
Each time you repeat steps 5 and 6, successive clips
are recorded on the disc.
Clip 1
Clip 2
Clip 3
B: 3200 K, C: 4300 K, D: 6300 K
• For the PDW-510/510P:
1: 3200 K, 3: 5600 K
REC
START
REC REC
STOP START
REC REC
STOP START
REC
STOP
For details, see 5-2-2 “Adjusting the White Balance”
Notes
3
4
Aim the camera at the subject and adjust the focus and
zoom.
• It is not possible to record a clip shorter than 2 seconds.
If you stop recording within 2 seconds of starting, this
results in a 2-second clip.
If you stop recording and restart within 2 seconds of the
original start, this creates a single continuous clip from
the original start time.
If necessary, set the electronic shutter for an
appropriate mode and speed.
For details, see 5-3 “Setting the Electronic Shutter”
• The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on a
single disc is 300. If an attempt is made to record more
than 300 clips, the error message “DISC FULL!”
appears, even if there is free capacity on the disc.
5
To start recording, press the REC START button or
the VTR button on the lens.
Playback control buttons
If the recording start/stop function is assigned to the
ASSIGN 1/3/4 switch, this switch functions as REC
START button.
During recording, the playback control buttons (EJECT, F
REV, F FWD, NEXT, PREV, PLAY/PAUSE, STOP)
have no effect.
3-2 Recording
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The message “DELETE OK? YES b NO” appears.
3-2-2 Deleting Clips
5
6
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “YES”,
With this camcorder you can delete clips one at a time, in
sequence from the last recorded clip, or you can delete all
clips in a single operation.
and press the MENU knob again.
The last recorded clip is deleted.
You can use the THUMBNAIL menu to delete the selected
clip or all clips. For details, see “Deleting clips” (page
66).
By repeating steps 4 and 5, you can delete a number of
clips in sequence from the last recorded clip.
To delete the last recorded clip
Clip 1
Clip 2
Clip 3
Note
Clips can be deleted in the sequence 3 t 2 t 1.
If the clip is locked, it cannot be deleted.
Proceed as follows.
To delete all clips within the disc
1
Holding down the MENU knob, move the MENU ON/
OFF switch from OFF to ON.
Note
The TOP menu appears.
Carrying out the following procedure deletes all clips that
are not locked.
Proceed as follows.
1
2
On the DISC page (see the previous item), move the b
mark to “DELETE ALL CLIPS”, and press the MENU
knob.
The message “DELETE OK? YES b NO” appears.
2
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to
To execute deleting, turn the MENU knob to move the
b mark to “YES”, and press the MENU knob.
“MAINTENANCE”, and press the MENU knob.
If this is the first time the MAINTENANCE menu has
been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the menu
appears. If the menu has been used before, the last
accessed page appears.
This deletes all clips within the disc.
3-2-3 Recording Essence Marks
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU
knob to move the b mark to “DISC”, and press the
MENU knob.
Shot marks and other essence marks can be recorded on the
disc.
Recording essence marks for scenes containing important
images and sounds enables quick access to the marked
points. This increases editing efficiency.
Some essence marks are recorded automatically, for
example when recording starts and when the flash
operates. Others are recorded manually.
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob
until the DISC page appears, then press the MENU
knob to select the page.
M19 DISC
TOP
DELETE LAST CLIP:
DELETE ALL CLIPS:
EXEC
EXEC
To specify essence marks to be recorded on the
disc
QUICK FORMAT
:
EXEC
Proceed as follows.
4
Press the MENU knob, then turn it to move the b mark
to “DELETE LAST CLIP”, and press the MENU knob
again.
42
3-2 Recording
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SHUTTER CHG. MARK: Recorded when the
shutter speed is changed.
WHITE CHG. MARK: Recorded when the white
balance is changed.
FLASH MARK: Recorded when a sudden brightness
change occurs as when the flash operates or when
the camcorder in recording mode is suddenly
moved into an indoor space from a bright outdoor
space.
MENU knob
MENU ON/OFF
switch
5
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “SHOT
MARK 1”.
1
Holding down the MENU knob, move the MENU ON/
OFF switch from OFF to ON.
M10 ESSENCE MARK
TOP
The TOP menu appears.
SHOT MARK 1
SHOT MARK 2
:
:
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
10
OVER AUDIO LIMIT :
GAIN CHG. MARK
FILTER CHG. MARK :
SHUTTER CHG. MARK:
WHITE CHG. MARK
FLASH MARK
FLASH MARK LEVEL :
INDEX PIC. POS.
:
:
:
:
0SEC
6
7
Press the MENU knob.
The b mark to the left of “SHOT MARK 1” changes
to a z mark and the z mark to the left of the setting
changes to a ? mark.
2
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to
“MAINTENANCE”.
Press the MENU knob.
If you want to record the essence mark, turn the
MENU knob to display “ON”. If you do not want to
record it, turn the MENU knob to display “OFF”.
If this is the first time the MAINTENANCE menu has
been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the menu
appears. If the menu has been used before, the last
accessed page appears.
8
9
Press the MENU knob.
Repeat steps 5 to 8 to set the remaining essence marks.
4
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU
knob to move the b mark to “ESSENCE MARK”,
then press the MENU knob.
10When FLASH MARK is “ON”, use the FLASH
MARK LEVEL item to set the threshold brightness
value (in the range 1 to 20) for essence mark
recording.
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob
until the ESSENCE page appears, then press the
MENU knob to select the page.
11Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF to end the
menu operation.
?M10 ESSENCE MARK
TOP
SHOT MARK 1
SHOT MARK 2
:
:
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
10
Recording a SHOT MARK 1 essence mark
Press the RET button once.
“ShotMark1” appears on the viewfinder screen for about
one second near the time code display.
If SHOT MARK 1 recording has been assigned to one of
the assignable switches, you can also use that switch to
record a SHOT MARK 1 essence mark.
OVER AUDIO LIMIT :
GAIN CHG. MARK
FILTER CHG. MARK :
SHUTTER CHG. MARK:
WHITE CHG. MARK
FLASH MARK
FLASH MARK LEVEL :
INDEX PIC. POS.
:
:
:
:
0SEC
The items show the following types of essence marks.
SHOT MARK 1/2: Recorded manually.
OVER AUDIO LIMIT: Recorded when the audio
level exceeds 0 dBFS.
GAIN CHG. MARK: Recorded when the gain value
is changed.
4 Switches” (page 133) for more information about how to
make assignments.
FILTER CHG. MARK: Recorded when the filter is
changed.
3-2 Recording
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording a SHOT MARK 2 essence mark
Press the RET button twice in quick succession during
recording or playback.
“ShotMark2” appears in the viewfinder screen for about
one second near the time code display.
If SHOT MARK 2 recording has been assigned to one of
the assignable switches, you can also use that switch to
record a SHOT MARK 2 essence mark.
MENU knob
MENU ON/OFF
switch
3-2-4 Starting a Shoot With a Few
Seconds of Pre-Stored Picture
Data (Picture Cache Function)
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.
The last accessed menu page appears on the screen.
Turn the MENU knob until the FUNCTION 1 page
appears.
The camcorder has a large capacity internal memory, in
which you can cache the last few seconds (maximum 12
seconds) of captured video and audio, so that recording
starts from a point just before you press the REC START
button or VTR button on the lens.
? 03 FUNCTION1
TOP
ASSIGN SW <1>
ASSIGN SW <2>
ASSIGN SW <3>
ASSIGN SW <4>
TURBO SW
:
:
:
:
:
:
ATW
OFF
OFF
OFF
Setting the Picture Cache time/Picture
Cache mode
TURBO
DF
OFF
DF/NDF
CACHE/INTVAL REC:
To record in Picture Cache mode, you need to turn on
Picture Cache mode and set the picture data storage time
(Picture Cache time) using the USER menu.
3
Press the MENU knob.
The Picture Cache time determines the number of seconds
recorded from the Picture Cache, counting back from the
time when you press the REC START button or the VTR
button on the lens to start recording. However, the number
of seconds actually recorded from the Picture Cache may
be shorter immediately after the setting of the VDR SAVE/
STBY switch is changed, and in the special situations
explained in the following notes.
A b mark appears on the left of the currently selected
item and a z mark appears on the left of the setting.
03 FUNCTION1
TOP
ASSIGN SW <1>
ASSIGN SW <2>
ASSIGN SW <3>
ASSIGN SW <4>
TURBO SW
:
:
:
:
:
:
ATW
OFF
OFF
OFF
TURBO
DF
OFF
DF/NDF
CACHE/INTVAL REC:
Notes
• The contents of picture cache memory are unstable for a
short time immediately after you select Picture Cache
mode or change the Picture Cache time. Therefore, if
you put the unit into recording mode by pressing the
REC START button or the VTR button on the lens
immediately after such operation, pictures just before
such operation cannot be recorded.
Also, a certain amount of time is required to actually
start recording to a disc immediately after you insert a
disc and when the VDR SAVE/STBY switch is set to
SAVE. In these cases, the number of seconds that can
actually be recorded from the picture cache may be
fewer than the specified picture cache time.
4
5
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to
“CACHE/INTVAL REC”.
Press the MENU knob.
The b mark on the left of “CACHE/INTVAL REC”
changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the
setting changes to a ? mark.
03 FUNCTION1
TOP
ASSIGN SW <1>
ASSIGN SW <2>
ASSIGN SW <3>
ASSIGN SW <4>
TURBO SW
:
:
:
:
:
:
ATW
OFF
OFF
• During playback or recording review, no data is saved to
the picture cache memory. Thus it is not possible to use
this function to rerecord the last few seconds of material
from playback or recording review.
OFF
TURBO
DF
OFF
DF/NDF
CACHE/INTVAL REC:
To turn Picture Cache mode on, proceed as follows.
44
3-2 Recording
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Turn the MENU knob until “CACHE” appears.
The menu disappears, and the display indicating the
current status of the camcorder appears along the top
and bottom of the screen.
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes in
the following sequence: OFF y CACHE y A. INT
y M. INT.
When “CACHE” appears, the camcorder is in Picture
Cache mode, where picture, sound, and time code are
constantly saved in memory. The TALLY indicator
(green) is on while picture data is being stored in
memory.
Settings made in Picture Cache mode are maintained until
changed.
You can turn Picture Cache mode on and off by assigning
the Picture Cache ON/OFF function to one of the
assignable switches (ASSIGN 1/2/3/4 and TURBO GAIN
buttons), and pressing the switch.
03 FUNCTION1
TOP
For detailed information on the ASSIGN 1/2/3/4 switches,
ASSIGN SW <1>
ASSIGN SW <2>
ASSIGN SW <3>
ASSIGN SW <4>
TURBO SW
:
:
:
:
:
:
ATW
OFF
OFF
OFF
TURBO
DF
DF/NDF
CACHE/INTVAL REC: CACHE
CACHE REC TIME 0-2s
Notes
:
• You can change the Picture Cache mode menu settings
while recording; any changes that you make, however,
do not take effect until after the recording operation is
completed.
• In Picture Cache mode, the internal time code generator
operating mode is always F-RUN regardless of the
setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch.
7
8
Press the MENU knob.
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark.
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “CACHE
REC TIME”.
Camcorder operations in Picture Cache mode
The recording procedure in Picture Cache time is basically
the same as that for normal recording. However, note the
following differences.
03 FUNCTION1
TOP
• When you record in Picture Cache mode, the picture you
are shooting now is recorded to disc after the picture data
stored in memory (equal to the Picture Cache time) is
recorded to disc. For this reason, disc access may
continue for a short time after you press the REC
START button to stop recording. During this time, the
playback control buttons are disabled, as in recording
mode. Also, if you press the REC START button or the
VTR button on the lens to restart recording during this
time, a separate clip is recorded.
• When you press the REC START button or the VTR
button on the lens to restart recording during disc access,
the start point of the recorded clip may be later than the
Picture Cache time, especially when there are a large
number of clips recorded on the disc. In Picture Cache
mode, you should avoid stop and start recording
operations in quick succession.
• The time disc access stops after the REC START button
is pressed equals the Picture Cache time. However, if
you start recording within the Picture Cache time
immediately after selecting Picture Cache mode,
changing the Picture Cache time or performing playback
or recording review, the picture data for the duration of
the Picture Cache time will not be stored in memory.
Thus, the time disc access stops after the STOP button is
pressed becomes shorter than the Picture Cache time.
• In Picture Cache mode, you cannot set the F-RUN/SET/
R-RUN switch to SET to make time code settings. To
make time code settings, first exit Picture Cache mode.
ASSIGN SW <1>
ASSIGN SW <2>
ASSIGN SW <3>
ASSIGN SW <4>
TURBO SW
:
:
:
:
:
:
ATW
OFF
OFF
OFF
TURBO
DF
DF/NDF
CACHE/INTVAL REC: CACHE
CACHE REC TIME 0-2s
:
9
Press the MENU knob.
The b mark on the left of “CACHE REC TIME”
changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the
setting changes to a ? mark.
10Turn the MENU knob until the desired Picture Cache
time appears.
As you turn the MENU knob, the Picture Cache time
changes in the following sequence: 0-2s y 2-4s y
4-6s y 6-8s y 8-10s y 10-12s.
11Press the MENU knob.
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark.
12To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF.
3-2 Recording
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When power is lost during recording
• When the power is turned off during recording, the
camcorder will switch itself off after disc access has
continued for a few seconds to record the picture in the
instant of power off.
• If you remove the battery, pull out the DC cable, or cut
power to the AC adaptor during recording, video and
audio stored in memory will be lost without being
recorded to the disc. For this reason, make sure you do
not change the battery while recording.
Notes
• To make settings for Auto Interval Rec mode, set
“TAKE TOTAL TIME” first, then “REC TIME”.
• To turn on the light automatically before starting to
record, set the LIGHT switch to AUTO.
To turn on Auto Interval Rec mode, proceed as follows.
3-2-5 Time-Lapse Video (Interval
Rec Function)
Using the memory in the camcorder, you can capture time-
lapse video. There are two modes for this function, which
is known as “Interval Rec.”
MENU ON/OFF switch
MENU knob
• Auto Interval Rec mode
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.
In Auto Interval Rec mode, pictures are automatically
shot a frame at a time at the specified interval and stored
in memory. To use this function you must set the total
time for shooting (TAKE TOTAL TIME) and the length
of time for recording on the disc (REC TIME).
• Manual Interval Rec mode
The last accessed menu page appears on the screen.
Turn the MENU knob until the FUNCTION 1 page
appears.
A specified number of frames (NUMBER OF FRAME)
is recorded when you press the REC START button or
the lens VTR button.
There are two Manual Interval Rec modes: a single shot
mode in which recording is done once with each press of
the button, and a consecutive mode in which recording is
done repeatedly at a specified interval after the button is
pressed.
? 03 FUNCTION1
TOP
ASSIGN SW <1>
ASSIGN SW <2>
ASSIGN SW <3>
ASSIGN SW <4>
TURBO SW
:
:
:
:
:
:
ATW
OFF
OFF
OFF
TURBO
DF
OFF
DF/NDF
CACHE/INTVAL REC:
A pre-lighting function is available in Auto Interval Rec
mode and the consecutive mode of Manual Interval Rec
mode. This function automatically turns on the light before
recording starts, which allows you to record pictures under
stable light and color temperature conditions.
3
Press the MENU knob.
A b mark appears on the left of the currently selected
item and a z mark appears on the left of the setting.
03 FUNCTION1
TOP
Note
ASSIGN SW <1>
ASSIGN SW <2>
ASSIGN SW <3>
ASSIGN SW <4>
TURBO SW
:
:
:
:
:
:
ATW
OFF
OFF
The camcorder cannot be put into Interval Rec mode when
the scanning mode is 24P (with the CBK-FC01 expansion
OFF
TURBO
DF
OFF
DF/NDF
CACHE/INTVAL REC:
Auto Interval Rec mode settings and
shooting
4
5
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to
To make settings before shooting
“CACHE/INTVAL REC”.
To record in Auto Interval Rec mode, you need to turn on
Auto Interval Rec and set the total time from start to finish
of shooting (TAKE TOTAL TIME) and the length of time
for recording on the disc (REC TIME), using the USER
menu.
Press the MENU knob.
The b mark on the left of “CACHE/INTVAL REC”
changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the
setting changes to a ? mark.
46
3-2 Recording
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5MIN y 10MIN y 15MIN y 20MIN y
30MIN y 40MIN y 50MIN y 1H y 2H y
3H y 4H y 5H y 7H y 10H y 15H y 20H
y 30H y 40H y 50H y 70H y 100H.
03 FUNCTION1
TOP
ASSIGN SW <1>
ASSIGN SW <2>
ASSIGN SW <3>
ASSIGN SW <4>
TURBO SW
:
:
:
:
:
:
ATW
OFF
OFF
OFF
TURBO
DF
OFF
DF/NDF
CACHE/INTVAL REC:
Here MIN means minutes (5MIN is 5 minutes) and H
means hours (1H is one hour).
11Press the MENU knob.
6
Turn the MENU knob until A. INT appears.
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark.
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes in
the following sequence: OFF y CACHE y A. INT
y M. INT.
When A. INT appears, the camcorder is in Auto
Interval Rec mode. The TALLY indicator (green) in
the viewfinder flashes (one flash/second) while the
camcorder is in this mode. Also, TAKE TOTAL
TIME, REC TIME and PRE-LIGHTING appear.
12Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “REC
TIME”.
? 03 FUNCTION1
TOP
ASSIGN SW <1>
ASSIGN SW <2>
ASSIGN SW <3>
ASSIGN SW <4>
TURBO SW
:
:
:
:
:
:
ATW
OFF
OFF
OFF
TURBO
DF
DF/NDF
03 FUNCTION1
TOP
CACHE/INTVAL REC: A.INT
TAKE TOTAL TIME :
:
20M
5SEC
OFF
ASSIGN SW <1>
ASSIGN SW <2>
ASSIGN SW <3>
ASSIGN SW <4>
TURBO SW
:
:
:
:
:
:
ATW
OFF
OFF
OFF
TURBO
DF
REC TIME
PRE-LIGHTING
:
DF/NDF
CACHE/INTVAL REC: A.INT
13Press the MENU knob.
TAKE TOTAL TIME :
:
5MIN
5SEC
OFF
REC TIME
PRE-LIGHTING
:
The b mark on the left of “REC TIME” changes to a
z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting
changes to a ? mark.
7
8
Press the MENU knob.
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark.
14Turn the MENU knob until the desired time to be
recorded on the disc appears.
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting of REC
TIME changes in the following sequence: 5SEC y
10SEC y 15SEC y 20SEC y 30SEC y
40SEC y 50SEC y 1MIN y 2MIN y
.......85MIN.
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “TAKE
? 03 FUNCTION1
TOP
Here SEC means seconds (5SEC is 5 seconds) and
MIN means minutes (1MIN is one minute).
You cannot set a REC TIME that is more than one
thirtieth of TAKE TOTAL TIME.
For example: When TAKE TOTAL TIME is set to 1H,
the maximum value of REC TIME is 2 MIN. (60
minutes divided by 30 gives 2 minutes.)
ASSIGN SW <1>
ASSIGN SW <2>
ASSIGN SW <3>
ASSIGN SW <4>
TURBO SW
:
:
:
:
:
:
ATW
OFF
OFF
OFF
TURBO
DF
DF/NDF
CACHE/INTVAL REC: A.INT
TAKE TOTAL TIME :
:
5MIN
5SEC
OFF
REC TIME
PRE-LIGHTING
:
9
Press the MENU knob.
15Press the MENU knob.
The b mark on the left of “TAKE TOTAL TIME”
changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the
setting changes to a ? mark.
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark.
16Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “PRE-
10Turn the MENU knob until the desired setting of
LIGHTING”.
“TAKE TOTAL TIME” appears.
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting of TAKE
TOTAL TIME changes in the following sequence:
3-2 Recording
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
After performing the basic procedures for shooting
and recording, following the instructions in 3-2-1
so that it will not move.
? 03 FUNCTION1
TOP
ASSIGN SW <1>
ASSIGN SW <2>
ASSIGN SW <3>
ASSIGN SW <4>
TURBO SW
:
:
:
:
:
:
ATW
OFF
OFF
OFF
TURBO
DF
DF/NDF
Press the REC START button on the camcorder or the
VTR button on the lens.
CACHE/INTVAL REC: A.INT
TAKE TOTAL TIME :
:
20M
5SEC
OFF
REC TIME
PRE-LIGHTING
:
The camcorder starts recording in Auto Interval Rec
mode. When you use the PRE-LIGHTING function,
recording starts after the light is switched on.
The actual recording to disc begins when the
camcorder has saved about ten seconds of video in
memory, so disc access is intermittent.
While recording in Auto Interval Rec mode, the
TALLY indicator (green) in the viewfinder flashes (4
flashes/second) and the message “AUTO INTERVAL
**M**S” flashes on the viewfinder screen.
When the camcorder is capturing the picture in
memory, the REC indicator (red) in the viewfinder
lights.
17Press the MENU knob.
The b mark on the left of “PRE-LIGHTING” changes
to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting
changes to a ? mark.
18Turn the MENU knob until the desired time to turn on
the light before starting to record appears.
As you turn the MENU knob, the PRE-LIGHTING
time changes in the following sequence: OFF y
2SEC y 5SEC y 10SEC.
After the length of time for recording on the disc (REC
TIME) has elapsed, the camcorder automatically stops
recording.
Notes
• Set the LIGHT switch on the camcorder to AUTO to
turn on the light before recording.
The light switch must also be set to ON. With these
settings, the light turns on and off automatically.
(However, the light remains on continuously if the
off time is less than 5 seconds.)
To continue auto interval recording
Press the REC START button on the camcorder or the
VTR button on the lens again.
The camcorder starts recording in Auto Interval Rec mode
again.
• When the LIGHT switch is set to MANUAL and the
light switch is set to ON, the light remains on
continuously.
To interrupt auto interval recording
Press the REC START button or the VTR button on the
lens. The camcorder stops recording.
However, disc access may occur for recording picture data
already stored in memory.
19Press the MENU knob.
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark.
To end auto interval recording
You can exit Auto Interval Rec mode using the following
two methods:
• Set the POWER switch to OFF.
• Set CACHE/INTVAL REC to OFF on the FUNCTION
1 page.
20To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF.
The menu disappears from the screen and the message
“AUTO INTERVAL **M**S” indicating Auto
Interval Rec mode appears along the bottom of the
screen.
Time required for shooting and time required for
recording on the disc
Auto Interval Rec mode is effective for shooting objects
that move very slowly. To use this function, you need to
set the total time for shooting (TAKE TOTAL TIME) and
the length of time for recording on the disc (REC TIME).
The time required for shooting is the time required to
capture the very slowly moving subject, and the camcorder
must be arranged so that during this time the subject is
always in the frame.
“**M**S” indicates the shooting interval. For
example, the message “AUTO INTERVAL 00M04S”
indicates that the shooting interval is four seconds.
Note
The camcorder exits Auto Interval Rec mode whenever it
is powered off. However, the TAKE TOTAL TIME and
REC TIME settings are maintained. You do not need to set
them again the next time you use Auto Interval Rec mode.
The disc recording time indicates the running time of the
completed recording. The camcorder calculates the time-
lapse interval from these two times.
To shoot and record in Auto Interval Rec mode
Proceed as follows.
48
3-2 Recording
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Single shot mode: Each time the REC START button or
VTR button on the lens is pressed, the camcorder
captures to memory a single shot consisting of the
specified number of video frames.
Total time for shooting (TAKE TOTAL TIME)
Shooting interval
Consecutive mode: Once the REC START button or VTR
button on the lens is pressed, the camcorder captures
consecutive shots to memory at the specified interval,
with each shot consisting of the specified number of
video frames.
To make settings before shooting
Proceed as follows.
Time for recording on the disc (REC TIME)
1
INTVAL REC on the FUNCTION 1 page.
Notes on Auto Interval Rec mode
Note the following points.
i.LINK
2
Turn the MENU knob until “M. INT” appears.
During interval recording, signal input/output through the
i.LINK interface is impossible.
03 FUNCTION1
TOP
Time code
ASSIGN SW <1>
ASSIGN SW <2>
ASSIGN SW <3>
ASSIGN SW <4>
TURBO SW
:
:
:
:
:
:
ATW
OFF
OFF
OFF
TURBO
DF
In Auto Interval Rec mode, the internal time code
generator runs in R-RUN mode regardless of how the F-
RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set.
DF/NDF
CACHE/INTVAL REC:? M.INT
NUMBER OF FRAME :
TRIGGER INTERVAL:
PRE-LIGHTING
1
1SEC
OFF
Audio
:
Audio signals are not recorded in Auto Interval Rec mode.
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes in
the following sequence: OFF y CACHE y A. INT
y M. INT.
Playback control buttons
While recording in Auto Interval Rec mode, you cannot
use the playback control buttons (EJECT, F REV, F FWD,
NEXT, PREV, PLAY/PAUSE and STOP). To use these
buttons, stop recording by pressing the REC START
button or the VTR button on the lens.
When M. INT appears, the camcorder is in Manual
Interval Rec mode and the TALLY indicator (green) in
the viewfinder flashes. “NUMBER OF FRAME” and
“TRIGGER INTERVAL” appear. When TRIGGER
INTERVAL is set to other than “M”, “PRE-
LIGHTING” also appears.
Menu operation
While recording in Auto Interval Rec mode, you cannot
change the settings of CACHE/INTVAL REC, TAKE
TOTAL TIME and REC TIME. To change the settings,
stop recording by pressing the REC START button or the
VTR button on the lens.
3
4
Press the MENU knob.
The z mark on the left of “CACHE/INTVAL REC”
changes to a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the
setting changes to a z mark.
When the camcorder power is switched off during
recording in Auto Interval Rec mode
• When you set the POWER switch to OFF, the camcorder
will switch off by itself after disc access has continued
for a few seconds to record the picture data stored in
memory.
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to
“NUMBER OF FRAME”.
03 FUNCTION1
TOP
• If you remove the battery, unplug the DC cable, or cut
power to the AC adaptor during auto interval recording,
picture data stored before recording stops (a maximum
of ten seconds) may be lost. Take care when changing
the battery.
ASSIGN SW <1>
ASSIGN SW <2>
ASSIGN SW <3>
ASSIGN SW <4>
TURBO SW
:
:
:
:
:
:
ATW
OFF
OFF
OFF
TURBO
DF
DF/NDF
CACHE/INTVAL REC: M.INT
NUMBER OF FRAME :
TRIGGER INTERVAL:
1
1SEC
OFF
PRE-LIGHTING
:
Manual Interval Rec mode settings and
shooting
Manual Interval Rec has the following two modes.
5
Press the MENU knob.
3-2 Recording
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The b mark on the left of “NUMBER OF FRAME”
changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the
setting changes to a ? mark.
03 FUNCTION1
TOP
ASSIGN SW <1>
ASSIGN SW <2>
ASSIGN SW <3>
ASSIGN SW <4>
TURBO SW
:
:
:
:
:
:
ATW
OFF
OFF
OFF
TURBO
DF
6
7
Turn the MENU knob until the desired number of
frames to be recorded in each shot appears.
DF/NDF
CACHE/INTVAL REC: S.INT
NUMBER OF FRAME :
TRIGGER INTERVAL:
2
1SEC
OFF
As you turn the MENU knob, the number changes in
PRE-LIGHTING
:
the following sequence: 1 y 2 y 4 y 8.
13Press the MENU knob.
Press the MENU knob.
The b mark to the left of “PRE-LIGHTING” changes
to a z mark, and the z mark to the left of the setting
changes to a ? mark.
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark.
8
9
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to
14Turn the MENU knob to display the length of time to
“TRIGGER INTERVAL”.
light before recording.
Press the MENU knob.
The setting changes in the following sequence: OFF
y 2SEC y 5SEC y 10SEC.
The b mark on the left of “TRIGGER INTERVAL”
changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the
setting changes to a ? mark.
Notes
• Set the LIGHT switch on the camcorder to AUTO to
turn on the light before recording.
The light switch must also be set to ON. With these
settings, the light turns on and off automatically.
However, the light remains on continuously if the
off time is less than 5 seconds.
• When the LIGHT switch is set to MANUAL and the
light switch is set to ON, the light remains on
continuously.
10Turn the Menu knob to select the desired Manual
Interval Rec mode.
• To select the single shot mode (recording only one
shot after one operation), set “TRIGGER
INTERVAL” to “M”. In the viewfinder, the TALLY
indicator (green) flashes twice per second.
• To select the consecutive mode (recording shots
repeatedly after one operation), set “TRIGGER
INTERVAL” to the desired length of interval. In the
viewfinder, the TALLY indicator (green) flashes
once per second.
15Press the MENU knob.
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark.
03 FUNCTION1
TOP
ASSIGN SW <1>
ASSIGN SW <2>
ASSIGN SW <3>
ASSIGN SW <4>
TURBO SW
:
:
:
:
:
:
ATW
OFF
OFF
OFF
TURBO
DF
16To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF.
DF/NDF
The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen and
the following message appears along the bottom of the
screen, indicating the current Manual Interval Rec
mode.
CACHE/INTVAL REC: M.INT
NUMBER OF FRAME :
TRIGGER INTERVAL:
PRE-LIGHTING
2
2SEC
OFF
:
In single shot mode: MANU INTERVAL *FRAME
In consecutive mode: MANU INTERVAL *SEC
*FRAME
“*FRAME” means the number of frames and “*SEC”,
the length of interval for the consecutive mode.
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes in
the following sequence: M y 1SEC y
2SEC........12H y 24H.
11Press the MENU knob.
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark.
Note
The camcorder exits Manual Interval Rec mode whenever
it is powered off. However, the NUMBER OF FRAME,
TRIGGER INTERVAL and PRE-LIGHTING settings are
maintained. You do not need to set them again the next
time you use Manual Interval Rec mode.
12If you selected the consecutive mode in step 10
(anything other than “M”), turn the MENU knob to
move the b mark to “PRE-LIGHTING”.
50
3-2 Recording
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To shoot and record in Manual Interval Rec mode
After making the required settings, proceed as follows.
Menu operation
In the single shot mode of Manual Interval Rec mode, you
cannot change the settings of “CACHE/INTVAL REC”
and “NUMBER OF FRAME” on the FUNCTION 1 page
after the camcorder starts recording. To change the
settings, stop recording by pressing the EJECT button or
setting the POWER switch to OFF.
While recording in the consecutive mode of Manual
Interval Rec mode, you cannot change the settings of
CACHE/INTVAL REC, NUMBER OF FRAME and
TRIGGER INTERVAL on the FUNCTION 1 page. To
change these settings, stop recording by pressing the REC
START button or the VTR button on the lens.
1
2
After performing the basic procedure for shooting and
recording following the instructions in 3-2-1 “Basic
will not move.
Press the REC START button on the camcorder or the
VTR button on the lens.
The camcorder starts recording in Manual Interval Rec
mode. In the viewfinder, “MANU INTERVAL
*FRAME” and the TALLY indicator (green) flash.
• In the single shot mode, the TALLY indicator
flashes twice per second.
When the camcorder power is switched off during
recording in Manual Interval Rec mode
• When you set the POWER switch to OFF, the camcorder
will switch off by itself after disc access has continued
for a few seconds to record the picture data stored in
memory.
• If you remove the battery, unplug the DC cable, or cut
the power to the AC adaptor during manual interval
recording, picture data stored before recording stops (a
maximum of ten seconds) may be lost. Take care when
changing the battery.
• In the consecutive mode, the TALLY indicator
flashes four times per second.
To exit Manual Interval Rec mode
Do one of the following.
• In the single shot mode, press the EJECT button.
• In the consecutive mode, press the camcorder REC
START button or the lens VTR button to stop recording.
• Set the camcorder POWER switch to OFF.
After the camcorder has exited from Manual Interval Rec
mode, it records picture data stored in memory to the disc.
3-2-6 Retaking the Most Recent Clip
Notes on Manual Interval Rec mode
Take note of the following points.
A retake function is available, making it easy to erase and
retake the most recently recorded clip.
To use the retake function, you need use the FUNCTION
1 menu to assign it to one of the assignable switches
(ASSIGN 1, ASSIGN 3, ASSIGN 4, or TURBO GAIN).
i.LINK
During interval recording, signal input/output through the
i.LINK interface is impossible.
Time code
For details about operation, see section 7-3-5 “Assigning
In Manual Interval Rec mode, the internal time code
generator runs in R-RUN mode regardless of how the F-
RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set.
Example: After recording clip 3, you want to delete it and
record a new clip 3 after clip 2.
Audio
Audio signals are not recorded in Manual Interval Rec
mode.
Clip 1
Clip 2
Clip 3
Playback control buttons
New clip
While recording in the single shot mode of Manual
Interval Rec mode (the TALLY indicator (green) in the
viewfinder flashes twice per second), you cannot use most
of playback control buttons (F REV, F FWD, NEXT,
PREV, PLAY/PAUSE, and STOP). To exit the single shot
mode, press the EJECT button.
While recording in the consecutive mode of Manual
Interval Rec mode (the TALLY indicator (green) flashes
four times per second), you cannot use the disc control
buttons (EJECT, F REV, F FWD, NEXT, PREV, PLAY/
PAUSE and STOP). To use these buttons, stop recording
by pressing the REC START button or the VTR button on
the lens.
To retake the most recent clip
With recording paused or after the end of a preview (see
1
Press the switch or button to which the retake function
has been assigned.
While the button is pressed, the last frame of the
recorded clip and the message “PUSH RET FOR CLIP
DELETE” appears.
2
In this state, press the RET button.
3-2 Recording
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The message “DELETING LAST CLIP” appears, and
the processing for deleting the last recorded clip
begins.
For operations, see 4-3-1 “Loading a Clip List From
When the deleting has finished, the message “LAST
CLIP WAS DELETED” appears.
3
Press the SUB CLIP button, turning on the sub clip
indicator.
The camcorder enters auto clip list recording mode.
The viewfinder screen shows the number of the clip
list loaded in the current clip list.
Note
If an operation (other than recording review) which is not
a retake operation is carried out after the last clip has been
recorded, the retake function does not work even when the
camcorder is in the recording pause state.
The number of the clip list loaded in the current clip list
In this case, the message “RE-TAKE NOT ALLOWED!”
appears. When you want to replace the last clip with a new
out a retake operation, the last clip is deleted even if you
do not carry out a recording operation afterwards.
16:9
E0004
30
3-2-7 Auto Clip List Recoding for
Automatic Inclusion of
18
45-40
Recorded Clips in Clip Lists
4
5
Press the REC START button or the VTR button on
the lens to start recording, and press again to stop
recording.
Auto clip list recoding is a function for automatically
including the clips generated by recording operations in a
selected clip list. The updated clip list is saved to the disc.
Proceed as follows.
A clip is generated automatically from the video and
audio recorded in this interval, and added as a sub clip
to the the currently loaded clip list. The updated list is
also written to disc automatically.
THUMBNAIL
SEL/SET
ESSENCE MARK
S.SEL
SUB CLIP
Repeat the process of recording and stopping until you
have included all the required clips.
SUB CLIP
button
CLIP MENU
SHIFT
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
PRESET
REGEN
CLOCK
To change target clip lists, carry out step 2 once more
to load the desired clip list into the current clip list.
To exit auto clip list coding mode
Press the SUB CLIP button, turning off the sub clip
indicator.
3-2-8 Assigning User-Defined Clip
1)
Titles Automatically
1) This is supported from firmware version 1.4.
1
2
Insert a disc.
About the automatic title generation
function
By default, clips on each disc are assigned names in the
range C0001.MXF to C0300.MXF. For this reason, two
discs can contain clips with the same names. The
Load a clip list from the disc.
• To create a new clip list, load a NEW FILE (empty)
clip list.
• To add clips to an existing clip list, load that clip list.
automatic title generation function allows you to assign
titles to all of the clips on several discs, which facilitates
clip management. For example, if the titles TITLE00001 to
TITLE00020 are assigned to clips C0001.MXF to
C0020.MXF on disc 1, then the titles TITLE00021 to
Note
Always load either a new or existing clip list from disc.
52
3-2 Recording
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TITLE00037 are assigned to clips C0001.MXF to
C0017.MXF on disc 2.
The TOP menu appears.
Titles are made up of prefixes, up to 10 characters in
length, and five-digit serial numbers such as TITLE 00001.
C0020.MXF
0002.MXF
C0001.MXF
2
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to
“OPERATION”, and then press the MENU knob.
TITLE00020
TITLE00020
TITLE00001
If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been
displayed, the CONTENTS page of the OPERATION
menu appears.
If the menu has been used before, the last accessed
page appears.
Clips recorded on Disc 1
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU
knob to move the b mark to “CLIP TITLE ”, and then
press the MENU knob.
C0017.MXF
0002.MXF
C0001.MXF
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob
until the CLIP TITLE page appears, and then press the
MENU knob.
TITLE00037
TITLE00022
TITLE00021
Clips recorded on Disc 2
The CLIP TITLE page appears.
23 CLIP TITLE
TITLE
TOP
Setting the title prefix
:
DSABL
You can assign title prefixes by choosing from a prefix list
stored in internal memory, or by entering the prefix
directly.
However, to choose from a prefix list, you must create the
list beforehand on a computer and transfer it to the unit’s
internal memory with a “Memory Stick”.
Setting the initial value of the serial number
The initial value of the serial number can be set to 00001
(the default) or to any other number. The number is
automatically incremented by 1 each time you record a
clip. When it reaches 99999, it returns to 00001 for the
next clip.
4
5
Select “TITLE”, and then press the MENU knob.
The z mark beside DSABL changes to a ? mark.
Turn the MENU knob to display “ENABL”, and then
press the MENU knob.
The following items appear.
Note
Duplicate clip titles can be generated depending on the
serial number setting, for example if you reset the serial
number to the original value after recording several clips.
Care should be taken when setting the serial number.
23 CLIP TITLE
TOP
TITLE
SELECT PREFIX
CLEAR NUMERIC
LOAD PREFIX DATA:
PREFIX : TITLE
NUMERIC : 00001
:
:
:
ENABL
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
To assign user-defined titles automatically
when clips are recorded
Proceed as follows.
Clip titles will be generated automatically if you
record in this state.
1
Holding down the MENU knob, move the MENU ON/
OFF switch to ON.
3-2 Recording
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The title of the next clip to be recorded will be a
combination of the prefix in the PREFIX field and the
serial number in the NUMERIC field.
Note
The message “FILE NOT FOUND!” appears if no list
of title prefixes is found.
Check the location where the file is stored on the
“Memory Stick”.
To create a list of title prefix strings
Prepare the data beforehand according to the following
rules.
To select a prefix from the title prefix list
Proceed as follows.
File name
Assign the name “TITLES.TXT” to the file.
1
On the CLIP TITLE page of the OPERATION menu
(see page 54), select “SELECT PREFIX” and then
press the MENU knob.
Input format
Enter title prefixes one at time, separated by newline
(CRLF) characters.
Prefixes can be up to 10 characters long. A prefix file can
contain up to 20 prefixes.
A list of up to 20 title prefixes appears.
P00 TITLE PREFIX
ESC
Allowable characters
• Digits: 0 to 9
• Alphabetic characters: a to z, A to Z
• The following symbols:!, #, $, %, &, ’, ( , ), ~, =, -, ^, @,
[, ], {, }, +, ; (semicolon), , (comma), . (period), _
(underscore)
001: Tennis
002: Basketball
003: Skiing_1
004: Skiing_2
005: Athletics
006: Aquatics
007: Cycling
008: Softball
009: Fencing
010: Sailing
• Space
Title prefix list example
Tennis<CRLF>
Basketball<CRLF>
Skiing_1<CRLF>
Skiing_2<CRLF>
Note
When no list of title prefixes has been transferred to
the internal memory of this unit, only the initial value
“TITLE” appears.
2
Select the desired title prefix from the list, and then
press the MENU knob.
To transfer a title prefix list to the unit’s
internal memory
Proceed as follows.
The CLIP TITLE page appears again, and the selected
prefix appears in the PREFIX field.
1
Copy the title prefix file (TITLES.TXT) to the
following folder on the “Memory Stick”.
To enter a title prefix directly
Proceed as follows.
\\MSSONY\PRO\XDCAM\GENERAL\VAL_LIST
1
On the CLIP TITLE page of the OPERATION menu
(see page 54), select “PREFIX” and then press the
MENU knob.
Note
This folder is created when you insert a “Memory
Stick” into the camcorder. Do not create this folder
yourself on a computer.
A prefix string appears.
23 CLIP TITLE
TOP
2
3
Insert a “Memory Stick” with the title prefix file
(TITLES.TXT) into the “Memory Stick” slot of the
camcorder.
TITLE
SELECT PREFIX
CLEAR NUMERIC
LOAD PREFIX DATA:
PREFIX : TITLE
!#$%&'()+,-.0123456789;
=@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV
WXYZ[]^_abcdefghijklmnop
qrstuvwxyz{}~
:
:
:
ENABL
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
On the CLIP TITLE page of the OPERATION menu
(see page 54), select “LOAD PREFIX DATA” and
then press the MENU knob.
INS DEL RET
ESC END
“MEMORY STICK ACCESS” appears, and the file
on the “Memory Stick” (TITLES.TXT) is transferred
to the internal memory of the unit.
2
Move the x mark to the character you want to change
and then press the MENU knob.
The message “COMPLETE!” appears when the
transfer finishes.
54
3-2 Recording
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Rotate the MENU knob to move the x mark to the
desired character in the list of selectable characters,
and then press the MENU knob.
5
When you have finished entering the value, rotate the
MENU knob to move the x mark to “END”, and then
press the MENU knob.
The camcorder exits numeric input mode, and the
original CLIP TITLE page appears.
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the remaining characters.
When you have finished entering the prefix, rotate the
MENU knob to move the x mark to “END”, and then
press the MENU knob.
To check clip titles
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display thumbnail
screen, and select the clip whose title you want to
check.
The title of the selected clip appears in the upper left of
the screen.
The camcorder exits prefix input mode, and the
original CLIP TITLE page appears.
To set the initial value of the clip title serial
number
more information about the thumbnail screen.
You can set the initial value of the clip title serial number
to 00001 (default) or to any 5-digit value.
Notes
• It is not possible to specify 00000 as the initial value.
Even if you enter 00000, the value is reset to 00001
when the camcorder exits numeric input mode.
• The value of the serial number is incremented by 1
every time a title is generated. When the value
reaches 99999, the next number restarts from 00001.
• Duplicate clip titles can be generated if you reset the
serial number after recording several clips or the
same is true depending on the value setting. Care
should be taken when setting the serial number.
To return the initial value to 00001
Proceed as follows.
1
On the CLIP TITLE page of the OPERATION menu
(see page 54), select “CLEAR NUMERIC” and then
press the MENU knob.
The message “CLEAR OK? bYES NO” appears.
2
Select YES and then press the MENU knob.
The value in the NUMERIC field returns to 00001.
3-2-9 Assigning User-Defined Clip
and Clip List Names
To set the initial value to any number
Proceed as follows.
The following standard format names are assigned
automatically to clips and clip lists that are created or
recorded by XDCAM devices.
1
On the CLIP TITLE page of the OPERATION menu
(see page 54), select “CLEAR NUMERIC” and then
press the MENU knob.
Clips: C0001.MXF to C0300.MXF
Clip lists: E0001E01.SMI to E0099E01.SMI
When you record or create clips and clip lists, you can
assigned user-defined names instead of the standard
format names. Assigning meaningful names to clips and
clip lists can facilitate file management.
An initial value appears.
23 CLIP TITLE
0123456789
INS DEL RET
CLEAR NUMERIC
LOAD PREFIX DATA:
PREFIX : TITLE
NUMERIC : 00001
1)
ESC END
EXEC
EXEC
:
1) This is supported from firmware version 1.5.
Limitations
• Letters, numbers and symbols from the Unicode 2.0
character set can be used.
However, the following control characters and symbols
cannot be used.
- Control characters: U+0000 to U+001F, U+007F
- Symbols: ", *, /, :, <, >, ?, \, |
• Depending on the character type, names may be limited
to 14 characters in length.
(The limit for ASCII characters is 56 characters.)
• All file name extensions are converted automatically to
uppercase.
2
3
Move the x mark to the digit you want to change and
then press the MENU knob.
Rotate the MENU knob to move the x mark to the
desired digit in the list of selectable digits, and then
press the MENU knob.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the remaining digits.
3-2 Recording
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Titles are used as user-defined clip names on this unit.
Therefore, the available characters are limited to those
supported by the title function.
4
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU
knob to move the b mark to “FILE NAMING”, and
then press the MENU knob.
• Files generated along with clips and clip lists use the
same names (the “C*” or “E*” part of the following file
names).
- Clips: Metadata files (C*M01.XML), proxy AV files
(C*S01.MXF)
- Clip lists: Metadata files (E*M01.XML)
• The following names cannot be assigned.
- Clips: C0000.MXF
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob
to scroll the screen to “FILE NAMING”, and then
press the MENU knob.
The FILE NAMING page appears. The current
settings of the items on the page appear to the right of
the items.
- Clip lists: E0000E01.SMI, E0100E01.SMI to
E9999E01.SMI, E0000.SMI, E0100.SMI to
E9999.SMI
• The following names should be avoided.
- Clips: C5000.MXF to C9999.MXF
- Clip lists: E0001.SMI to E0099.SMI
5
6
Turn the MENU to select “NAMING FORM”, and
then press the MENU knob.
Turn the MENU to display “FREE”, and then press the
MENU knob.
You can now enter a user-defined name.
To assign clip names on this unit
The title assigned to clip becomes its clip name (file
name).
M24 FILE NAMING
TOP
NAMING FORM:
AUTO NAMING:
free
C****
C0001.MXF
TITLE00001
7
8
Turn the MENU knob to select “AUTO NAMING”,
and then press the MENU knob.
When sub item “AUTO NAMING” is set to “C****”
Turn the MENU knob to display “TITLE”, and then
press the MENU knob.
TITLE00001.MXF
The same name will now be given to newly recorded
clips.
Note
TITLE00001
• An FTP client that supports UTF-8 is required to use
Unicode characters other than ASCII characters.
Command prompt FTP commands do not support
UTF-8.
• When the first letter of the title setting on the CLIP
AUTO TITLING menu is a space or period (.), the
clip name is the title string minus the first letter.
When sub item “AUTO NAMING” is set to “TITLE”
1
2
Before starting, set TITLE in the “CLIP TITLE” page
Holding down the MENU knob, move the MENU ON/
OFF switch from OFF to ON.
To use clip names and clip list names by FAM and
FTP
Carry out steps 2 and 6 of “To assign clip names on this
unit”.
It is now possible to write, transfer, and rename clips and
clip lists with user-defined names over file access mode
The TOP menu appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select “OPERATION”, and
press the MENU knob.
If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been
displayed, the CONTENTS page of the OPERATION
menu appears. If the menu has been used before, the
last accessed page appears.
56
3-2 Recording
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU
knob to move the b mark to “CLIP STATUS”, and
press the MENU knob.
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob
to scroll the screen to “CLIP STATUS”, and then press
the MENU knob.
Fuji.MXF
The CLIP STATUS page appears. The current settings
of the items on the page appear to the right of the
items.
User-defined clip names can be used by FAM and FTP
D08 CLIP STATUS
TOP
Sakura.SMI
CLIP NO
NAME :
TITLE:
RECORD DEVICE:
SERIAL:
:
001/010
C0001
(no name)
PDW-530
10001
User-defined clip list names can be used by FAM and FTP
DATE : 08/01/06
TIME : 19:54:38
To check clip names
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail
screen, and select the clip whose name you want to check.
The name of the selected clip appears in the upper left of
the screen.
3-2-10Recording in Live Logging
1)
Mode
1) This is supported from firmware version 1.4 and PDZ-1 version 1.4.
more information about the thumbnail screen
Live logging is a function that allows you to
simultaneously transfer logging data as you record live
material.
Notes
• The item at the upper left of the screen is displayed
according to the following order of priority.
Title > User-defined clip name > Standard format clip
name
You can install the optional CBK-NC01 Network Adaptor
in the camcorder, and connect to the adaptor’s network
connector from the PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software to do
the following.
Therefore, the display of this item changes as following,
depending on whether there is a title.
When a title has been set as a clip name on this unit, for
clips recorded on this unit, the title is displayed.
The user-defined name or standard format name is
displayed for clips without a title.
• If the firmware of your XDCAM device is version 1.4x
or lower, clips with user-defined names appear as
“C5000” to “C9999”, in order of recording.
• View proxy AV data.
• Add and modify metadata (titles, comments, essence
marks, etc.).
• Create clip lists.
After adding or modifying metadata and clip lists, you can
transfer them from the computer back to the camcorder for
recording on the original disc.
Refer to the PDZ-1 help for more information about PDZ-
1 functions and operations.
To check clip information (name, title, etc.) in the
CLIP STATUS menu
To record in live logging mode
With the optional CBK-NC01 network adaptor installed
on the camcorder, proceed as follows.
1
Holding down the MENU knob, move the MENU ON/
OFF switch from OFF to ON.
The TOP menu appears.
1
2
Use an Ethernet cable to connect the camcorder to a
computer with PDZ-1 installed.
2
Turn the MENU knob to select “DIAGNOSIS”, and
press the MENU knob.
In the TOP menu, select “OPERATION”.
If this is the first time the DIAGNOSIS menu has been
displayed, the CONTENTS page of the DIAGNOSIS
menu appears. If the menu has been used before, the
last accessed page appears.
3-2 Recording
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to scroll to the OUTPUT page.
Alternatively, in the CONTENTS page, select
“OUTPUT”.
(titles, comments, essence marks, etc.). You can also
create clip lists.
Note
The OUTPUT page appears.
Proxy data cannot be recorded to a “Memory Stick”
inserted into the camcorder’s “Memory Stick” slot.
Turn the MENU knob to select “LIVE LOGGING”,
and then press the MENU knob.
Usable memory card or “Memory Stick” types
Refer to the CBK-PC01 Installation Manual for
information on the types of memory card and “Memory
Stick” that can be used with the camcorder.
U01 OUTPUT
TOP
LCD BRIGHT <L>
LCD BRIGHT <H>
LCD COLOR
:
:
:
0
0
0
Note
i.LINK MODE
:
AV/C
PB WIDE ID(IMX) : THROU
REAR BNC OUT SEL: VBS
LIVE LOGGING OFF
Never remove a memory card while it is being accessed
(while the camcorder’s ACCESS indicator is lit). Doing so
can corrupt the data on the memory card and render the
card unusable.
:
5
6
Turn the MENU knob to display “ON”, and then press
the MENU knob.
To record proxy data to memory cards in
synchronization with disc recording
With the CBK-PC01 installed on this unit, proceed as
follows.
The camcorder enters Live Logging mode.
Start recording in the normal way, by pressing the
REC START button or the VTR button on the lens.
1
2
Insert a memory card into the PC card slot.
Notes
• In Live Logging mode, you cannot set the F-RUN/SET/
R-RUN switch to SET to make time code settings. To
make time code settings, first exit Live Logging mode.
• During Live Logging operations, the time code
generator run mode is always F-RUN, regardless of the
setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch.
• In Live Logging mode, you cannot set the PRESET/
REGEN/CLOCK switch to REGEN to read time code
from the disc and generate consecutive time code.
• The Picture Cache and Interval Rec functions are not
available in Live Logging mode.
Note
You cannot record proxy data to a memory card if you
start recording before the memory symbol and
remaining memory display appear. Especially just
after inserting a memory card and after powering the
camcorder on, it may take some time for the memory
card to be recognized.
3
Check to be sure that there is enough remaining
memory, and then press the REC START button or the
VTR button on the lens to start recording in the normal
way.
Even if you turn these functions on, they are turned off
when the camcorder enters Live Logging mode.
3-2-11Recording Proxy Data to
Memory Cards (With CBK-
PC01 Installed)
1) This is supported from firmware version 1.4 and PDZ-1 version 1.4.
Proxy data is recorded in synchronization with
recording to the disc.
1)
Notes
• Never remove the battery pack or the power cord during
recording to the memory card (while the camcorder’s
ACCESS indicator is lit). Recording processing will not
finish normally, which means that the clip proxy data
recorded immediately before the interruption will be
lost.
• If the remaining memory on a memory card is exhausted
during recording, the message “MEM REC NG!”
appears. The clip proxy data that was being recorded
immediately before the message appeared is lost.
If this occurs, exchange the memory card, refer to the
When the optional CBK-PC01 memory card reader is
installed on this unit, you can save proxy AV data and
metadata (this chapter refers to both types of data as
“proxy data”) for the clip being recorded or the clips on the
disc to a memory card (or “Memory Stick”) inserted into
the CBK-PC01.
You can then insert these memory cards into a computer
with the PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software installed to
review the proxy AV data and modify or add metadata
58
3-2 Recording
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
next section “To copy proxy data for all clips on the disc
to a memory card”, and copy the data that could not be
recorded.
During the copy, the message “MEMORY ACCESS
**%” (where ** is a progress percentage number from
0 to 99) appears in the viewfinder and color LCD.
• It is not possible to record only proxy data to a memory
card without recording to the disc.
To copy proxy data for all clips on the disc
to a memory card
To copy proxy data to a memory card for all clips on the
disc, proceed as follows..
To stop recording
Recording to memory cards stops when recording to the
disc stops.
You do not need to take any special steps to stop recording
to memory cards.
1
2
Insert a memory card into the PC card slot.
To delete recorded proxy data
Insert the disc that you want to copy into the
camcorder.
To delete material recorded on a disc and proxy data
recorded on a memory card at the same time, execute
DELETE LAST CLIP, DELETE ALL CLIPS, or QUICK
FORMAT on the DISC page of the MAINTENANCE
To delete only proxy data on a memory card, carry out the
3
On the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION
then press the MENU knob.
The message “EXECUTE OK?” appears.
Select YES to execute the copy.
4
To copy proxy data for selected clips on
the disc to a memory card
Proxy data for all clip on the disc is copied to the
memory card.
To select clips on the disc and copy proxy data to a
memory card, one clip at a time, proceed as follows.
During the copy, the message “MEMORY ACCESS
**%” (where ** is a progress percentage number from
0 to 99) appears in the viewfinder and color LCD.
1
2
Insert a memory card into the PC card slot.
Notes
Search for the video of the clip that you want to copy.
(The camcorder can be either playing or stopped.)
• No DV stream is output from the camcorder’s i.LINK
DV IN/OUT S400 connector while proxy data is being
copied from a disc to a memory card.
• The message “MEMORY CARD ERROR!” appears if a
copy is attempted while the unusable memory symbol
(see page 60) is visible in the viewfinder.
3
4
In the TOP menu, select “OPERATION”.
Turn the MENU knob to scroll to the MEMORY REC
page. Alternatively, select “MEMORY REC” on the
CONTENTS page.
When there is not enough free memory
The message “M. shortage” appears when the amount to
data to copy is greater than the amount of remaining
memory, and the message “MEMORY CARD FULL!”
appears when there is no remaining memory. The copy
cannot be executed if either of these messages appears.
Insert another memory card.
The MEMORY REC page appears.
24 MEMORY REC
TOP
COPY CURRENT CLP : EXEC
COPY ALL CLIPS EXEC
ABORT COPY EXEC
:
:
DEL ALL MEM CLP : EXEC
FORMAT MEMORY EXEC
:
To cancel a copy to a memory card
Proceed as follows.
1
2
On the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION
5
6
Select “COPY CURRENT CLP” with the MENU
knob and then press the MENU knob.
The message “EXECUTE OK?” appears.
The message “EXECUTE OK?” appears.
Select YES to execute the copy.
Select YES to cancel the copy.
The copy is cancelled.
To delete all proxy data in a memory card
Proceed as follows.
Proxy data for the playing or stopped clip is copied to
the memory card.
3-2 Recording
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
On the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION
Note
If the usable memory card symbol does not appear after
you insert a memory card, power the camcorder off and on,
and then try inserting it again.
The symbol may never appear, no matter how many times
you try, if you were using a memory card other than the
recommended products.
The message “EXECUTE OK?” appears.
Select YES to execute the deletion.
All proxy data in the memory card is deleted.
Remaining memory indications
To format a memory card
Proceed as follows.
Examples of remaining memory recording time indications
Indication
F - 95
Remaining memory recording time
Full to 95 minutes
95 to 90 minutes
90 to 85 minutes
:
1
2
On the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION
95 - 90
90 - 85
:
The message “EXECUTE OK?” appears.
Select YES to execute the format.
15 - 10
10 - 5
15 to 10 minutes
10 to 5 minutes
5 to 4 minutes
4 to 3 minutes
3 to 2 minutes
2 to 1 minutes
1 to 0 minutes
0 minutes
The message “COMPLETE” appears when the format
finishes. All of the data in the memory card is deleted.
5 MIN
Notes
4 MIN
• The message “MEMORY CARD INHIBIT!” or
“M.Card INHI” appears if you insert a write-protected
memory card and attempt to record to it. In this case,
eject the memory card, clear the Write-Inhibit tab, and
insert the memory card again.
3 MIN
2 MIN
1 MIN
0 MIN
• The message “NO MEMORY CARD” appears if you
attempt to record with no memory card inserted. Insert a
memory card and try again.
0 MIN (flashing)
INH
None
Record inhibited
To check the memory symbol and the
remaining memory
As shown below, a memory symbol and a remaining
memory indication appear in the viewfinder while a
memory card is in use.
Note
An “INH” remaining memory indication means that the
memory card is record inhibited. If this appears, remove
the memory card, enable recording to the memory card,
and then reinsert it.
Memory symbol
Remaining memory
35-30
About the memory symbol
This symbol indicates the following states.
: A usable memory card is loaded.
: An unusable memory card is loaded. Exchange the
memory card, or format it.
60
3-2 Recording
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deteriorating playback conditions
Deteriorating playback may be due to the following
causes.
• Scratches and dust on the disc surface
This includes fingerprints, dust from the air, tar from
cigarette smoke, and so on.
3-3 Checking Recording
and Playback
Disc playback start position
Scratches and soiling which occur before recording are
not a problem because they are registered in advance as
defects, and recording avoids them. However, scratches
and soiling which occur after recording can lead to
deteriorating playback conditions.
Although this unit uses optical discs, it is designed to offer
the most convenient features of tape playback by VTRs.
One of these is the playback start position, which works in
the same way as tape, as described below.
• Aging of disc recording layers
After playback stop
The unit stops at the position where the STOP button was
pressed.
Over several decades, the recording layers of optical
discs can age and cause deteriorating playback
conditions.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to resume playback at the
stop position.
You can use this function to check archival discs and
other discs which have been stored for extended periods,
so that you can take action before the deterioration
progresses further.
• Deteriorating laser diodes performance
The performance of the laser diodes used in optical
heads can worsen with age, leading to deteriorating
playback conditions.
After recording
The unit stops at the position where recording ended.
To play back a clip, press the PREV button to move to the
start frame of any clip, or press the PREV button with the
PLAY/PAUSE button held down to move to any position.
You can use the digital clock to check the total optical
output time of optical heads.
After disc insertion
The unit stops at the position of the disc when it was most
recently ejected.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to resume playback at the
most recent position.
Refer to the Maintenance Manual for an approximate
guide to when it is time to replace optical heads.
The playback position is saved to the disc when the disc is
ejected, which allows playback to start at that position
whenever it is loaded into any XDCAM player.
To prevent playback conditions from
deteriorating
Pay attention to the following points when handling discs.
• Do not open disc cartridges and touch discs directly with
your hands.
• Do not store for long periods in locations which are
dusty or exposed to air circulated by fans.
• Do not store for long periods under high temperatures or
in locations exposed to direct sunlight.
Note
The playback position is not recorded to the disc if the disc
is set to REC INH.
3-3-1 Normal Playback
If playback conditions have deteriorated
Read errors occur when playback conditions continue to
deteriorate.
When a read error occurs, the message “DISC DEFECT”
appears, the video freezes, and audio is muted.
If this happens, check the following points.
Whether the disc displays the same playback condition
on other XDCAM devices: If so, the surface of the
disc may be dirty or scratched, or the performance of
the recording layers on the disc may have worsened
due to age. Do not use discs with these symptoms.
Whether every disc inserted into an XDCAM device
displays the same playback conditions: If so, the
performance of the laser diodes may have deteriorated.
Check the total optical output time.
By pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button, you can review any
length of recording on the viewfinder screen in black and
white or in color on the color LCD. There are two other
ways to review the recording.
• Recording review: You can view the last two seconds of
the recording on the viewfinder screen in black and
white or in color on the color LCD.
• Color playback: You can see the recording in color on a
color video monitor without the need for any external
adaptor.
You may also view the picture during a fast forward or
reverse search.
See 2-3 “Audio Functions” on page 16 for details about
the switches and controls used to select the audio output
signal and to adjust the audio level.
3-3 Checking Recording and Playback
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-3-2 Checking the Last Two
Seconds of the Recording —
Recording Review
3-3-4 Thumbnail Search
Cuing up a desired clip
To display the thumbnail images of all clips on the disc,
and cue up a desired clip, proceed as follows.
If you press the RET button on the lens while recording is
paused, the last two seconds of the recording is played
back on the viewfinder screen and the color LCD. Use this
function to check whether recording went smoothly. If you
hold down the RET button, a low-speed reverse search
begins at a position two seconds before the recording end
position. When you release the RET button, the reverse
search stops and playback in the forward direction begins.
After playback, the camcorder is ready to start recording
again.
2,3
1
THUMBNAIL
Thumbnail
SEL/SET
indicator
ESSENCE MARK
S.SEL
SUB CLIP
Sub clip
indicator
CLIP MENU
SHIFT
By assigning the the same function as that of the RET
button on the lens to the ASSIGN 1/3/4 switch, you can use
the switch in the same way as the lens RET button.
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
PRESET
REGEN
CLOCK
For details, see 7-3-5 “Assigning Functions to ASSIGN 1/
3
2
3-3-3 Checking the Recording on
the Color Video Monitor —
Playback in Color
Connect a color video monitor to the VIDEO OUT
connector of the camcorder. By pressing the PLAY/
PAUSE button, you can view the recorded picture.
When the CBK-SD01 SDI Output Board is installed, you
can connect a color video monitor provided with an SDI
input connector.
1
With the sub clip indicator off, press the
THUMBNAIL button, turning on the thumbnail
indicator.
The thumbnails of all clips on the disc appear.
Notes
PDW-510/510P/530/530P
Color video monitor
• If the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to ON, set it to
OFF and press the THUMBNAIL button.
• If you set the MENU ON/OFF to ON during
thumbnail display, thumbnail display is cancelled
and replaced with menu display.
VIDEO IN
connector
1)
2)
SDI IN connector
VIDEO OUT connector
1) When VBS is selected as the output signal of the VIDEO OUT
connector
2) When SDI is selected as the output signal of the VIDEO OUT
connector (only when the CBK-SD01 is installed)
Color playback
Note
You can select either VBS or SDI as the output signal of
the VIDEO OUT connector when the CBK-SD01 is
installed.
62
3-3 Checking Recording and Playback
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cuing up a frame including an essence
mark
Sixth clip is selected from
a total of 143 clips.
a)
Name of currently selected clip
Proceed as follows.
Thumbnail of currently selected clip
b)
(first frame or specified frame)
2~5
1
THUMBNAIL
SEL/SET
ESSENCE MARK
S.SEL
SUB CLIP
CLIP MENU
SHIFT
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
PRESET
REGEN
CLOCK
5
4,5
Recording date and time
of selected clip
Duration of selected clip or
time code of first frame
title is enclosed in double quotation marks, for example
“TITLE00001”.
b) The thumbnail frame can be specified by a menu selection
1
Hold down the SHIFT button, and press the
THUMBNAIL button.
To switch between duration and timecode display
in the thumbnail display
The essence mark selection screen appears.
Press the HOLD button. Each press of the HOLD
button switches the display between duration ant time
code.
Notes
• If the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to ON, set it to
OFF and press the THUMBNAIL button.
• If you set the MENU ON/OFF to ON during
thumbnail display, thumbnail display is cancelled
and replaced with menu display.
To escape from the thumbnail display to the full-
screen display
Press the THUMBNAIL button, turning off the
indicator.
2
3
Turn the SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob to select
the desired clip.
You can also select clips with the following
operations.
Press the PREV or NEXT button: Select the
previous or next clip.
Press the PREV or NEXT button with the F REV
or F FWD button held down: Select the first or
last clip.
To cue up the selected clip, press the SEL/SET dial or
the MENU knob.
To escape from the essence mark selection screen to
the previous screen
To start playback from the selected clip, press the
PLAY/PAUSE button.
Press the RESET button.
2
Turn the SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob to select
the desired essence mark.
3-3 Checking Recording and Playback
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Press the SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob.
1
If the clip list that you want to play exists on the disc,
Thumbnails of the frames including the selected
essence mark appear.
For the clip list loading operation, see 4-3-1 “Loading
(The example shows the case where SHOTMARK1 is selected
as the essence mark.)
2
3
Press the SUB CLIP button, turning it on.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
This indicates that the thumbnail
images are the frames including
the essence mark
Sixth frame is selected
from a total of 31
(SHOTMARK1).
SHOTMARK1 frames.
Playback begins from the first sub clip in the current
clip list.
Note
Depending on the length of sub clips in the clip list and
their arrangement on the disc, playback may freeze
momentarily between sub clips.
Cuing up with sub clip thumbnails
With the desired clip list loaded in the current clip list,
proceed as follows.
1
Press the SUB CLIP button and the THUMBNAIL
button, turning on the indicators.
Currently selected
SHOTMARK1 frame
Thumbnails of the first frames in the sub clips appear.
Recording date and time
of selected frame
Notes
• If the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to ON, set it to
OFF and press the THUMBNAIL button.
• If you set the MENU ON/OFF to ON during
thumbnail display, thumbnail display is cancelled
and replaced with menu display.
4
5
Turn the SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob to select
the desired frame.
You can also select frames with the following
operations.
Press the PREV or NEXT button: Select the
previous or next frame.
Press the PREV or NEXT button with the F REV
or F FWD button held down: Select the first or
last frame.
Press the SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob to cue up
the selected clip.
To start playback from the selected frame, press the
PLAY/PAUSE button.
3-3-5 Clip List Playback
You can play back clips in the order of clip lists created
Playing back in clip list order
Proceed as follows.
64
3-3 Checking Recording and Playback
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Clips cannot be locked or unlocked when the Write
Inhibit tab of the disk is in the recording disabled
position.
Sixth frame is selected
from a total of 34 sub clips.
a)
Name of the current clip list
Total duration of sub clips in clip list
Proceed as follows. You can lock one clip at a time.
1
With the sub clip indicator off, press the
THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail indicator lights, and the thumbnails of
the clips on the disc appear.
2
3
Turn the SEL/SET dial or MENU knob to select the
clip to lock.
Holding down the SHIFT button and press the SUB
CLIP button.
The THUMBNAIL menu appears.
Currently selected sub clip
Recording date and time of
selected sub clip
Duration of selected
sub clip or time code
of first frame
enclosed in double quotation marks, for example “TITLE00001”.
To escape from the thumbnail display to the full-
screen display
Press the THUMBNAIL button, turning it off.
2
3
Turn the SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob to select
the sub clip you want to cue up.
To escape from the THUMBNAIL menu and
return to the thumbnail screen
Press the RESET button.
To cue up the selected sub clip, press the SEL/SET dial
or the MENU knob.
4
With “LOCK/UNLOCK CLIP” selected, press the
SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob.
To start playback from the selected sub clip, press the
PLAY/PAUSE button.
You return to the thumbnail screen, and a lock icon
appears on the thumbnail of the selected clip to show
that it is locked.
3-3-6 Locking and Deleting Clips
In the thumbnail screen, you can delete selected clips or
1)
lock them so that they cannot be deleted.
1) This function is supported from firmware version 1.5.
Locking Clips
Locking prevents the following operations on clips.
• Delete
• Rename by FAM or FTP
Notes
• Locked clips are deleted along with other clips when you
format a disc.
3-3 Checking Recording and Playback
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting clips
Lock icon
Notes
• Clips cannot be deleted when the Write Inhibit tab of the
disc is in the recording disabled position.
• Locked clips cannot be deleted.
• If a clip which is referenced in a clip list is deleted, that
clip list is also deleted.
You can use the DISC menu to delete the last clip or all
1
With the sub clip indicator off, press the
THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail indicator lights, and the thumbnails of
the clips on the disc appear.
Locked clips cannot be deleted or renamed. Unlock the
clip if you want to perform any of these operations.
2
3
Turn the SEL/SET dial or MENU knob to select the
thumbnail to delete.
To unlock clips
Carry out step 2 of “Locking Clips” to select a locked clip
(one with the lock icon displayed on its thumbnail), then
carry out steps 3 and 4 of “Locking Clips”.
Holding down the SHIFT button, press the SUBCLIP
button.
The THUMBNAIL MENU appears (see step 3 of
To lock or unlock clips without displaying the
THUMBNAIL menu
After carrying out step 2 in the procedure, press the STOP
button with the SHIFT button held down (shortcut
operation).
To escape from the THUMBNAIL menu to the
previous screen
Press the RESET button.
To lock all clips
4
Turn the SEL/SET dial or MENU knob to select
“DELETE CLIP”, and then press the dial or knob.
1
2
Carry out steps 1 and 3 of “Locking Clips” to display
the THUMBNAIL menu.
Thumbnails of 4 frames in the target clip appear.
One of the following messages appears in a
confirmation dialog, depending on whether the target
clip is referenced in a clip list.
Turn the SEL/SET dial or MENU knob to select
“LOCK ALL CLIPS”, and then press the dial or knob.
When the target clip is not referenced in a clip list:
“DELETE CLIP?”
A confirmation screen appears.
When the target clip is referenced in a clip list:
“DELETE CLIP & CLIP LIST?” (The clip list
that references the clip will also be deleted.)
To cancel the lock operation and return to the
thumbnail screen
Do one of the following.
• With “CANCEL” selected, press the SEL/SET dial
or the MENU knob.
• Press the RESET button.
3
Turn the SEL/SET dial or MENU knob to select
“OK”, and then press the dial or knob.
All clips are locked, and you return to the thumbnail
screen.
To unlock all clips
Carry out the procedure in “To lock all clips”, selecting
“UNLOCK ALL CLIPS” in step 2.
66
3-3 Checking Recording and Playback
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To go to the clip deletion screen without displaying
the THUMBNAIL menu
After step 2, press the RESET button with the SHIFT
3-4 Recording Video
Signals From
button held down (shortcut operation).
To cancel the deletion and return to the thumbnail
screen
Do one of the following.
External Equipment
• With “CANCEL” selected, press the SEL/SET dial
or the MENU knob.
• Press the RESET button.
With this camcorder, you can select in the OPERATION
menu whether to record the video captured by the camera,
or whether to record a signal from an external video
device.
5
Turn the SEL/SET dial or MENU knob to select
“OK”, and then press the dial or knob.
If this switching function is assigned to the ASSIGN 2
switch, regardless of the setting in the OPERATION
menu, you can make the selection with the ASSIGN 2
switch. While you are recording a DV stream from an
external DV device, the indication “EXT-DV” appears on
the viewfinder screen. While you are recording analog
composite signals (with the CBK-SC01 installed), the
indication “EXT IV” appears on the viewfinder screen.
The clip is deleted and you return to the thumbnail
screen.
To delete all clips
1
2
Carry out steps 1 and 3 of “Deleting Clips” to display
Notes
Turn the SEL/SET dial or MENU knob to select
“DELETE ALL CLIPS”, and then press the dial or
knob.
• You can switch the signals to be recorded using the
ASSIGN 2 switch or by a menu operation at any time
while recording on the disc. However, the signals
recorded at the point where the signal is switched may be
distorted. If the camera/external switching function is
assigned to the ASSIGN 2 switch, you cannot use the
following menu operations to switch between camera
and external source input.
A cofirmation screen appears.
To cancel the deletion and return to the
thumbnail screen
Do one of the following.
• Even when the REC VIDEO SOURCE item is set to
“EXT”, if the external video signal is not input to the
i.LINK DV IN/OUT S400 connector or the GENLOCK
IN connector, the camcorder does not switch to EXT
mode, and the pictures being shot by the camcorder are
recorded on the disc.
• With “CANCEL” selected, press the SET button.
• Press the RESET button.
3
Turn the SEL/SET dial or MENU knob to select
“OK”, and then press the dial or knob.
All clips are deleted, and you return to the thumbnail
screen.
3-4-1 Recording a DV Stream From
External Equipment
Notes
• Recording a DV stream is possible only when the video
recording format is DVCAM.
If the currently set video recording format is other than
DVCAM, change it to DVCAM referring to 5-1-1
• If i.LINK MODE is set to “FAM” on the OUTPUT page
OPERATION menu, it is not possible to record DV
streams. To record DV streams, set i.LINK MODE to
“AV/C”.
Proceed as follows.
3-4 Recording Video Signals From External Equipment
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
21 SOURCE SEL
TOP
REC VIDEO SOURCE:
EXT REC CONTROL :
CAM
OFF
AV/C
i.LINK MODE
:
MENU knob
MENU ON/OFF switch
Item
Description
1
Holding down the MENU knob, set the MENU ON/
OFF switch to ON.
CAM
Records the pictures being shot by the
camcorder.
The TOP menu appears.
EXT
Records video signals from the
external equipment connected to the
i.LINK DV IN/OUT or GENLOCK IN
connector.
The b mark on the left of “REC VIDEO SOURCE”
changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the
setting changes to a ? mark.
6
7
Turn the MENU knob to display “EXT”.
2
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to
21 SOURCE SEL
TOP
“OPERATION”.
REC VIDEO SOURCE:
EXT REC CONTROL :
EXT
OFF
AV/C
i.LINK MODE
:
Press the MENU knob.
If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been
displayed, the CONTENTS page of the OPERATION
menu appears. If the menu has been used before, the
last accessed page appears.
Press the MENU knob.
4
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU
knob to move the b mark to “SOURCE SEL”, and
press the MENU knob.
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark.
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob
until the SOURCE SEL page appears, then press the
MENU knob to select the page.
Notes
• During i.LINK DV stream input, the image on the
viewfinder screen and the color LCD may occasionally
show an overlapped frame or skipped frame, but this
does not affect the recording on the disc.
• During i.LINK DV stream input, the audio within the
DV stream is recorded as the audio input.
• During i.LINK DV stream input, a black picture is
shown on the viewfinder screen and on the color LCD,
and nothing is recorded, if the DV device on the sending
side of the i.LINK DV connection is also in a stream
input state.
21 SOURCE SEL
TOP
REC VIDEO SOURCE:
EXT REC CONTROL :
CAM
OFF
AV/C
i.LINK MODE
:
5
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “REC
VIDEO SOURCE”, then press the MENU knob.
3-4-2 Recording Analog Composite
Signals (With the CBK-SC01
Installed)
Installing the CBK-SC01 Composite Input Board in the
camcorder enables you to record analog composite signals
68
3-4 Recording Video Signals From External Equipment
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
from external equipment connected to the GENLOCK IN
connector.
3-5 Freezing a Picture
During Playback
Proceed as follows.
1
Display the SOURCE SEL page on the screen.
Viewing frozen pictures
Proceed as follows.
For the operation, see 3-4-1 “Recording a DV Stream
1
2
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to start playback.
21 SOURCE SEL
TOP
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button again at the instant
when you want to freeze the picture.
REC VIDEO SOURCE:
EXT REC CONTROL :
i.LINK MODE
CAM
OFF
AV/C
:
EXT VIDEO SOURCE: ILINK
EXT OUTPUT DELAY: SYNC
SET UP REMOVE 0.0%
A frozen picture appears.
:
The time code is displayed in the counter display and
the PLAY/PAUSE indicator flashes (one flash/
second).
3
To restart playback, press the PLAY/PAUSE button
once again.
2
3
Move the b mark to “EXT VIDEO SOURCE”, and
press the MENU knob.
When remotely controlling the camcorder from
an RM-B150/B750 remote control unit
You can perform the same operation from the RM-B150/
B750.
Turn the MENU knob to display “CMPST”.
This ends the setting.
When you input analog composite signals to the
GENLOCK IN connector of the camcorder, these
signals are displayed on the viewfinder screen and the
color LCD, and can be recorded on the disc.
Note
Even when the GENLOCK ON/OFF item is set to “OFF”
on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu,
the camcorder is automatically synchronized with the
external reference video signal when the external video
signal is input to the GENLOCK IN connector in EXT
mode. When the setting is switched to CAM mode, or
when no signals are input to the GENLOCK IN connector
even in EXT mode, the camcorder is reset to the original
setting.
3-5 Freezing a Picture During Playback
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scene Selection
4
Chapter
4-1 Overview
What is scene selection?
Scene selection is a function which allows you to select
material (clips) from the material recorded on a disc and
perform cut editing. You can do this by operating on this
unit only.
• Scene selection is a convenient way to perform cut
editing in the field and in other offline situations.
• Clip lists (edit data) created with the scene selection
function can be used on XPRI and other full-feature
nonlinear editing systems.
70
4-1 Overview
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Flow of scene selection editing
Disc
Record material or insert disc containing
recorded material into this unit
PDW-510/510P/530/530P
To edit a clip list
Load clip lists (see page 78)
Create and edit a clip list
Sub Clip Sub Sub
Clip 2 Clip 3
• Selecting clips (see page 73)
Clip 1
Clip 2 Clip 3 Clip 4
Recorded material
1
Select
clips
Clip list 1
• Reordering sub clips (see page 74)
• Trimming sub clips (see page 75)
• Deleting sub clips (see page 76)
• Previewing clip lists (see page 77)
Clip 1
Clip 2
Clip 3
Clip list 1
Save the clip list to disc (see page 77)
Disc
Sub Clip Sub Sub
Clip 2 Clip 3
1
Play back the clip list (see page 64)
Play back clip list
PDW-510/510P/530/530P
4-1 Overview
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clips
Sub clips (clips in clip lists)
Material recorded with this unit is managed in units called
“clips.” A clip contains the material between a recording
start point (In point) and a recording end point (Out point).
Clips have numbers beginning with C, for example C0001.
The specified clips (or parts of clips) in a clip list are called
“sub clips.” Sub clips are virtual data specifying ranges in
the original clips. Clip data in the original clips is not
overwritten. For this reason, sub clips do not have clip
management numbers.
Out point
In point
r
Out point
In point
r
Out point
In point
r
Out
point
r
In point
r
Clip 1
Clip 2
Clip 3
Clip 4
(C0001)
(C0002)
(C0003)
(C0004)
Clip 1
(C0001)
Clip 2
(C0002)
Clip 3
(C0003)
Clip 4
(C0004)
Sub clip 1
Sub clip 2
Sub clip 3
Clip number
Example: Clip list (E0001)
Clip list editing (current clip list)
Clip lists cannot be edited on disc. To edit clip lists, you
need to load them, one at a time, into the unit memory.
The clip list which is currently loaded into the unit memory
is called the “current clip list.”
The current clip list is always the target of sub clip creation
and editing. Clip list playback also uses the current clip
list.
After creating and editing a clip list, you need to save it to
disc.
Unit memory
Clip lists
Current clip list
Can be edited (adding, deleting,
and reordering sub clips)
t Clip list playback
and thumbnail
display
Data called a “clip list” is created when you use the scene
selection function to select desired clips from the clips
stored on a disc.
Clip lists have numbers beginning with E, for example
E0001. Up to 99 clip lists can be saved on a disc.
SAVE
Disc
m
M
LOAD
Clip list number
C0001 (Clip 1)
C0002 (Clip 2)
E0001 (Clip list 1)
E0002 (Clip list 2)
C0003 (Clip 3)
:
:
E0003 (Clip list 3)
:
:
E0099 (Clip list 99)
Clip list playback
Clips and clip lists are saved together on a disc.
Clips are played back according to clip list data.
Thumbnails of selected clips
72
4-1 Overview
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-2 Creating Clip Lists
4-2-1 Selecting Clips
You can create a clip list by selecting a desired clip from
the thumbnail display, and including it in the clip list as a
sub clip.
Note
Up to 99 clip lists can be handled in the CLIP menu.
2
3
Use the SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob to select the
clip you want to include in the clip list.
Including a clip selected from the
thumbnail display in the clip list
Proceed as follows.
Hold down the SHIFT button, and press the SEL/SET
dial or MENU knob.
The scene selection window appears.
2~4
1
Thumbnail
THUMBNAIL
SEL/SET
indicator
ESSENCE MARK
S.SEL
Sub clip
SUB CLIP
indicator
CLIP MENU
SHIFT
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
PRESET
3
2
REGEN
CLOCK
To return to the previous screen
Press the RESET button.
4
5
Press the SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob.
This adds the selected clip to the current clip list as a
sub clip.
At the same time, this closes the scene selection
window and returns to the original thumbnail display.
To select from the thumbnail screen
Proceed as follows.
Repeat steps 2 to 4 until all desired clips have been
added to the current clip list.
1
With the sub clip indicator off, press the
THUMBNAIL button, turning on the thumbnail
indicator.
You can select the same clip any number of times.
The scene selection window shows the thumbnails of
the sub clips that have been added to the current clip
list. The cursor within the window indicates the
position in which the next sub clip will be added.
The thumbnails of the clips on the disc appear.
Notes
• If the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to ON, set it to
OFF and press the THUMBNAIL button.
• If you set the MENU ON/OFF to ON during
thumbnail display, thumbnail display is cancelled
and replaced with menu display.
4-2 Creating Clip Lists
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-2-2 Reordering Sub Clips
Total duration of the sub
clips in the current clip list
SEL/SET dial
THUMBNAIL
button
THUMBNAIL
Thumbnail
SEL/SET
indicator
ESSENCE MARK
S.SEL
SUB CLIP
SUB CLIP button
CLIP MENU
SHIFT
SHIFT button
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
PRESET
REGEN
CLOCK
Cursor (indicates where the
next sub clip will be added)
MENU knob
Thumbnails of sub clips already
added to the current clip list
To move the cursor in the scene selection window
When the scene selection window appears as you carry
out step 3, turn the SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob
to move the cursor in the desired direction.
Proceed as follows.
1
2
Press the SUB CLIP button, turning on the indicator.
Press the THUMBNAIL button, turning on the
indicator.
6
When you have finished selecting all the clips you
want, save the current clip list to disc.
Thumbnails of the sub clips within the current clip list
appear.
For details, see 4-2-6 “Saving the Current Clip List to
Notes
Note
• If the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to ON, set it to
OFF and press the THUMBNAIL button.
• If you set the MENU ON/OFF to ON during
thumbnail display, thumbnail display is cancelled
and replaced with menu display.
Unless the current clip list has been saved to disc, its
contents will be lost when the camcorder is powered
off or the disc is ejected. After creating a clip list, be
sure to save it.
If the clip list you want to edit is not the current clip
list
74
4-2 Creating Clip Lists
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Load the clip list from the disc into the unit memory
Indicates that the third sub clip will be
moved to the position of the eighth sub clip.
To return to the full-screen display
Press the THUMBNAIL button, turning off the
indicator.
3
4
Turn the SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob to select
the desired sub clip.
Hold down the SHIFT button, and press the SEL/SET
dial or MENU knob.
The sub clip operation menu appears.
Cursor indicating the move destination
for the selected sub clip
To return to the previous screen
Press the RESET button.
6
7
Turn the SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob to move the
cursor to the position where you want to move the
selected sub clip.
To return to the thumbnail display without moving
the sub clip
Do either of the following.
• Turn the SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob to select
EXIT, and press the dial/knob.
• Press the RESET button.
To return to the previous screen
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
Press the SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob.
The sub clip thumbnail display appears, and you can
check the new position of the sub clip.
5
Turn the SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob to select
MOVE, and press the dial/ knob.
The sub clip movement screen appears. The sub clip
selected in step 3 appears surrounded by a frame.
8
Save the current clip list to disc.
4-2-3 Trimming a Sub Clip
Proceed as follows.
4-2 Creating Clip Lists
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
to select a sub clip and display the sub clip operation
menu.
5
When the new IN and/or OUT points are set, hold
down the SHIFT button and press the SEL/SET dial or
MENU knob.
This carries out the trimming, and the screen returns to
the sub clip thumbnail display.
Turn the SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob to select
TRIM, and press the dial/knob.
The first frame of the selected sub clip appears. In this
state, you can carry out playback and search all clips
on the disc.
To cancel the trim operation
Reset the IN point and the OUT point to return to the
state before the sub clip trimming screen was
displayed, then hold down the SHIFT button and press
the SEL/SET dial.
This cancels the trim, and the screen returns to the sub
clip thumbnail display.
To cancel the trim and return to the previous
screen
Hold down the SHIFT button and press the SEL/SET
dial or MENU knob.
3
4
Carry out playback and search to find the new location
of the IN point or OUT point of the selected sub clip.
6
Save the current clip list to disc.
At the point where you want to set the new IN point or
OUT point, turn the SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob
to select the IN (when changing the IN point) or the
OUT (when changing the OUT point), and press the
dial/knob.
4-2-4 Deleting a Sub Clip
Proceed as follows.
To change both the IN point and the OUT point,
repeat steps 3 and 4.
1
2
To reset the IN point or OUT point, selecting IN or
OUT, hold down the RESET button and press the
SEL/SET dial. The IN or OUT point is restored to the
value it had before the sub clip trim screen opened.
Turn the SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob to select
DELETE, and press the dial/knob.
The sub clip deletion screen appears.
To cue up the IN point or OUT point, hold down the
SHIFT button and press the NEXT or PREV button.
When you set IN and OUT points stretching across
several clips, one sub clip is created for each of the
clips.
Note
You can press the THUMBNAIL button to return to
full-screen sub clip display, without trimming a sub
clip.
76
4-2 Creating Clip Lists
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To cancel the deletion, and return to the sub clip
deletion screen
Do either of the following.
• Select CANCEL, and press the SEL/SET dial or the
MENU knob.
“NEW FILE” is displayed for clip lists without any
registered data.
The date of creation or the title is displayed for each
clip list. The date of creation is always displayed for
clip lists without titles.
• Press the RESET button.
The screen returns to the sub clip thumbnail display.
SAVE CLIP LIST
3
Turn the SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob to select
OK, and press the dial/knob.
E0001 04/08/08 21:57
E0002 04/08/24 11:15
E0003 04/08/25 15:30
E0004 NEW FILE
E0005 NEW FILE
E0006 NEW FILE
E0007 NEW FILE
E0008 NEW FILE
E0009 NEW FILE
TITLE : SHIFT+SET KEY
This deletes the sub clip, and the screen returns to the
sub clip thumbnail display.
To switch between display of dates of
creation, titles, and clip list names
With the SHIFT button held down, press the SET
button.
With each press, the display changes as follows.
Dates of creation > titles > clip list names > dates of
creation …
3
4
5
Use the SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob to select the
desired clip list name, and press the dial/knob.
The message “SAVE OK? YES b NO” appears.
4
Save the current clip list to disc.
Turn the SEL/SETdial or the MENU knob to move the
b mark to “YES” and press the dial/knob.
The current clip list is saved to disc.
4-2-5 Previewing the Current Clip
List
Hold down the SHIFT button and press the SUB CLIP
button.
CLIP menu operations end.
Press the SUB CLIP button, turning it on, and then press
the PLAY button.
If the thumbnail indicator is not lit, playback starts from
the first sub clip.
To assign a title to a clip list
Use the supplied PDZ-1 software.
If the thumbnail indicator is lit, playback starts from the
first frame of the selected clip.
For details, see the PDZ-1 online help.
4-2-6 Saving the Current Clip List to
Disc
Proceed as follows.
1
Display the CLIP menu.
2
Use the SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob to select
SAVE in the CLIP menu, and press the dial/knob.
A clip list appears.
4-2 Creating Clip Lists
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-3-1 Loading a Clip List From Disc
Into Unit Memory
4-3 Managing Clip Lists
(CLIP Menu)
Proceed as follows.
1
Display the CLIP menu.
After you create a clip list, you can use the CLIP menu to
save it to disc, load it from disc into the unit memory, and
delete it from the disc.
The CLIP menu also allows you to clear and edit the
current clip list.
2
In the CLIP menu, move the cursor to LOAD and press
the SEL/SET dial or the MENU Knob.
A clip list appears.
Displaying the CLIP menu
The date of creation or the title is displayed for each
clip list.
Proceed as follows.
Note
LOAO CLIP LIST ESC
The CLIP menu can handle up to 99 clip lists.
E0001 04/08/08 21:57
E0002 04/08/24 11:15
E0003 04/08/25 15:30
E0004 NEW FILE
E0005 NEW FILE
E0006 NEW FILE
E0007 NEW FILE
E0008 NEW FILE
E0009 NEW FILE
TITLE : SHIFT+SET KEY
With the thumbnail indicator off, hold down the SHIFT
button and press the SUB CLIP button.
The CLIP menu appears.
Notes
• If the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to ON, set it to OFF,
then press the SUB CLIP button with the SHIFT button
held down.
• If you set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON while the
CLIP menu is being displayed, thumbnail display is
cancelled and replaced with menu display.
To switch between display of dates of
creation, titles, and clip list names
With the SHIFT button held down, press the SET
button.
With each press, the display changes as follows.
Dates of creation > titles > clip list names > dates of
creation …
<CLIP MENU>
3
4
5
Select the desired clip list and press the SEL/SET dial
or the MENU knob.
LOAD
SAVE
DELETE
CLEAR
TC PRESET
SORT BY
The message “LOAD OK? YES b NO” appears.
Turn the SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob to move the
b mark to “YES” and press the dial/knob.
The selected clip list is loaded into the current clip list.
Item
Operation
LOAD
Load a clip list from the disc into the current
clip list (see page 78)
Hold down the SHIFT button and press the SUB CLIP
button.
SAVE
Save the current clip list to disc (see page 77)
CLIP menu operations end.
DELETE
CLEAR
Delete a clip list from the disc (see page 79)
Clear the current clip list from the unit memory
To display thumbnails of the sub clips in the
newly loaded current clip list
Press the SUB CLIP button and the THUMBNAIL button,
turning on the indicators.
TC
PRESET
Preset the first time code in the current clip list
SORT BY
Sort the clip lists by name or date of creation
Thumbnails of the sub clips in the clip list appear.
Notes
To escape from the CLIP menu
• If the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to ON, set it to OFF
and press the THUMBNAIL button.
Hold down the SHIFT button and press the SUB CLIP
button.
78
4-3 Managing Clip Lists (CLIP Menu)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If you set the MENU ON/OFF to ON during thumbnail
display, thumbnail display is cancelled and replaced
with menu display.
• Unless the current clip list has been saved to disc, its
contents will be lost when you load a new clip list from
the disc.
2
Select CLEAR in the CLIP menu, and press the SEL/
SET dial or the MENU knob.
The following screen display appears.
CLEAR CLIP LIST
ESC
CLEAR CLIP LIST : EXEC
4-3-2 Deleting Clip Lists From a
Disc
Proceed as follows.
1
Display the CLIP menu.
3
4
Press the SEL/SET dial or the Menu knob.
The message “EXECUTE OK? YES b NO” appears.
2
Select DELETE in the CLIP menu, and press the SEL/
SET dial or the MENU knob.
Turn the SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob to move the
b mark to “YES” and press the dial/knob.
A clip list appears.
The current clip list is cleared, leaving it with no clip
list loaded.
The date of creation or the title is displayed for each
clip list. The date of creation is always displayed for
clip lists without titles.
5
Hold down the SHIFT button and press the SUB CLIP
button.
To switch between display of dates of
creation, titles, and clip list names
With the SHIFT button held down, press the SET
button.
CLIP menu operations end.
With each press, the display changes as follows.
Dates of creation > titles > clip list names > dates of
creation …
4-3-4 Setting the Start Time Code of
the Current Clip List
The start time code (LTC) of the current clip list is set to
00:00:00:00 when the camcorder is powered on and when
a disc is inserted.
You can set the start time code to any value. Proceed as
follows.
3
4
5
Select the name of the clip list to delete and press the
SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob.
The message “DELETE OK? YES b NO” appears.
Turn the SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob to move the
b mark to “YES” and press the dial/knob.
1
Load an existing clip list for which you want to set the
initial time code into to the unit memory as the current
clip list.
The selected clip list is deleted from the disc.
Hold down the SHIFT button and press the SUB CLIP
button.
For details, see 4-3-1 “Loading a Clip List From Disc
CLIP menu operations end.
2
3
Display the CLIP menu.
4-3-3 Clearing the Current Clip List
From the Unit Memory
Select TC PRESET in the CLIP menu, and press the
SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob.
Proceed as follows to clear the current clip list, leaving it
with no clip list loaded.
The following screen display appears.
1
Display the CLIP menu.
4-3 Managing Clip Lists (CLIP Menu)
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Turn the SEL/SET dial or MENU knob to move the
cursor to “SORT BY” in the CLIP menu, and then
press the dial or knob.
CLIP LIST TC PRS ESC
HOUR
MIN
SEC
:
:
:
:
00
00
00
00
FRAME
A screen like the following appears.
OK
SORT CLIP LISTS BY
ESC
NAME(A-Z)
DATE(MOST RECENT 1ST)
The time code shown in this screen is the current initial
time code of the current clip list. If you have already
set the initial time code for this clip list, that time code
is displayed.
4
Turn the SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob to select
the item (HOUR, MIN, SEC, or FRAME) which you
want to set, then press the dial/knob.
3
4
Turn the SEL/SET dial or MENU knob to select
“NAME” or “DATE”, and then press the dial or knob.
NAME: Sort the clip lists in ascending order by clip
list name.
DATE: Sort the clip lists by date of creation, with the
newest clip list first.
5
6
Turn the SEL/SET dial or the Menu knob until the
desired value is displayed, then press the dial/knob.
After all items have been set, select OK, and press the
SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob.
The message “SORT OK?” appears.
The starting time code of the current clip list is set to
the specified LTC value. The count starts from that
value when playback starts.
Select “YES”, and then press the SEL/SET dial or
MENU knob.
The clip lists are sorted by the method you chose in
To check the time code after setting it
Press the SUB CLIP button and the THUMBNAIL
button, turning their indicators on, and then rotate the
SEL/SET dial or the MENU knob to select the first sub
clip.
step 3.
Unused clip lists are excluded from the sort.
The initial time code of the current clip list appears in
the color LCD and the monochrome LCD.
7
8
Save the current clip list to disc.
Hold down the SHIFT button and press the SUB CLIP
button.
CLIP menu operations end.
4-3-5 Sorting Clip Lists
Proceed as follows to sort the existing clip lists by clip list
name or by date of creation.
1
Display the CLIP menu.
80
4-3 Managing Clip Lists (CLIP Menu)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4Using the PDZ-1 Proxy
Browsing Software
When a computer with the PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing
Software installed is connected to this unit, you can
transfer the proxy AV data and metadata files recorded on
a disc to the computer. On the computer side, PDZ-1
enables you to browse the proxy AV data, add or modify
metadata (titles, comments, essence marks, etc.), or create
a clip list.
The modified metadata and the created clip list can then be
written back to the disc loaded in this unit.
System requirements
The following are required to use PDZ-1.
• Computer:
- When using the live logging function:
PC with Intel Pentium 4 CPU, at least 2 GHz (installed
memory: at least 512 MB)
- When not using the live logging function:
PC with Intel Pentium III CPU, at least 1 GHz
(installed memory: at least 512 MB)
• Operating system: Microsoft Windows 2000 Service
Pack 4 or higher, or Microsoft Windows XP
Professional Service Pack 1 or higher
• Web browser: Internet Explorer 6.0 Service Pack 1 or
higher
• DirectX: DirectX 8.1b or higher
To install the PDZ-1
Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of the
computer and execute the Setup.exe file, then follow the
installation instructions.
For details, refer to the ReadMe file in the CD-ROM.
Notes
• Make sure that the hard disk drive on which the work
folder to store the material transferred from this unit has
adequate free space. The amount of proxy AV data
transferred is about 1.4 GB per disc (when recording in
the DVCAM format).
• To transfer files between the computer and this unit
requires this unit’s IP address and other network-related
settings to be made.
141).
4-4 Using the PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
81
Adjustments and
Settings for Recording
5
Chapter
<TOP MENU>
USER
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE
ALL
OPERATION
PAINT
MAINTENANCE
FILE
DIAGNOSIS
5-1 Setting the
Recording Format
(PDW-530/530P
Only)
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to
Before recording with the PDW-530/530P, it is necessary
to set the recording format for each of video and audio.
Video recording format: MPEG IMX 50 Mbps, 40 Mbps,
30 Mbps, or DVCAM
“MAINTENANCE”.
<TOP MENU>
Audio recording format: 16-bit/48 kHz or 24-bit/48 kHz
USER
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE
ALL
OPERATION
PAINT
MAINTENANCE
FILE
DIAGNOSIS
Note
It is not possible to combine different recording formats on
a single disc.
5-1-1 Setting the Video Recording
Format
4
5
Press the MENU knob.
If this is the first time the MAINTENANCE menu has
been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the
MAINTENANCE menu appears.
If the menu has been used before, the last accessed
page appears.
You can select the video recording format in a menu, from
MPEG IMX 50 Mbps, MPEG IMX 40 Mbps, MPEG IMX
30 Mbps, and DVCAM.
The factory default selection is “IMX50”.
Proceed as follows.
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU
knob to move the b mark to “VDR MODE”, and press
the MENU knob to display the VDR MODE page.
For menu operations, see 7-1-3 “Basic Menu Operations”
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob
until the VDR MODE page appears, then press the
MENU knob to select the page.
1
2
Turn on the POWER switch.
Holding down the MENU knob, move the MENU ON/
OFF switch from OFF to ON.
The TOP menu appears.
82
5-1 Setting the Recording Format (PDW-530/530P Only)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the operation, see the descriptions of steps 1 to 5
of the procedure “Setting the Video Recording
M09 VDR MODE
TOP
REC TALLY BLINK :
ON
OFF
SEL
IH
IMX50
REC START/STOP
MODE SELECT
TIMER SET
:
:
:
:
2
Press the MENU knob, then turn it to move the b mark
to “AU DATA LEN (IMX)”, and press the MENU
knob.
REC FORMAT
M06 AUDIO-2
TOP
6
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “REC
FORMAT”, and press the MENU knob again.
AU DATA LEN (IMX):?16bit
AU REF LEVEL : -20db
AU REF OUT 0db
AU CH12 AGC MODE : MONO
AU CH34 AGC MODE : MONO
:
AU AGC SPEC
AU LIMITER MODE
AU LIMITER
:
:
:
-6db
OFF
ON
M09 VDR MODE
TOP
I.LINK AUDIO OUT :
2CH
REC TALLY BLINK :
ON
OFF
SEL
IH
REC START/STOP
MODE SELECT
TIMER SET
:
:
:
REC FORMAT
:? IMX50
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to display the desired format,
and press the MENU knob.
Move the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.
This ends the menu operation.
The b mark at the side of “REC FORMAT” changes
to a z mark, and the z mark by “IMX50” changes to
a ? mark.
The above procedure completes the setting of the
recording format.
7
Turn the MENU knob to display the desired recording
format.
M09 VDR MODE
TOP
REC TALLY BLINK :
ON
OFF
SEL
IH
REC START/STOP
MODE SELECT
TIMER SET
:
:
:
REC FORMAT
:? IMX40
8
9
Press the MENU knob.
This confirms the selection.
Align the b mark with “TOP” at the top right of the
menu page, and press the MENU knob.
This returns to the TOP menu.
5-1-2 Setting the Audio Recording
Format
On the PDW-530/530P, when the video recording format
is IMX50/40/30, you can select the audio recording format
in a menu, from 16-bit/48 kHz and 24-bit/48 kHz. The
factory default selection is “16bit”.
Proceed as follows.
1
Display the AUDIO-2 page of the MAINTENANCE
menu.
5-1 Setting the Recording Format (PDW-530/530P Only)
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2 Adjusting the Black
Balance and the
White Balance
OUTPUT/DCC switch
AUTO W/B BAL switch
To ensure excellent image quality when using this
camcorder, conditions may require that both the black
balance and the white balance be adjusted.
To adjust the black balance, proceed as follows.
Black balance adjustment
The black balance will require adjustment in the following
cases.
• When the camcorder is used for the first time
• When the camcorder has not been used for a long time
• When the camcorder is used under conditions in which
the surrounding temperature has changed greatly
• When the GAIN selector (L/M/H) values have been
changed by using the USER menu
1
2
Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM.
Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to BLK and release
the switch.
The switch returns to the center position, and the
adjustment is executed.
During adjustment, the following message is displayed
on the viewfinder screen.
It is not usually necessary to adjust the black balance when
using the camcorder after it has been off.
Themessageschange
in the following
sequence :
-BLACK SET-
-BLACK BALANCE-
t
White balance adjustment
Always readjust the white balance when the lighting
conditions change.
ABB:EXECUTING
-BLACK SET-
Viewfinder screen displays
The black balance adjustment ends in a few seconds
with the message “ABB:OK” and the adjustment value
is automatically stored in memory.
If the black balance or white balance adjustment is started,
messages that report on the progress and results are
displayed on the viewfinder screen when the VF DISP
MODE item is set to “2” or “3” on the VF DISP 1 page of
the USER menu.
Notes
• During the black balance adjustment, the iris is
automatically closed.
• During the black balance adjustment, the gain selection
circuit is automatically activated so you may see
flickering on the viewfinder screen, but this is not a fault.
Note
Black balance and white balance adjustment values that
are automatically set by the camcorder and the various
settings are stored in the camcorder memory and retained
even when the power is turned off.
If automatic black balance adjustment
cannot be made
If the black balance adjustment cannot be completed
normally, an error message will appear for about 3 seconds
on the viewfinder screen (in display mode 2 or 3).
Possible messages are listed below.
5-2-1 Adjusting the Black Balance
In automatic black balance mode, adjustments are
performed in the following order: clamp level, black set,
and black balance. Manual black balance adjustment can
be selected from the setup menu.
Black balance adjustment error messages
Error message Meaning
For details of manual black balance adjustment, refer to
the Maintenance Manual.
ABB : NG
IRIS NOT
CLOSED
The lens iris did not close; adjustment
was impossible.
ABB : NG
TIME LIMIT
Adjustment could not be completed
within the standard number of attempts.
84
5-2 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error message Meaning
FILTER selector
ABB : NG
R (or G or B) :
OVERFLOW
The difference between the reference
value and the current value is so great
that it exceeds the range. Adjustment
was impossible.
If any of the above error messages is displayed, retry the
black balance adjustment.
Keep pushing the AUTO W/B BAL to BLK until “-
BLACK SET-” appears after “-BLACK BALANCE-”
appears. If the error message occurs again, an internal
check is necessary.
OUTPUT/DCC
switch: CAM
For information about this internal check, refer to the
Maintenance Manual.
WHITE BAL
1)
switch: A or B
Note
If the lens cable is not firmly connected to the LENS
connector, it may not be possible to adjust the lens iris. If
this happens, the black balance will be incorrect.
GAIN selector: Set as low as
possible.
Black balance memory
Values stored in memory are held until the black balance
is next adjusted.
1) White balance setting values are stored in memory B only
when the WHITE SWITCH <B> item is set to “MEM” on
the FUNCTION 2 page of the OPERATION menu.
If a memory error occurs
If the error message “: STORED DATA : NG” flashes on
the viewfinder screen when the camcorder is turned on, the
black balance and white balance memory contents have
been lost.
Adjust the black balance and white balance again. Contact
your Sony representative if this message continues to
appear even after the black balance and white balance have
been adjusted again.
If the setting of the GAIN selector or WHITE BAL
switch is changed, a message reporting the new setting
position appears for about 3 seconds in the setting
change and adjustment progress message display area
of the viewfinder screen.
2
Set the FILTER selector to suit the lighting conditions
as follows.
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
For the PDW-530/530P:
FILTER selector (outer knob) setting and CC filter
selection
5-2-2 Adjusting the White Balance
To automatically adjust the white balance
When you make automatic white balance adjustment, the
adjustment value obtained is saved in memory.
Proceed as follows.
FILTER selector (outer knob) CC filter
setting
A
B
C
D
Cross filter
3200 K
4300 K
6300 K
1
Set the switches and selectors as shown in the figure
below.
FILTER selector (inner knob) setting and ND filter
selection
FILTER selector (inner knob) ND filter
setting
1
2
Clear
1
/ ND
4
1
3
/
ND
16
5-2 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
85
FILTER selector (inner knob) setting and ND filter
selection
FILTER selector (inner knob) ND filter
setting
1
4
/
ND
64
For the PDW-510/510P:
AUTO W/B BAL switch
FILTER selector setting and filter selection
The switch returns to the center position, and the
adjustment is executed.
FILTER selector setting
Filter selection
1
2
3200 K
1
5600 K + / ND
8
During adjustment, the message “WHITE : OP” is
displayed on the viewfinder screen (in display mode 2
or 3).
3
4
5600 K
1
5600 K + / ND
64
The white balance adjustment ends in about one
second with the message shown in the following
figure, and the adjustment setting is automatically
stored in the memory (A or B) that was selected in step
1.
If the setting of the FILTER selector is changed, a
message reporting the setting appears for about 3
seconds in the setting change and adjustment progress
message display area of the viewfinder screen (in
display mode 3).
3
Place a white test card under the same lighting
conditions as for the subject to be shot and zoom up to
it.
Approximate color
temperature of the
subject
AWB:OK
. K
Alternatively, any white object such as a cloth or a
wall can be used.
The absolute minimum white area is as follows.
Rectangle centered on
the screen. The lengths
of the sides are 70% of
the length and width of
the screen.
Note
If the camera has a zoom lens with an automatic iris,
the iris may hunt during the adjustment. To prevent
1)
this, adjust the iris gain knob (indicated as IG, IS, or S)
on the lens.
The white object must
be within the rectangle
and have an area of at
least 10% of the screen.
For details, refer to the lens operation manual.
1)Hunting
Note
Repeated brightening and darkening of the image, resulting from
repeated response to automatic iris control.
Make sure there are not bright spots in the rectangle.
4
5
Adjust the lens iris.
If the automatic white balance adjustment
cannot be made
If the white balance adjustment cannot be completed
normally, an error message will appear for about 3 seconds
on the viewfinder screen.
Manually adjusted lens: set the iris to an appropriate
setting.
Lens with automatic iris: set the automatic/manual
switch on the lens to automatic.
Possible messages are listed below.
Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to WHT and then
release the switch.
White balance adjustment error messages
Error message
Meaning
WHITE : NG
LOW LEVEL
The white video level is too low.
Either open the lens iris or increase
the gain.
86
5-2 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a memory error occurs
Error message
Meaning
If the error message “: STORED DATA : NG” flashes on
the viewfinder screen when the camcorder is turned on, the
white balance and black balance memory contents have
been lost.
WHITE : NG
COLOR TEMP HIGH
The color temperature is too high.
Select a suitable filter setting.
WHITE : NG
COLOR TEMP LOW
The color temperature is too low.
Select a suitable filter setting.
Adjust the white balance and black balance again. Contact
your Sony representative if this message continues to
appear even after the white balance and black balance have
been adjusted again.
WHITE : NG
TIME LIMIT
Adjustment could not be completed
within the standard number of
attempts.
WHITE : NG
POOR WHITE AREA
The white area could not be
checked.
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
WHITE : NG
OVER LEVEL
The white video level is too high.
Either stop down the lens iris or
change the ND filter.
If any of the above error messages is displayed, retry the
white balance adjustment. If the error message occurs
again, an internal check is necessary.
For information about this internal check, refer to the
Maintenance Manual.
If you have no time to adjust the white
balance
Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.
The white balance is automatically set as follows,
depending on the FILTER selector setting.
• PDW-530/530P:
B: 3200K, C: 4300 K, D: 6300K
• PDW-510/510P:
1: 3200 K, 3: 5600 K
For details about setting the white balance manually, see
White balance memory
Values stored in memory are held until the white balance
is next adjusted.
There are two sets of white balance memories, A and B,
and adjustments for each of the filters can be automatically
stored in the memory corresponding to the setting (A or B)
of the WHITE BAL switch. The camcorder has four built-
in filters, so a total of eight (4 × 2) adjustments can be
stored. The number of memories allocated to each of A and
B can be limited to one by setting the WHT FILTER INH.
item to “ON” on the FUNCTION 3 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu. In this case, the memory
contents are not linked to the filter settings.
If the WHITE BAL switch is set to B, and on the
FUNCTION 2 page of the OPERATION menu, the
WHITE SWITCH <B> item is set to “ATW”, the ATW
function is activated to automatically adjust the white
balance of the picture being shot for varying lighting
conditions.
5-2 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shutter
mode
Shutter speed
Application
5-3 Setting the
Electronic Shutter
EVS
Shutter speed currently
Improved
vertical
resolution.
However, the
sensitivity and
dynamicrange
are reduced.
(Enhanced selected in the Standard or
Vertical
definition
System)
ECS mode
This section describes the shutter modes that can be used
with the electronic shutter of the camcorder, and describes
the procedure for selecting the shutter speed and shutter
mode.
1) Only when the CBK-FC01 is installed.
2) The SLS mode can only be selected when the CCD scan mode(see page
5-3-1 Shutter Modes
Notes
The shutter modes that can be used with the electronic
shutter and the shutter speeds that can be selected are listed
below.
• Whatever the operating mode of the electronic shutter,
the sensitivity of the CCD decreases with increasing
shutter speed.
• When the automatic iris is used, the iris opens wider as
the shutter speed increases, thus reducing the depth of
field.
Selectable shutter modes and shutter speeds
Shutter
mode
Shutter speed
Application
• Under artificial light, particularly fluorescent or mercury
lamps, the light intensity may appear to be constant, but
the red, green, and blue intensities are actually changing
in synchronization with the frequency of the power
supply causing flicker. Using an electronic shutter under
such lighting could make the flicker even worse. Color
flicker is particularly likely to happen when the power
supply frequency is 60 Hz (with the PDW-510/530) or
50 Hz (with the PDW-510P/530P). However, if the
power frequency is 50 Hz (with the PDW-510/530) or 60
Hz (with the PDW-510P/530P), setting the shutter speed
to 1/100 or 1/60 can reduce this flicker.
• When a bright object is shot in EVS mode or ECS mode
in such a manner that it fills the screen, the upper edge of
the picture may have poor quality because of an inherent
characteristic of CCDs. Before using EVS mode or ECS
mode, check the shooting conditions.
Standard
PDW-510/ Scan Mode:I
For shooting
fast-moving
subjects with
little blurring.
530
1/100, 1/125,
1/250, 1/500,
1/1000, 1/2000
(sec.)
Scan Mode:PsF
1/40, 1/60, 1/120,
1/125, 1/250,
1/500, 1/1000,
1/2000 (sec.)
1)
Scan Mode:24P
1/32, 1/48, 1/96,
1/125, 1/250,
1/500, 1/1000,
1/2000 (sec.):
PDW-
510P/
530P
Scan Mode:I
1/60, 1/125,
1/250, 1/500,
1/1000, 1/2000
(sec.)
You can turn on or off the EVS mode on the SW STATUS
page of the PAINT menu.
Scan Mode:PsF
1/33, 1/50, 1/100,
1/125, 1/250,
1/500, 1/1000,
1/2000 (sec.)
5-3-2 Selecting the Shutter Mode
and Shutter Speed
ECS
PDW-510/ Scan Mode:I
For obtaining
images with
no horizontal
bands of noise
when shooting
subjects such
as monitor
(Extended 530
Clear
60.0 to 6000 Hz
Scan Mode:PsF
30.0 to 7000 Hz
Use the SHUTTER selector to select a shutter mode or a
standard-mode shutter speed. To set the shutter speed in
ECS or SLS mode, with the SHUTTER selector set to ON
and the ECS or SLS mode selected, use the MENU knob
for adjustment.
You can use the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION
menu to narrow the range of choice in advance, or to select
in advance whether or not you use ECS/SLS.
Scan)
1)
Scan Mode:24P
24.0 Hz to 5000
Hz
screens.
PDW-
Scan Mode:I
510P/
530P
50.0 to 6000 Hz
Scan Mode:PsF
25.0 to 6000 Hz
2)
1 (1/30 sec for PDW-510/530, For shooting
1/25 sec for PDW-510P/530P) subjects in low
SLS
(slow
speed
shutter)
to 8, 16 frames (1/2 sec for
PDW-510/530, 2/3 sec for
PDW-510P/530P)
level lighting
conditions
88
5-3 Setting the Electronic Shutter
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the shutter mode and standard-
mode shutter speed
Standard mode (with scan mode:I)
Once the shutter speed is selected, it is retained even when
the camcorder power is turned off.
1
Follow the procedure described in 7-2-2 “Selecting the
MODE item to “2” or “3” on the VF DISP 1 page of
the USER menu.
SLS mode
ECS mode
1/100: for PDW-510/530
1/60: for PDW-510P/530P
2
Push the SHUTTER selector from ON to SELECT.
Shutter speeds in standard mode can also be switched
to angle display by using SHT DISP MODE in the
FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.
Setting the shutter speed in ECS mode
Proceed as follows.
1 2
SHUTTER selector
Setting the shutter speed in ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode
The current shutter setting indication appears for about
3 seconds in the setting change and adjustment
progress message display area of the viewfinder
screen.
Examples: “: SS : 1/250”, “: SLS : 1/30 : 1FRAME”,
“: ECS : 60.0 Hz”
1
Set the shutter speed mode to ECS.
For the operation, see the previous item “Setting the
3
Before the shutter setting indication disappears, push
the SHUTTER selector down to SELECT again and
repeat this until the desired mode or speed appears.
ECS:60.00Hz
Pushing the SHUTTER selector down to SELECT
repeatedly allows you to cycle through the settings of
mode and speed preselected on the SHT ENABLE
page of the OPERATION menu.
Note that all modes and all standard-mode speeds
SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu.
By factory default, all available shutter modes and
shutter speeds are displayed in the sequence shown in
the following figure. (You can use the SHT ENABLE
page of the OPERATION menu to make a setting so
that only the desired (or most frequently used) modes
and speeds are displayed.)
Example of view finder screen display for ECS setting operation
2
Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise
until the desired frequency appears.
See the table “Selectable shutter modes and shutter
be changed.
5-3 Setting the Electronic Shutter
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the RM-B150 Remote Control Unit is
connected
You can set the shutter speed of ECS with the rotary
encoder of the RM-B150.
Setting the shutter speed in SLS mode
Proceed as follows.
MENU ON/OFF switch
MENU knob
Changing the range of choice of shutter mode and speed settings
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON while holding
down the MENU knob.
1 2
The TOP menu appears.
Setting the shutter speed in SLS (Slow Speed Shutter) mode
1
Set the shutter speed mode to SLS.
For the operation, see “Setting the shutter mode and
2
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to
OPERATION.
Press the MENU knob.
SLS: 1/30 : 1FRAME
If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been
displayed, the CONTENTS page of the OPERATION
menu appears. If the menu has been used before, the
last accessed page appears.
Example of viewfinder screen display for SLS setting operation
2
Turn the MENU knob until the desired number of
frames appears.
4
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU
knob to move the b mark to “SHT ENABLE”, then
press the MENU knob to display the SHT ENABLE
page.
The number of frames can be set to values in the range
1 to 8, and 16. (1 frame nearly equals to 1/30 second
(PDW-510/530) or 1/25 second (PDW-510P/530P)).
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob
until the SHT ENABLE page appears, then press the
MENU knob to select the page.
Changing the range of choice of shutter
mode and speed settings
17 SHT ENABLE
You can reduce the time required to select the shutter mode
and speed by narrowing the choice of settings in advance.
This can be done by using the SHT ENABLE page of the
OPERATION menu.
SHUTTER SLS
SHUTTER ECS
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SHUTTER 1/100
SHUTTER 1/125
SHUTTER 1/250
SHUTTER 1/500
SHUTTER 1/1000
SHUTTER 1/2000
Proceed as follows.
Note
The settings selected on the SHT ENABLE page of the
OPERATION menu become invalid when the RM-B150
Remote Control Unit is connected to the camcorder.
(This menu display is for the PDW-510/530. For the
PDW-510P/530P, “SHUTTER 1/60” is displayed
instead of “SHUTTER 1/100”.)
90
5-3 Setting the Electronic Shutter
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
6
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the
shutter mode or shutter speed you want, then press the
MENU knob.
5-4 Changing the
Reference Value for
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting
changes to a ? mark.
Automatic Iris
Adjustment
Turn the MENU knob until “ON” appears, then press
the MENU knob.
The reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be
changed to aid the shooting of clear pictures of back-lit
subjects, or to prevent blown-out highlights. The reference
value for the lens iris can be set within the following range
with respect to the standard value.
The z mark on the left of the selected item changes to
a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting
changes to a z mark.
To set another mode or speed, return to step 5.
• 0.5: about 0.5 stop further open
• 1: about 1 stop further open
• –0.5: about 0.5 stop further closed
Note that only the shutter speeds set to “ON” can be
selected with the SHUTTER selector.
• –1: about 1 stop further closed
Also you can set the area where light detection occurs.
7
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating
section.
Changing the reference value
Proceed as follows.
The menu disappears from the screen and the display
indicating the current status of the camcorder appears
along the top and bottom of the screen.
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.
If this is the first time the USER menu has been
displayed, the CONTENTS page of the USER menu
appears. If the menu has been used before, the last
accessed page appears.
2
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU
knob to move the b mark to AUTO IRIS, then press
the MENU knob to display the AUTO IRIS page.
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob
until the AUTO IRIS page appears, then press the
MENU knob to select the page.
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “IRIS
OVERRIDE”, then press the MENU knob.
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting
changes to a ? mark.
Turn the MENU knob until “ON” appears, then press
the MENU knob.
5-4 Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The z mark on the left of the selected item changes to
a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting
changes to a z mark.
The IRIS OVERRIDE item is set to “ON”.
5
6
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.
The AUTO IRIS page disappears from the screen.
Opening the lens iris
Turn the MENU knob to change the reference value.
Iris opened by 1 stop
(two bars)
Note
Iris opened by 0.5 stop
(one bar)
Be sure to confirm that the current shutter mode is not
ECS.
The changed reference value is retained until the
power of the camcorder is turned off.
Even if the reference value is changed, it reverts to the
standard value every time the power is turned on.
Stopping down the lens iris
Iris stopped down by 1 stop
(two bars)
Iris stopped down by 0.5 stop
(one bar)
To open the iris by 0.5 stop:
Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from
the front of the camera.
One bar (s) appears in the upper part to the left of the
F number in the iris indication.
Adjusting the reference value for automatic iris adjustment
When the RM-B150 Remote Control Unit is
connected
The IRIS control knob of the RM-B150 can be used for
lens iris setting. In this case, the bar display (s) does not
appear.
To open the iris by 1 stop:
Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from
the front of the camera.
Two bars (ss) appear in the upper part to the left of
the F number in the iris indication.
To stop down the iris by 0.5 stop:
Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front
of the camera.
Selecting the automatic iris window
Proceed as follows.
One bar (s) appears in the lower part to the left of the
F number in the iris indication.
1
Follow the procedure of steps 1 and 2 described in the
previous item “Changing the reference value” to
display the AUTO IRIS page.
To stop down the iris by 1 stop:
Turn the MENU knob further clockwise as seen from
the front of the camera.
Two bars (ss) appear in the lower part to the left of
the F number in the iris indication.
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “IRIS
WINDOW IND”, then press the MENU knob.
The b mark on the left of “IRIS WINDOW IND”
changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the
setting changes to a ? mark.
3
4
Turn the MENU knob until “ON” appears, then press
the MENU knob.
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark.
The currently selected auto iris window appears on the
screen.
If it is not necessary to display the auto iris window on
the screen, set to “OFF”.
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “IRIS
WINDOW”, then press the MENU knob.
92
5-4 Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The b mark changes to a z mark and the z mark
changes to a ? mark.
5-5 Adjusting the Audio
Level
5
Turn the MENU knob until the desired auto iris
window appears, then press the MENU knob.
Setting the AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 switches to
AUTO automatically adjusts the input levels of the audio
signal to be recorded in audio channels 1 and 2. You can
also adjust the audio level manually.
The shaded parts indicate the area
where light detection occurs.
For the audio level of the signal to be recorded in
audio channels 3 and 4
The input levels for audio channels 3 and 4 are either
automatically adjusted, or are fixed.
Auto iris window
The z mark on changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark.
5-5-1 Manually Adjusting the Audio
Levels of the Audio Inputs
From the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2
Connectors
If you select “VARIABLE”, the following items
become effective and you can set the window of the
desired size. Set each item to the desired size.
Item
Setting
Proceed as follows to adjust the audio levels of the audio
inputs from the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors, which
are to be recorded in audio channels 1 and 2.
IRIS VAR WIDTH The width of the window
IRIS VAR
HEIGHT
The height of the window
IRIS VAR H POS. The position of the window in the
horizontal direction
With the XLR connection automatic detection function
being on, when a cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1
or CH2 connector, the input from these connectors is
automatically selected for audio recording. In this case,
start the operation from step 2.
IRIS VAR V POS. The position of the window in the
vertical direction.
6
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF or close the
cover of the menu operating section.
You can turn on and off the XLR connection automatic
detection function on the AUDIO-1 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu.
The menu disappears from the screen and the display
indicating the current status of the camcorder appears
along the top and bottom of the screen.
To counter problems with very bright
highlights
If the subject is too bright, the iris may close too much,
leaving the overall image dark, or the highlights may be
blown out. In such cases, setting the highlight clip function
on reduces the luminance range, avoiding problems from
the automatic iris correction.
In the AUTO IRIS page of the USER menu, set the CLIP
HIGH LIGHT item to “ON”.
3
2
1
MIC LEVEL control
Manual adjustment of the audio levels of channels 1 and 2
5-5 Adjusting the Audio Level
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
To adjust the signal input to the AUDIO IN CH1 or
AUDIO IN CH2 connector, set the AUDIO IN CH-1
or AUDIO IN CH-2 switch to REAR. To adjust both
input signals, set both switches to REAR.
5-5-2 Manually Adjusting the Audio
Level of the Front Microphone
You can adjust the audio level input from the front
microphone connected to the MIC IN connector, which is
to be recorded on audio channels 1 and 2.
2
3
Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) corresponding to
the channel(s) selected in step 1 to MANUAL.
With the LEVEL control for the channel selected in
step 1, adjust so that the audio level meter shows up to
–20 dB for a normal input volume.
Note
If the XLR connection automatic detection mode is on,
when the cables are connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2
connectors, the camcorder detects the connection to the
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors. Thus, the AUDIO IN
switches are internally reset to REAR and the audio signals
input to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors are
automatically selected.
The second bar from the top may turn on occasionally,
but do not allow the top bar (0 dB) to go on. If it goes
on, the audio level is too high.
Before adjusting the audio level of the front microphone,
confirm that no cables are connected to the AUDIO IN
CH1/CH2 connectors. Alternatively, set the REAR XLR
AUTO item to “OFF” on the AUDIO-1 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu.
All bars go on.
These bars go on.
Excessive input level
Normal input level
Correspondence between recording level
adjustments and audio level controls
In the AUDIO-3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, you
can select which audio level control controls the audio
recording level of the input to each of the AUDIO IN CH1/
CH2 connectors. The correspondence between the controls
and the menu items and settings is as follows.
2
Level to be Control
adjusted
Menu item Setting
1
3
Channel-1 LEVEL (CH-1) control REAE1/
SIDE1
recording
level
(on the left)
WRR
LEVEL
MIC LEVEL control
FRONT
F+S1
1
Set either or both of the AUDIO IN switch(es) to
FRONT as follows:
LEVEL (CH-1) control
is linked with MIC
LEVEL control.
When using the front microphone input for both
channels 1 and 2: Set both AUDIO IN switches to
FRONT.
When using the front microphone input for either
channel 1 or 2: Set the AUDIO IN switch for the
desired channel to FRONT.
Channel-2 LEVEL (CH-2) control REAE2/
SIDE2
recording
level
(on the right)
WRR
LEVEL
MIC LEVEL control
FRONT
F+S2
LEVEL (CH-2) control
is linked with MIC
LEVEL control.
2
3
Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) for the desired
channel(s) selected in step 1 to MANUAL.
Note
When you have operation of the LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2)
controls and MIC LEVEL control linked together, if the
MIC LEVEL control is set to 0, the audio signals on
channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check the position of
the MIC LEVEL control before adjusting the LEVEL
(CH-1/CH-2) controls.
Turn the MIC LEVEL control, and adjust so that the
audio level meter shows up to –20 dB for a normal
input volume.
• The 10 bars from the bottom among 20 bars go on
with the normal input volume.
94
5-5 Adjusting the Audio Level
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The second top bar may turn on occasionally, but do
not allow the top bar to go on. If it goes on, the audio
level is too high.
For fixed settings: select “OFF”.
Note
The type of audio recorded on audio channels 3 and 4 does
not depend on the XLR connection automatic detection
function. It is determined only by the switch settings.
Correspondence between recording level
adjustments and audio level controls
In the AUDIO-3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, you
can select which audio level control controls the audio
recording level of the front microphone input. The
correspondence between the controls and the menu items
and settings is as follows.
F: The audio signal from the front microphone
is recorded.
R: The audio signal input to the AUDIO IN CH1
connector is recorded.
W:The audio signal of the wireless microphone
is recorded.
Level to be Control
adjusted
Menu item Setting
F: Same as with the CH3 switch.
R: The audio signal input to the AUDIO IN CH2
connector is recorded.
W:Same as with the CH3 switch.
Channel-1 MIC LEVEL control
MIC CH1
LEVEL
FRONT
SIDE
recording
LEVEL (CH-1) control
level
(on the left)
LEVEL (CH-1) control
is linked with MIC
LEVEL control.
F+S1
Audio signals to be recorded on audio channels 3 and 4
Channel-2 MIC LEVEL control
MIC CH2
LEVEL
FRONT
SIDE2
recording
LEVEL (CH-2) control
level
(on the right)
LEVEL (CH-2) control
is linked with MIC
LEVEL control.
F+S1
Note
When you have operation of the MIC LEVEL control and
LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls linked together, if the
LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls are set to 0, the audio
signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check the
position of the LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls before
adjusting the MIC LEVEL control.
5-5-3 Recording Audio on Channels
3 and 4
Selecting the recorded audio
You can select the audio recorded on audio channels 3 and
4 with the AUDIO IN CH-3/CH-4 switches, or you can
have the selection made automatically, as follows.
To automatically select the same audio as on
channels 1 and 2
In the AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, set
the AUDIO CH3/4 MODE item to “CH 1/2”.
Adjusting the audio recording levels
In the AUDIO-2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, set
the AU CH34 AGC MODE item as follows.
For automatic adjustment: select “STREO” or
“MONO”.
5-5 Adjusting the Audio Level
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To reset the time code value to 00:00:00:00
Press the RESET button.
5-6 Setting the Time
Data
5
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN or R-
RUN.
F-RUN: Free run. The time code generator keeps
running.
R-RUN: Recording run. The time code generator runs
only while recording.
5-6-1 Setting the Time Code
The time code setting range is from 00 : 00 : 00 : 00 to 23
: 59 : 59 : 29 (hours : minutes : seconds : frames) for the
PDW-510/530, and from 00 : 00 : 00 : 00 to 23 : 59 : 59 :
24 for the PDW-510P/530P.
To set the drop frame mode/non-drop frame
mode (only for the PDW-510/530)
You can select the drop frame (DF) mode or non-drop
frame (NDF) mode on the FUNCTION 1 page of the
USER menu or OPERATION menu or on the TIMECODE
page of the MAINTENANCE menu.
Note
When the scan mode is 24P (with the CBK-FC01
expansion board installed) and the frame mode is NDF
(non-drop frame mode), the value of the least significant
digit is limited to 0 or 5.
To make the time code consecutive
When the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set to R-RUN,
recording a number of scenes on the disc normally
produces consecutive time code. However, once you
remove the disc and record on another disc, the time code
will no longer be consecutive when you use the original
disc again for recording. In this case, to make the time code
consecutive, proceed as follows.
To set the time code, proceed as follows.
1
2
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to REGEN.
Press the RET button on the lens.
1
This reads the previous recording and synchronizes the
internal time code generator, thus allowing the new
time code recorded to follow on consecutively.
RESET
button
THUMBNAIL
SEL/SET
ESSENCE MARK
S.SEL
SUB CLIP
4
5-6-2 Saving the Actual Time in the
Time Code
CLIP MENU
SHIFT
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
PRESET
REGEN
CLOCK
2
3
Setting the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to CLOCK
saves the actual time in the time code.
When it is necessary to set the actual time, use the TIME/
DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu.
Setting the time code
1
2
3
Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.
5-6-3 Setting the User Bits
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to PRESET.
By setting the user bits (up to 8 hexadecimal digits), you
can record user information such as the date, time, or scene
number on the time code track.
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET.
The first (leftmost) digit of time code flashes.
To set the user bits, proceed as follows.
4
Use the SEL/SET dial to set the time code value.
To change the value of the flashing digit, turn the dial,
and to shift to the next digit, press the dial. Repeat this
until all desired digits are set.
96
5-6 Setting the Time Data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
regeneration of an external time code. You can also
synchronize the time code generators of other camcorders/
VTRs with the internal generator of this camcorder.
Connections for time code
synchronization
Connect both the reference video signal and the external
time code as illustrated below.
1
RESET
button
Example 1: Synchronizing with an external time code
THUMBNAIL
SEL/SET
S.SEL
ESSENCE MARK
SUB CLIP
3
CLIP MENU
SHIFT
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
PRESET
REGEN
CLOCK
1)
GENLOCK IN
Reference video signal
2,4
Setting the user bits
TC IN
External time code
1
2
Set the DISPLAY switch to U-BIT.
1) Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page of the
MAINTENANCE menu, if GENLOCK is set to OFF.
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET.
The first (leftmost) digit flashes.
Example 2: Interconnecting a number of camcorders
for time code synchronization
3
Use the SEL/SET dial to set the user bit data.
To change the value of the flashing digit, turn the dial,
and to shift to the next digit, press the dial. Repeat this
until all desired digits are set.
TEST OUT
TC OUT
Hexadecimal digits A to F are displayed as follows:
Reference camcorder
Hexadecimal
Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
TC IN
A
b
C
d
E
F
1)
GENLOCK IN
TC OUT
To reset the user bit data to 00:00:00:00
TEST OUT
Press the RESET button.
1)
GENLOCK IN
4
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN or R-
RUN, corresponding to the desired operating mode for
the time code generator.
TC IN
TC OUT
TEST OUT
The set user bit data will be recorded for both LTC and
VITC.
To another camcorder to be synchronized
To store the user bit setting in memory
The user bit setting (apart from the real time) is
automatically retained in memory even when the power is
turned off.
1) Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page of the
MAINTENANCE menu, if GENLOCK is set to OFF.
Procedure for time code synchronization
To synchronize the time code, proceed as follows.
5-6-4 Synchronizing the Time Code
You can synchronize the internal time code generator of
this camcorder with an external generator for the
5-6 Setting the Time Data
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
time code cannot be synchronized with the reference
video signal. In this case, set the GENLOCK item to
“ON” on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE
menu.
User bit settings during time code
synchronization
When the time code is synchronized, only the time data is
synchronized with the external time code value. Therefore,
the user bits can have their own settings for each
camcorder.
4
3
1
2
You can also synchronize the user bits with external user
bit data.
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
To release the time code synchronization
First disconnect the external time code, then set the F-
RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN.
5
To change the power supply from the battery
pack to an external power supply during time
code synchronization
To maintain a continuous power supply, connect the
external power supply to the DC IN connector before
removing the battery pack. You may lose time code
synchronization if you remove the battery pack first.
Synchronizing the time code
1
2
3
4
5
Turn on the POWER switch.
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to PRESET.
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN.
Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.
Camera synchronization during time code
synchronization
During time code synchronization, the camera is
genlocked to the reference video signal input from the
GENLOCK IN connector.
Supply a time code signal and a reference video signal
complying with the SMPTE (for PDW-510/530) or
EBU (for PDW-510P/530P) standard and in proper
phase relationship, to the TC IN connector and to the
GENLOCK IN connector, respectively.
This operation synchronizes the internal time code
generator with the external time code. After about 10
seconds, you can disconnect the external time code
without losing the synchronization. However, there
will be noise on the recorded image if you connect or
disconnect the time code signal during recording.
Notes
• When you finish the above procedure, the internal time
code is immediately synchronized with the external time
code and the counter display will show the value of the
external time code. However, wait for a few seconds
until the sync generator stabilizes before recording.
• If the frequency of the reference video signal is not the
same as the frame frequency of the camcorder, the
camera cannot be correctly genlocked. In such a case, the
internal time code is not correctly synchronized with the
external time code.
• When the GENLOCK ON/OFF item is set to “OFF” on
the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu, the
98
5-6 Setting the Time Data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
?M10 ESSENCE MARK
TOP
5-7 Setting the
Thumbnail Image
SHOT MARK 1
SHOT MARK 2
:
:
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
10
OVER AUDIO LIMIT :
GAIN CHG. MARK
FILTER CHG. MARK :
SHUTTER CHG. MARK:
WHITE CHG. MARK
FLASH MARK
FLASH MARK LEVEL :
:
:
:
When the unit is shipped from the factory, it is set up to
display the first frame of a clip as the clip’s thumbnail
frame to display as a clip’s thumbnail image.
For example, if all clips have the same image in their first
frames, you can specify a frame a few seconds after the
start of the clip, so that all thumbnails will not show the
same image.
INDEX PIC. POS. :? 0SEC
7
8
Turn the MENU knob to select the desired time.
Press the MENU knob.
The selection is confirmed.
To select the frame to display as a clip’s
thumbnail image
9
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF to end the
menu operation.
Proceed as follows.
1
2
Turn the POWER switch on.
Holding down the MENU knob, move the MENU ON/
OFF switch to ON.
The TOP menu appears.
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to
“MAINTENANCE”.
Press the MENU knob.
If this is the first time the MAINTENANCE menu has
been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the
MAINTENANCE menu appears. If the menu has been
used before, the last accessed page appears.
5
6
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU
knob to move the b mark to “ESSENCE MARK”,
then press the MENU knob.
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob
until the ESSENCE MARK page appears, then press
the MENU knob to select the page.
Press the MENU knob, then turn it to move the b mark
to “INDEX PIC.POS.”, and press the MENU knob
again.
The b mark changes to a z mark, and the z mark
changes to a ? mark.
5-7 Setting the Thumbnail Image
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
File Operations
6
Chapter
root a)
6-1 Overview
INDEX.XML
ALIAS.XML b)
DISCMETA.XML
A remote computer can be connected to this unit and used
to operate on recorded data which has been saved in data
files, such as video and audio data files.
There are two way to connect a remote computer.
• FAM connection
Connect the S400 (i.LINK) connector on this unit to
the i.LINK (IEEE1394) connector on the remote
• FTP connection
MEDIAPRO.XML
Clip
C0001.MXF
C0001M01.XML
Connect the network connectors on this unit and the
C0002.MXF
C0002M01.XML
C0003.MXF
6-1-1 Directory Structure
C0003M01.XML
The following figure shows the directory structure of discs
visible to a remote computer.
Edit
E0001E01.SMI
E0001M01.XML
E0002E01.SMI
E0002M01.XML
Note
This structure is not the same as the actual structure
recorded on the disc.
Sub
C0001S01.MXF
C0002S01.MXF
C0003S01.MXF
General
a) Root directory
b) Only when “NAMING FORM” on the FILE NAMING page of the
OPERATION menu is set to “FREE”
100
6-1 Overview
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-1-2 File Operation Restrictions
This section explains which operations are possible on
files stored in each directory.
When required, the following operation tables distinguish
reading and writing from partial reading and writing.
Read: Read data sequentially from the start to the end of
the file.
Partial read: Read only a part of the data in the file.
Write: Write data sequentially from the start to the end of
the file.
Partial write: Write data to a part of the file only.
Root directory
File name
Content
Operations
Read/
Partial read Partial write
Write/
Rename
No
Create
No
Delete
No
INDEX.XML
Contains data for management of Yes
the material on the disc.
No
No
a)
Contains conversion tables for
assigning user-defined names to
clips and clip lists.
Yes
No
No
No
ALIAS.XML
b)
DISCMETA.XML Contains metadata to indicate the Yes
disc properties.
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
MEDIAPRO.XML Contains a list of material on the
disc, basic properties, related
Yes
information, and information about
access methods.
Other files
Files other than the above
−
No
−
No
−
a) Only when “NAMING FORM” on the FILE NAMING page of the
OPERATION menu is set to “FREE”
b) Only files which can be written by XDCAM
Notes
• Directories cannot be created in the root directory.
• The directories in the root directory (Clip, Edit, Sub, and
General) cannot be deleted or renamed.
Clip directory
File name
Content
Operations
Read/
Write/
Rename
Create
Delete
Partial read Partial write
a)
b)
c)
d)
Clip file created by recording (MXF Yes
file)
C*.MXF
No
No
Yes
Yes
*: 0001 to 4999
a)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Metadata file generated
automatically when C*.MXF file is
created.
Yes
C*M01.XML
Other files
Yes
No
No
No
*: 0001 to 4999
Files other than the above
−
No
−
No
−
a) With firmware version 1.5 and higher, files having a user-defined name in
the “C*” part can be handled.
g) When a C*.MXF file is created, a C*M01.XML file with the same name
in the “C*” part is created automatically.
b) Possible with firmware version 1.5 and higher.
h) When a C*.MXF file is deleted, the C*M01.XML file with the same name
in the “C*” part is also deleted automatically.
c) Only files which are 2 seconds or longer in length, in a format matching
the line mode format (525/625) and recording format (IMX50/IMX40/
IMX30/DVCAM and number of audio channels) of the recorded sections
of the disc, and which can be overwritten by XDCAM.
d) Only when the Write Inhibit tab on the disc is set to enable recording. With
firmware version 1.4x and lower, only the most recently recorded clip may
be deleted. With firmware version 1.5 and higher, any clip may be selected
and deleted.
Notes
• Directories cannot be created in the Clip directory.
• When the following operations, supported by version 1.5
and higher XDCAM devices, are carried out on a disc,
then it becomes impossible for version 1.4x and lower
XDCAM devices to record new clips or delete existing
e) Only files which can be written by XDCAM
f) With firmware version 1.5 and higher, when the "C*" part of a C*.MXF
file name is changed, a C*M01.XML file with the same name in the “C*”
part is also changed automatically.
6-1 Overview
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
clips on that disc. (The only possible operations are
playback and disc formatting.)
- Writing of files with a user-defined names
- Deletion of arbitrary clips (except the last recorded
clip)
• If you attempt to write a C*.MXF file which does not
meet the conditions specified as remark c) on this table
via a FAM connection, a Windows error message
appears to the effect that the file or directory is corrupt
and cannot be read.
- Locking of clips
Edit directory
File name
Content
Operations
Read/
Write/
Rename
Create
Delete
Partial read Partial write
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Clip list file
*: 0001 to 0099
Yes
Yes
E*E01.SMI
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
a)
b)
f)
g)
h)
Metadata file generated
automatically when E*E01.SMI file
is created.
E*M01.XML
Yes
No
No
No
*: 0001 to 0099
Other files
Files other than the above
−
No
−
No
−
a) With firmware version 1.5 and higher, the “E*” part can be changed to a
user-defined name.
g) When an E*E01.SMI file is created, an E*M01.XML file with the same
name in the “E*” part is created automatically.
b) Only files which can be written by XDCAM. Partial writing is not
possible.
h) When an E*E01.SMI file is deleted, the E*M01.XML file with the same
name in the “E*” part is also deleted automatically.
c) Possible with firmware version 1.5 and higher.
d) Only files which can be written by XDCAM
e) Only when the Write Inhibit tab on the disc is set to enable recording.
f) With firmware version 1.5 and higher, when the “E*” part of an
E*E01.SMI file name is changed, an E*M01.XML file with the same
name in the “E*” part is generated automatically.
Note
Directories cannot be created in the Edit directory.
Sub directory
File name
C*S01.MXF
Other files
Content
Operations
Read/
Partial read Partial write
Write/
Rename
Create
Delete
a)
b)
c)
d)
Proxy AV data (MXF) file generated Yes
automatically when a C*.MXF file is
created.
No
No
No
No
*: 0001 to 0300
Files other than the above
−
No
−
No
−
a) With firmware version 1.5 and higher, the “C*” part can be changed to a
user-defined name.
d) When a C*.MXF file is deleted, the C*S01.XML file with the same name
in the “C*” part is also deleted automatically.
b) With firmware version 1.5 and higher, when the “C*” part of a C*.MXF
file name is changed, a C*S01. MXF file with the same name in the “C*”
part is generated automatically.
c) When a C*.MXF file is created, a C*S01.XML file with the same name in
the “C*” part is created automatically.
Note
Directories cannot be created in the Sub directory.
General directory
File name
Content
Operations
Read/
Partial read Partial write
Yes Yes
Write/
Rename
Create
Delete
a)
b)
Any file
Yes
Yes
Yes
a) UTF-8 file names can be up to 63 bytes in length. (Depending on the
character type, file names (including extension) may be limited to 21
characters.)
The following directory operations are possible in the
General directory.
• Directory creation (up to 64 levels, including the
General directory)
b) Only when the Write Inhibit tab on the disc is set to enable recording.
102
6-1 Overview
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Deletion and renaming of directories
6-2 File Access Mode
File Operations
Notes
• File names and directory names can use letters, numbers,
and symbols from the Unicode 2.0 character set.
However, the following control characters and symbols
1)
cannot be used.
- Control characters: U+0000 to U+001F, U+007F
- Symbols: ", *, /, :, <, >, ?, \, |
File access mode operating environment
Operating system requirements for file operations by file
access mode (called FAM below) are as follows.
• Computer operating system: Microsoft Windows 2000
Service Pack 4 or higher, or Microsoft Windows XP
1) This is supported from firmware version 1.4. However, the following
character codes cannot be used by FAM connections.
U+010000, U+020000, U+030000, U+040000, U+050000,
U+060000, U+070000, U+080000, U+090000, U+0A0000,
U+0B0000, U+0C0000, U+0D0000, U+0E0000, U+0F0000,
U+100000
Preparations
Do the following on the remote computer and this unit.
• Install the FAM driver on the remote computer.
• Enable FAM connections over the i.LINK connector.
(There are no limits to characters which can be used by FTP
connections.)
To install the FAM driver
Insert the supplied CD-ROM (Proxy Browsing Software
PDZ-1) in the CD-ROM drive of the computer and execute
the Setup.exe file, then follow the installation instructions.
For details, refer to the ReadMe file contained on the CD-
ROM disc.
Note
Use Version 1.4 or higher of the FAM driver. The FAM
driver on the supplied CD-ROM is Version 1.4 or higher.
If a FAM driver is already installed on your computer,
check the version.
To check the version, click “Add or Remove
Programs”(Windows XP) or “Add/Remove Programs”
(Windows 2000), select “ProDisc,” and then click “Click
here for support information.”
To enable FAM connections over the i.LINK
connector
Proceed as follows.
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.
The last accessed page appears.
Turn the MENU knob to scroll to the OUTPUT page,
then press the MENU knob.
The OUTPUT page appears. The current settings
appear on the right side of each item.
3
Move the b mark to “i.LINK MODE”, then press the
MENU knob.
The b mark changes to a z mark, and the z mark
changes to a ? mark.
6-2 File Access Mode File Operations
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
File data
U01 OUTPUT
TOP
Transfer of files
Laptop computer, etc.
LCD BRIGHT <L>
LCD BRIGHT <H>
LCD COLOR
:
:
:
0
0
0
PDW-510/510P/
530/530P
i.LINK MODE
:? AV/C
PB WIDE ID(IMX) : THROU
REAR BNC OUT SEL: VBS
LIVE LOGGING OFF
:
i.LINK cable (not supplied)
4
Turn the MENU knob to select FAM, then press the
MENU knob.
The setting is confirmed. The z mark changes to a b
mark and the ? mark changes to a z mark.
The message “Valid after power off.” appears if you
change this item.
Windows recognizes this unit as a removable disc, and
displays one of the following icons on the remote
computer’s task bar:
• Windows 2000:
• Windows XP:
5
6
Power the camcorder off, and then power it on again.
The remote computer is now able to perform file
operations when a disc is inserted into this unit.
The setting made in step 4 is enabled.
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF to end the
menu operation.
Note
You will not be able to log in if you put the unit into
the state described in step 1 after connecting the cable.
To log in, disconnect the cable, put the unit into the
state described in step 1, and connect it again.
6-2-1 Making FAM connections
Proceed as follows.
Operation limitations during FAM connections
• With the exception of the EJECT button, recording
buttons and playback control buttons are disabled.
• VDR of this unit cannot be controlled from devices
connected to the REMOTE connector (8-pin) and S400
(i.LINK) connector.
1
If there is a disc loaded in this unit, put the unit into the
following state.
• Recording, playback, search and other disc
operations: Stopped
• Disc access by DELETE LAST CLIP, DELETE
• There is no signal output from this unit while video is
being input to this unit from external equipment.
• Picture Cache function and Interval Rec function:
Off
6-2-2 Operating on files
• MENU ON/OFF switch: OFF
• Unsaved current clip list: Save or clear
Proceed as follows.
1
Start Explorer.
Check that a drive letter has been assigned to this unit.
(The drive letter will differ depending on the number
of other peripherals connected to the remote
computer.)
2
3
If this unit is connected to a remote computer by FTP,
Connect the i.LINK DV IN/OUT S400 connector on
this unit to the i.LINK (IEEE1394) connector on the
remote computer, using an i.LINK cable.
2
Use Explorer to perform file operations on the disc
loaded in this unit.
You can operate in the same way that you operate on
local drives and files on network computers.
104
6-2 File Access Mode File Operations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes
6-2-4 Reconnecting
• If you power this unit off during an FAM
connection, the data transferred thus far is discarded.
• All file operations are not possible for some types of
files.
To reconnect after exiting file operations, do one of the
following, depending on whether an i.LINK cable is
connected.
i.LINK cable is not connected: Connect this unit and a
remote computer with an i.LINK cable.
i.LINK cable is connected: Disconnect the i.LINK cable
from either this unit or the remote computer, wait for
at least 10 seconds, and then reconnect the
disconnected cable.
To eject discs from a remote computer
Right click the icon representing this unit in Explorer, and
select Eject from the menu which appears.
The unit is powered off and an i.LINK cable is
connected: Power the unit on.
6-2-3 Exiting file operations
To disable FAM connections
Proceed as follows.
Execute one of the procedures described in the previous
section “Reconnecting” to make a FAM connection
between this unit and the remote computer. To disable
FAM connections, set the menu item PC REMOTE to
“DSABL.”
Note
Do not disconnect the cable before performing steps 1 to 3.
1
Do one of the following on the
displayed in the remote computer’s taskbar.
or
icon
For more information about how to make this setting, see
• Double click.
• Right click, and select one of the following
commands from the menu which appears.
- Windows 2000: Unplug or eject hardware
- Windows XP: Safely Remove Hardware
• Windows 2000: The Unplug or Eject Hardware
dialog appears.
• Windows XP: The Safely Remove Hardware dialog
appears.
2
3
Select “Sony XDCAM PDW-530 (or 530p/510/510P)
IEEE 1394 SBP2 Device” and click Stop.
The Stop a Hardware device dialog appears.
Select “Sony XDCAM PDW-530 (or 530p/510/510P)
IEEE 1394 SBP2 Device” and click OK.
• Windows 2000: A confirmation message appears.
• Windows XP: “Sony XDCAM PDW-530 (or 530p/
510/510P) IEEE 1394 SBP2 Device” is deleted from
the Hardware devices list.
This unit can now resume normal operations. (The
limitations described in “Operation limitations during
4
Disconnect the i.LINK cable as required.
6-2 File Access Mode File Operations
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the documentation of the FTP client software on your
system.
6-3 FTP File Operations
To log in
File operations between this unit and a remote computer
can be carried out by the File Transfer Protocol (called
FTP below).
If this unit is connected to a remote computer with a FAM
connection, first exit file operations on the FAM
A CBK-NC01 Network Adaptor (option) is required to
enable file operations by FTP.
1
Load a disc into this unit and put the unit into the
following state.
• Recording, playback, serch, and other disc
operations: Stopped
For installation and use, see the Installation Manual
supplied with the CBK-NC01.
• Picture Cache function and Interval Rec function:
Off
Preparations
• MENU ON/OFF switch: OFF
• Unsaved current clip list: Save or clear
1
Connect the network connectors of this unit and a
remote computer with a network cable. Or connect this
unit to the network to which the remote computer is
connected.
Note
Login is not possible unless the unit is in the state
described above.
File data
Transfer of files
2
3
Start the command prompt.
PDW-510/510P/
530/530P
Laptop computer, etc.
Enter “ftp <SP> <IP address>,” and press the Enter
key. (<SP> refers to a space.)
For example, if the IP address of this unit is set to
192.168.001.010, enter “ftp 192.168.1.10.”
1)
Network cable (Cross cable, not supplied)
Refer to the Windows help for more information about
the FTP command.
1)To make connections to the LAN through a hub, use straight type
network cables (not supplied).
If the connection succeeds, you are prompted to enter
a user name.
2
3
Set the IP address and other network setting items for
this unit.
4
5
Enter the user name “admin” and press the Enter key.
For details, see 7-3-11 “Making Network Settings”
When the user name is verified, your are prompted to
enter a password.
If network settings have already been made
Check the IP address of this unit.
Enter the password and press the Enter key.
The password is set to “pdw-530 (or 510)” when the
unit is shipped from the factory.
Set the remote control switch to NETWORK.
The login is complete when the password is verified.
6-3-1 Making FTP connections
protocol supported by this unit.
FTP connections between this unit and a remote computer
can be made with either of the following.
• The command prompt
If the connection times out
• FTP client software
This unit terminates FTP connections if no command
is received within 90 seconds of the last command. If
this occurs, log out (see the next section) and repeat
steps 2 to 4.
This section explains how to use the command prompt. For
more information about using FTP client software, refer to
106
6-3 FTP File Operations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To log out
Note
If you power this unit off during an FTP connection,
the data transferred thus far is discarded.
To log out after finishing file operations, enter “QUIT” at
the command prompt and press the Enter key.
6-3-2 Command List
This unit supports standard protocol (see the next section),
• The commands supported by application software vary.
• An FTP client that supports UTF-8 is required to use
Unicode characters other than ASCII characters.
Command prompt FTP commands do not support
UTF-8.
Notes
• To execute FTP commands, you must install application
software such as PDZ-1 on your computer.
Standard commands
The following table shows the standard FTP commands
supported by this unit.
In the command syntax column, <SP> means a space,
entered by pressing the space bar, and <CRLF> means a
new line, entered by pressing the Enter key.
Command name
Description
Command syntax
USER
Send this command to begin the login USER <SP> <username> <CRLF>
process.
Input example: USER admin
PASS
QUIT
PORT
After sending the USER command,
send this command to complete the
login process.
PASS <SP> <password> <CRLF>
Input example: PASS pdw-530 (or 510)
Terminates the FTP connection. If a file QUIT <CRLF>
is being transferred, terminates after
completion of the transfer.
Specifies the IP address and port to
which this unit should connect for the
next file transfer (for data transfer from
this unit).
PORT <SP> <h1,h2,h3,h4,p1,p2> <CRLF>
• h1 (most significant byte) to h4 (least significant byte): IP
address
• p1 (most significant byte), p2 (least significant byte): Port
address
Input example: PORT 10,0,0,1,242,48
(IP address: 10.0.0.1, Port number: 62000)
PASV
This command requests this unit to
“listen” on a data port (which is not its
default data port). It puts this unit into
passive mode, waiting for the remote
computer to make a data connection.
PASV <CRLF>
6-3 FTP File Operations
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command name
Description
Command syntax
TYPE
Specifies the type of data to be
transferred.
TYPE <SP> <type-code (options delimited by <SP>)>
<CRLF>
<type-code> can be any of the following. However, for
XDCAM, data is always transferred as “I,” regardless of the
type-code specification.
• A: ASCII
- N: Non-print
- T: Telnet format
- C: ASA Carriage Control
• E: EBCDIC
- N: Non-print
- T: Telnet format
- C: ASA Carriage Control
• I: IMAGE (Binary) (default)
• L: LOCAL BYTE
- SIZE: byte size
Input example: TYPE I
STRU
MODE
LIST
Specifies the data structure.
STRU <SP> <structure-code> <CRLF>
<structure-code> can be any of the following. However, for
XDCAM, the structure is always “F,” regardless of the
structure-code specification.
• F: File structure (default)
• R: Record structure
• P: Page structure
Input example: STRU F
Specifies the transfer mode.
MODE <SP> <mode-code> <CRLF>
<mode-code> can be any of the following. However, for
XDCAM, the mode is always “S,” regardless of the mode-
code specification.
• S: Stream mode (default)
• B: Block mode
• C: Compressed mode
Input example: MODE S
Sends a list of files from this unit to the LIST <SP> <options> <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>
remote computer.
<options> can be any of the following.
• -a: Also display file names that begin with “.”
• -F: Append “/” to directory names.
The following data is transferred, depending on whether
<path-name> specifies a directory or file.
• Directory specified: A list of the files in the specified
directory
• File specified: Information about the specified file
• No specification: A list of the files in the current directory.
The wildcard characters “*” (any string) and “?” (any
character) may be used in <path-name>.
Input example 1: LIST -a Clip
Input example 2: LIST Clip/*.MXF
108
6-3 FTP File Operations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command name
Description
Command syntax
NLST
Sends a list of file names from this unit NLST <SP> <options or path-name> <CRLF>
to the remote computer, with no other
information.
The following options may be specified when no path name
is specified.
• -a: Also display file names that begin with “.”
• -l: Display information other than file name (gives the same
result as the LIST command).
• -F: Append “/” to directory names.
The following data is transferred, depending on whether
<path-name> specifies a directory or file.
• Directory specified: A list of the file names only in the
specified directory
• No specification: A list of the file names only in the current
directory.
The wildcard characters “*” (any string) and “?” (any
character) may be used in <path-name>.
Input example 1: NLST l
Input example 2: NLST Clip/*.MXF
RETR
STOR
Begins transfer of a copy of a file in the RETR <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>
specified path on this unit to the current
directory on the remote computer.
Input example: RETR Clip/C0001.MXF
Begins transfer of a copy of a file in the STOR <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>
specified path on the remote computer
to the current directory on this unit.
Depending on the type of file
transferred, the following items are
created.
Input example: STOR Edit/E0001E01.SMI
a) c)
• C*.MXF file
- C*M01.XML file (metadata)
- C*S01.MXF file (proxy AV data)
b) c)
• E*E01.SMI file
- E*M01.XML file (metadata)
a) *: 0001 to 0300
b) *: 0001 to 0099
c)With firmware version 1.5 and higher,
the unit can handle files with user-
defined names in the “C*” and “E*”
parts.
Notes
• For C*.MXF files, some data, such as
file header metadata, may be
missing.
• Depending on the transfer
destination directory and the file type,
transfer may not be possible.
• For C*.MXF files, the UMID of the
copy source file is not saved.
However, it is saved if an immediately
preceding SITE UMMD extended
command has been issued.
For details, see 6-1-2 “File Operation
6-3 FTP File Operations
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command name
Description
Command syntax
RNFR
RNTO
Rename a file. Specify the file to be
renamed with the RNFR command,
and specify the new name with the
RNTO command. (Always follow a
RNFR command with a RNTO
command.)
RNFR <SP> <path-name (before change)> <CRLF>
RNTO <SP> <path-name (after change)> <CRLF>
Input example: RNFR General/info.txt
RNTO General/clip_info.txt
DELE
STAT
Deletes the specified file on this unit.
DELE <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>
Input example: DELE Clip/C0099.MXF
Note
Depending on the directory and file
type, deletion may not be possible.
For details, see 6-1-2 “File Operation
Sends information about properties of STAT <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>
the specified file, or about data transfer
status, from this unit to the remote
computer.
The following property information is
sent, depending on the file type.
• MXF file
The following data is transferred, depending on whether a file
is specified with <path-name>.
• File specified: The properties of the specified file
• No specification: The size of the data transferred thus far
(unit: bytes)
- File name
- File type
Input example: STAT Clip/C0001.MXF
- CODEC type
- Frame rate
- Number of audio channels
- Duration
- UMID
• non-MXF file
- File name
ABOR
Requests this unit to abort a file
transfer currently in progress.
ABOR <CRLF>
SYST
HELP
Displays the system name of this unit. SYST <CRLF>
Displays a list of the commands
HELP <SP> <command-name> <CRLF>
supported by this unit, or an
explanation of the specified command. The following data is transferred, depending on whether a
command name is specified with <command-name>.
• Command name specified: Explanation of the specified
command.
• No specification: Command list
Input example: HELP RETR
NOOP
Does nothing except return a response. NOOP <CRLF>
(Used to check whether this unit is
running.)
PWD
CWD
Displays the current directory (“/” if the PWD <CRLF>
directory is the root directory).
Changes the current directory (moves CWD <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>
from the current directory to another
directory).
Moves to a directory as follows, depending on whether a
directory is specified with <path-name>.
• Directory specified: To the specified directory
• No specification: To the root directory
Input example: CWD General
CDUP <CRLF>
CDUP
Moves one level up in the directory
structure (makes the parent of the
current directory be the current
directory).
110
6-3 FTP File Operations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command name
Description
Command syntax
MKD
Creates a new directory.
MKD <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>
Note
Directories can be created only in the
General directory.
For details, see 6-1-2 “File Operation
RMD
Deletes a directory.
RMD <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>
Note
Directories can be deleted only in the
General directory.
For details, see 6-1-2 “File Operation
Extended commands
The following table shows the extended FTP commands
supported by this unit.
In the command syntax column, <SP> means a space,
entered by pressing the space bar, and <CRLF> means a
new line, entered by pressing the Enter key.
Command name
Description
Command syntax
SITE REPF
Sends an MXF file from the specified
path on this unit to the remote
SITE REPF <SP> <path-name> <SP> <start-frame> <SP>
<transfer-size> <CRLF>
computer. This command allows you to
specify a segment in the body of the
<path-name> specifies the path name of the file to transfer.
MXF file (composed of video and audio Enclose the path name in double quotation marks.
data), for transfer of the required
segment only.
<start-frame> specifies an offset from the start of the file.
Data is transferred from the video frame at the offset (the first
frame is 0).
<transfer-size> specifies the number of video frames to
transfer (specify 0 to transfer to the end of the file).
Notes
• A segment greater than the file size
cannot be specified.
• This command cannot be used when
the path names contains a space.
Use the SITE REPFL command
instead.
Input example: SITE REPF Clip/C0001.MXF 5 150 (Transfer
C0001.MXF. Body data is transferred only from frame 6 to
frame 155.)
a)
Sends an MXF file from the specified
path on this unit to the remote
SITE REPFL <SP> “<path-name>” <SP> <start-frame>
<SP> <transfer-size> <CRLF>
SITE REPFL
computer. This command allows you to
specify a segment in the body of the
<path-name> specifies the path name of the file to transfer.
MXF file (composed of video and audio Enclose the path name in double quotation marks.
data), for transfer of the required
segment only.
<start-frame> specifies an offset from the start of the file.
Data is transferred from the video frame at the offset (the first
frame is 0).
<transfer-size> specifies the number of video frames to
transfer (specify 0 to transfer to the end of the file).
Notes
• A segment greater than the file size
cannot be specified.
• This command cannot be used when
the path names contains a space.
Use the SITE REPFL command
instead.
Input example: SITE REPFL “Clip/sakura 0001.MXF” 5 150
(Transfer sakura 0001.MXF. Body data is transferred only
from frame 6 to frame 155.)
SITE FSTS
Acquires the system status of this unit. SITE FSTS <CRLF>
One of the following status codes is
sent.
0: Initial state, or no disc is loaded.
1: File system mount is OK.
3: File system mount is not OK.
6-3 FTP File Operations
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command name
Description
Command syntax
SITE MEID
Acquires the media ID of the disc
loaded in this unit.
SITE MEID <CRLF>
SITE FUNC
Acquires the function and version of the SITE FUNC <CRLF>
expanded commands.
Information is sent in the following
format.
<main function> <SP> <branch
function> <SP> <branch function
version>
For XDCAM, sent in a format like “200
MXF DISK 1” (200 is a response code).
SITE UMMD
When C*.MXF file is sent with the
STOR, the copy source UMID is saved
if this command is invoked immediately
before the STOR command.
SITE UMMD <CRLF>
a)
Acquires the amount of free disc space. SITE <SP> DF <CRLF>
SITE DF
a)
Locks and unlocks clips. Also sets
permissions for directories and files in Specify one of the following values in <flag>, according to
SITE CHMOD <SP> <flag> <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>
SITE CHMOD
the General directory.
the specification in <path-name>.
• When a clip is specified in <path-name>:
444: Lock.
666: Unlock.
• When a directory in the General directory is specified in
<path-name>:
555: Forbid writing to the directory.
777: Allow writing to the directory.
• When a file in the General directory is specified in <path-
name>:
444: Forbid writing to and execution of the file.
555: Forbid writing to the file, but allow execution.
666: Allow writing to the file, but forbid execution.
777: Allow writing to and execution of the file.
Input example: SITE CHMOD 444 Clip/C0001.MXF (Lock
clip C0001.MXF)
a) This is supported from firmware version 1.5.
112
6-3 FTP File Operations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-4 Recording
Continuous Time
Code With FAM and
1)
FTP Connections
1) This is supported from firmware version 1.4.
When you are connected to the unit by FAM or FTP, you
can create new clips with time code that is continuous with
the time code of the last frame of the last clip on the disc.
To record continuous time code, set PRESET/REGEN/
CLOCK switch to “REGEN,” and then proceed as follows.
FAM connection
Write clip files to the unit from the computer or other
device that is connected to this unit.
FTP connection
Use the “STOR” command to transfer clip files from the
computer that is connected to this unit. If you issue the
“SITE UMMD” command immediately before the
“STOR” command, the original time code of the
transferred file is recorded, regardless of the setting of
PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch.
6-4 Recording Continuous Time Code With FAM and FTP Connections
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
113
Menu Displays and
Detailed Settings
7
Chapter
For details of customizing the USER menu, see 7-1-4
7-1 Menu Organization
and Operation
TOP menu
The TOP menu consists of the following submenus.
<TOP MENU>
7-1-1 Menu Organization
USER
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE
ALL
The following shows the organization of menus that you
can use to make various settings and adjustments.
OPERATION
PAINT
MAINTENANCE
FILE
DIAGNOSIS
TOP MENU
USER
00.CONTENTS
01.OUTPUT
The USER menu consists of
the pages shown on the right.
If required, you can add,
When you select an item in the TOP menu, this displays
the most recently shown page of the corresponding
submenu. When the submenu is selected for the first time,
the 00 CONTENTS page appears.
02.TEST OUT
03.FUNCTION 1
04.VF DISP 1
05.VF DISP 2
06.'!'LED
delete, or rearrange pages
1)
(USER menu customization).
In this case the number, for
example, 01, also changes.
07.MARKER 1
08.GAIN SW
09.VF SETTING
10.AUTO IRIS
11.SHOT ID
Submenus selected in the TOP menu
These are the following menus.
• USER menu:
This menu includes monitor output settings, viewfinder
settings, and commonly used functions. This menu is
normally displayed when the MENU ON/OFF switch is
changed to ON.
12.SHOT DISP
13.SET STATUS
14.LENS FILE
15.USER FILE
This menu used to
add or delete pages in
the USER group.
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE
ALL
• USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu:
This menu allows you to add pages to or delete pages from
the USER menu to suit your needs.
• Each menu consists of pages 00
CONTENTS, 01 xxx, 02 xxx, and
so on.
• You can select the desired items
from these menus to create new
pages, which you can add to the
USER menu.
OPERATION
PAINT
• ALL menu:
MAINTENANCE
FILE
This menu contains all items of the OPERATION menu,
PAINT menu, MAINTENANCE menu, FILE menu and
DIAGNOSIS menu.
DIAGNOSIS
1) In this manual, the USER menu consisting of items and pages registered
at the factory is used.
114
7-1 Menu Organization and Operation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• OPERATION menu:
Displaying menus on the color LCD
With the camcorder powered on, proceed as follows.
This menu contains items for changing settings according
to conditions related to the subject when the camcorder is
being operated.
1
2
Open the cover of the menu operating section, and set
the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.
• PAINT menu
This menu contains items for making detailed image
adjustments while using a waveform monitor to monitor
the waveforms output by the camera. Support of a video
engineer is usually required to use this menu. Although
you can also use an external remote control panel or master
setup unit to set the items on this menu, this menu is
effective when using the camcorder by itself outdoors.
Set the DISP SEL switch at the lower left of the color
LCD to CHAR.
This displays menus on the color LCD.
In the remainder of this section, the viewfinder display is
generally shown as an example menu display, but the
display on the color LCD is similar.
• MAINTENANCE menu
This menu contains items for performing camera
maintenance operations, such as changing the VDR
system or using infrequently used “paint” items.
7-1-3 Basic Menu Operations
When you open the cover of the menu operating section,
the MENU ON/OFF switch appears. If the MENU ON/
OFF switch is set to ON, the USER menu is displayed on
the screen. Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU
ON/OFF switch to OFF.
• FILE menu
This menu is for performing file operations, such as
writing the reference file.
• DIAGNOSIS menu
This menu enables you to confirm the VDR status or
identify a failed circuit board.
7-1-2 Displaying Menus
The camcorder can display menus both on the viewfinder
screen and on the color LCD.
Viewfinder
CANCEL/PRST /
ESCAPE switch
MENU ON/OFF
switch
ColorLCD
DISP SEL
switch
Cover of the menu
MENU knob
operating section
The MENU ON/OFF switch
is inside the cover.
Controls used for the basic use of the menu oerations
POWER switch
Displaying the TOP menu
Hold down the MENU button, and move the MENU ON/
OFF switch from the OFF to the ON position.
Displaying menus on the viewfinder screen
When the camcorder is powered on, open the cover of the
menu operating section, and set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to the ON position.
This displays menus on the viewfinder screen, regardless
of the ON/OFF setting of the viewfinder DISPLAY
switch.
Note
Depending on the internal switch settings, display of the
TOP menu may be disabled.
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
7-1 Menu Organization and Operation
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
3
Turn the MENU knob until the desired page appears.
Press the MENU knob.
Returning to the TOP menu from other
menus
There are two methods.
• Align the b mark with “TOP” at the top right of the
menu page, and press the MENU knob.
• Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch down to the
ESCAPE position repeatedly until the TOP menu
appears.
A b mark appears on the left of the item currently
selected on the page.
U08 GAIN SW
TOP
GAIN LOW
GAIN MID
GAIN HIGH
GAIN TURBO
:
:
:
:
0db
9db
18db
42db
Menu operations in the USER menu
TURBO SW IND.
:
OFF
This section explains operations on the USER menu. But
the operations are the same as those on menus other than
the USER menu. Also, if the optional extension boards are
not installed in your camcorder, some items on the USER
menu pages are not displayed. But the operations are the
same as those on the menus other than the USER menu.
To carry out menu operations in the USER menu, proceed
as follows.
4
5
Turn the move MENU knob to move the b mark to the
desired item.
• Turning the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen
from the front of the camera moves the b mark up
continuously.
• Turning the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the
front of the camera moves the b mark down
continuously.
1
Switch the MENU ON/OFF switch from OFF to ON.
The USER menu normally appears. If it does not, in
the TOP menu select USER, and press the MENU
knob.
Press the MENU knob.
U03 FUNCTION1
TOP
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting
changes to a ? mark.
ASSIGN SW <1>
ASSIGN SW <2>
ASSIGN SW <3>
ASSIGN SW <4>
TURBO SW
:
:
:
:
:
:
ATW
OFF
OFF
OFF
TURBO
DF
OFF
DF/NDF
CACHE/INTVAL REC:
U08 GAIN SW
TOP
GAIN LOW
GAIN MID
GAIN HIGH
GAIN TURBO
:
:
0db
9db
:? 18db
:
42db
TURBO SW IND.
:
OFF
(For the PDW-530P/510P, the DF/NDF item is not
included.)
If the USER menu has been used before, the last
accessed page appears. In this case, go to step 2.
If this is the first time the USER menu has been
displayed, the CONTENTS page of the USER menu
appears. In this case, follow the procedure below.
6
Turn the MENU knob to change the setting.
Before going to the next step, you can cancel a change
or return to the standard settings. For this operation,
see the next item “To cancel a change or return to the
1 Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the
desired page number.
To interrupt changing the settings
This indicates that
the menu screen
can be scrolled.
By setting the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF, the
menu disappears from the screen. By setting the
MENU ON/OFF switch to ON again, the values that
were displayed when you interrupted the setting
operations will reappear so you can continue making
settings.
U00 CONTENTS
TOP
01.OUTPUT
02.TEST OUT
03.FUNCTION 1
04.VF DISP 1
05.VF DISP 2
06.'!'LED
07.MARKER 1
08.GAIN SW
09.VF SETTING
10.AUTO IRIS
b mark
7
Press the MENU knob.
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark. The setting is confirmed.
2 Press the MENU knob.
The selected page is displayed. Go to step 4.
116
7-1 Menu Organization and Operation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
To continue setting other items in the same page,
repeat steps from 4 to 7.
• Close the cover of the menu operating section. When
you close the cover, the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to
OFF automatically.
The menu disappears from the screen, and the display
indicating the current status of the camcorder appears
along the top and bottom of the screen (when the
viewfinder DISPLAY switch is set to ON or the VF DISP
item on the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu is set to
“ON”).
To cancel a change or return to the standard
settings
Proceed as follows.
1
Before pressing the MENU button in step 7 of the
above procedure, push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE
switch up to the CANCEL/PRST position.
Under the page name, a message “CANCEL DATA
OK?” appears.
2
3
Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch up to the
CANCEL/PRST position once more.
7-1-4 Editing the USER Menu
The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to
configure a USER menu that consists only of pages and
items that you need by adding, deleting or replacing the
pages.
A message “CANCEL DATA” appears to indicate that
the change has been cancelled.
To return to the standard settings, push the CANCEL/
PRST / ESCAPE switch up to the CANCEL/PRST
position.
Adding a new page
The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to add
a new page to the USER menu.
A message “PRESET DATA OK?” appears on the
screen.
While the EDIT page contains factory-preset items, the
USER 1 EDIT to USER 19 EDIT pages and the ASSIGN
SEL EDIT page are all blank in their initial state. You can
register up to 10 items, including blank lines, on each of
these pages.
4
Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch up to the
CANCEL/PRST position once more.
This returns to the standard settings.
To add a new page, proceed as follows.
Depending on the setting item, in some cases only the
function to return to the standard setting is valid. Check
this for each individual item.
1
2
While holding down the MENU knob, move the
MENU ON/OFF switch from the OFF position to the
ON position.
To move to another page
Proceed as follows.
The TOP menu appears.
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “USER
MENU CUSTOMIZE”, then press the MENU knob.
1
Turn the MENU knob to move the b arrow to the page
number, then press the MENU knob.
If this is the first time the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE
menu has been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the
menu appears.
If the b mark is placed at a position other than the page
number, push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch
to ESCAPE.
A ? mark appears in front of the page number. The
camcorder is now in page selecting mode.
U00 CONTENTS
TOP
01.EDIT PAGE
02.USER 1
03.USER 2
04.USER 3
05.USER 4
06.USER 5
07.USER 6
08.USER 7
09.USER 8
10.USER 9
EDIT
EDIT
EDIT
EDIT
EDIT
EDIT
EDIT
EDIT
EDIT
2
3
Turn the MENU knob until the desired page appears.
Press the MENU knob when the desired page appears.
To end menu operations
You can end menu operations using the following two
methods:
• Turn the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.
If the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu has been
used before, the last accessed page appears.
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU
knob to move the b mark to one of USER 1 EDIT to
7-1 Menu Organization and Operation
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USER 19 EDIT and ASSIGN SEL EDIT, then press
the MENU knob to display the page.
You can add up to 10 items on one page.
Deleting items from a page by using the CANCEL/
PRST / ESCAPE switch
You can delete items from any of the USER 1 EDIT to
USER 19 EDIT pages. Proceed as follows.
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob
until the desired page appears, then press the MENU
knob to select the page.
Example: When you select the USER 2 EDIT page
1
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item
to be deleted.
U03 USER 2 EDIT
TOP
Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to
CANCEL/PRST.
The message “PRESET DATA OK?” appears.
3
Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to
CANCEL/PRST again.
The item is deleted.
4
Move the b mark to the item to be added (this
operation is unnecessary, if no item exists on the page
as shown in the figure for step 3), then press the
MENU knob.
Deleting items from a page by using the menu
Proceed as follows.
1
2
Move the b mark to the item to be deleted, and press
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
the MENU knob.
EDIT FUNCTION
INSERT
MOVE
ESC
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
Select “DELETE”, and press the MENU knob.
DELETE
BLANK
The previously displayed page appears again, and the
message “DELETE OK? Yes b No” appears at the
upper right.
3
To delete, turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to
5
Move the b mark to “INSERT”, and press the MENU
“YES”, and press the MENU knob.
knob.
Replacing items on a page
You can replace the items on any of the USER 1 EDIT to
USER 5 EDIT pages. Proceed as follows.
The page for the last added item appears.
P25 BLACK/FLARE
ESC
MASTER BLACK
R GLACK
B BLACK
MASTER FLARE
R FLARE
G FLARE
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ON
1
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item
to be replaced, then press the MENU knob.
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
B FLARE
FLARE
TEST OUT SELECT :
ENC
2
3
Select MOVE, then press the MENU knob.
The previously displayed page appears again.
6
7
Add the items.
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the
position where you want to move the item, then press
the MENU knob.
1 Turn the MENU knob until the page that has the
desired items appears, then press the MENU knob.
2 Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the
desired item, then press the MENU knob.
The USER P2 EDIT page appears again,
displaying the newly added item.
Add the remaining items by repeating steps 4 to 6.
118
7-1 Menu Organization and Operation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob
until the EDIT PAGE screen appears, then press the
MENU knob to select the page.
E02 USER 1 EDIT
WHITE<B>CH
TOP
AWB
OFF
:
:
TEST OUT MENU
E01 EDIT PAGE
TOP
OFFSET WHITE <A>:
OFF
3200
0
WARM COOL
COLOR FINE
MASTER BLACK
<A>:
<A>:
:
01.OUTPUT
02.TEST OUT
03.FUNCTION 1
04.VF DISP 1
05.VF DISP 2
06.'!'LED
0
07.MARKER 1
08.GAIN SW
09.VF SETTING
10.AUTO IRIS
The item selected in step 1 moves to the position that
you selected in step 3.
In the above example, “MASTER BLACK” is moved
to the top and the other items are moved down one line.
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to where
you want to add the page, then press the MENU knob.
Inserting a blank line
You can insert a blank line above the selected item.
Proceed as follows.
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
EDIT FUNCTION
INSERT
MOVE
DELETE
BLANK
ESC
1
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item
above which you want to insert a blank line.
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
2
Select “BLANK”, and press the MENU knob.
The previously displayed page appears again, and a
blank line is inserted above the specified item.
5
6
Select INSERT, and press the MENU knob.
The selection screen appears.
Note
You cannot insert a blank line on a page where 10 items
have already been registered.
CONTENTS
ESC
01.USER PAGE 1
02.USER PAGE 2
03.USER PAGE 3
04.USER PAGE 4
05.USER PAGE 5
06.USER PAGE 6
07.USER PAGE 7
08.USER PAGE 8
09.USER PAGE 9
Adding/deleting/replacing pages
You can add a new page to the USER menu, delete a page
from the USER menu or replace pages, using the EDIT
PAGE of the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu.
To add a page
Proceed as follows.
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the
desired page, then press the MENU knob.
1
While holding down the MENU knob, move the
MENU ON/OFF switch from the OFF position to the
ON position.
This adds the number and name of the selected page
above the item selected in step 4.
The TOP menu appears.
To cancel adding a page
Before pressing the MENU knob in step 6, turn the MENU
knob to move the b mark to “ESC” at the top right of the
screen, then press the MENU knob.
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “USER
MENU CUSTOMIZE”, then press the MENU knob.
The EDIT PAGE screen appears again.
If this is the first time the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE
menu has been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the
menu appears. If the menu has been used before, the
last accessed page appears.
To delete a page by using the CANCEL/PRST /
ESCAPE switch
Proceed as follows.
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU
knob to move the b mark to “EDIT PAGE”, then press
the MENU knob to display the EDIT PAGE screen.
1
Open the EDIT PAGE and turn the MENU knob to
move the b mark to the page to be deleted.
7-1 Menu Organization and Operation
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
3
Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to
CANCEL/PRST.
E01 EDIT PAGE
PUSH TO PAGE INSERT
01.OUTPUT
02.TEST OUT
03.FUNCTION 1
04.VF DISP 1
05.'!'LED
06.MARKER 1
07.GAIN SW
08.VF SETTING
09.AUTO IRIS
The message “PRESET DATA OK?” appears.
E01 EDIT PAGE
DELETE PAGE OK ?
01.OUTPUT
02.TEST OUT
03.FUNCTION 1
04.VF DISP 1
05.VF DISP 2
06.'!'LED
07.MARKER 1
08.GAIN SW
09.VF SETTING
10.AUTO IRIS
4
Press the MENU knob.
The page selected in step 1 is moved to the position
selected in step 3.
In the above example,”AUTO IRIS” moves to the
“04” position and the “VF DISP 1” and following
items move down one line.
Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to
CANCEL/PRST again.
In the above example, the VF DISP 2 page is deleted.
To delete a page by using the menu
Proceed as follows.
1
2
3
On the EDIT PAGE screen of the USER MENU
CUSTOMIZE menu, move the b mark to the page to
be deleted, and press the MENU knob.
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
Select DELETE, and press the MENU knob.
The previously displayed page appears again, and the
message “DELETE PAGE OK?” appears at the upper
right.
To delete, turn the menu knob to move the b mark to
“YES”, and press the MENU knob.
To move a page
Proceed as follows.
1
Display the EDIT PAGE screen of the USER MENU
CUSTOMIZE menu. Turn the MENU knob to move
the b mark to the page that you want to move.
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
2
3
Select MOVE, then press the MENU knob.
The EDIT PAGE screen appears again.
Turn MENU knob to move the b mark to the position
to where you want to move the page selected in step 1.
120
7-1 Menu Organization and Operation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
b Zoom position
This indicator appears only when you use a lens that has a
7-2 Status Display on
the Viewfinder
Screen
zoom position display function. It indicates the
1)
approximate position of the variator of the zoom lens,
between wide angle and telephoto.
1) Variator
A group of lenses that are moved to adjust the focal length.
The viewfinder screen displays not only the video picture
but also characters and messages indicating the camcorder
settings and operating status, a center marker, a safety zone
marker, etc.
When the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to OFF and the
DISPLAY switch is set to ON, the items for which an
“ON” setting was made in the VF DISP1 page of the
USER menu or with related switches are displayed at the
top and bottom of the screen. The messages that give
details of the settings and adjustment progress and results
can also be made to appear for about 3 seconds while
settings are being changed, during adjustment, and after
adjustment.
c Color temperature
This indicates the currently selected color temperature.
d UHF wireless microphone reception level
This indicates reception level of the wireless microphone
when the UHF wireless microphone is attached, using four
x which appear at the right of “W”. When four x are lit,
the receiving condition is good.
e DC IN / battery voltage or remaining capacity
This shows the battery voltage or remaining capacity of an
internal battery pack.
When the power is supplied from an AC adaptor connected
to the DC IN connector, “DC IN” appears.
When the DISP BATT REMAIN item is set to “INT” on
the VF DISP 2 page of the USER menu, the battery voltage
is not indicated. However, when the Anton Bauer
intelligent battery system or the BP-GL65/GL95 battery
pack is used, the remaining battery capacity is
automatically detected and indicated as a percentage even
when the DISP BATT REMAIN item is set to “OFF”. The
indicated value changes in steps of 10 %.
For information about the display item selection, ssee 7-2-
information about setting change and adjustment progress
• Until the remaining battery capacity is reduced to 40 %,
the indications MAX, 90 %, 80 %...40 % are displayed
for three seconds in the viewfinder each time the
remaining battery capacity reduces by 10 %.
7-2-1 Layout of the Status Display
on the Viewfinder Screen
All items that can be displayed on the viewfinder screen
are shown below.
• When the remaining battery capacity is less than 40 %,
the indication is displayed all the time.
1)
• When the remaining battery capacity is less than 10 % ,
the the indication flashes. When the remaining battery
capacity is reduced further, the LOW indication flashes.
16:9
PDW-530
EM
1) This value can be set to either 10 % or 20 % on the FUNCTION 2 page of
the OPERATION menu.
#30001
f 16:9 mode recording indicator
This indicates recording in the 16:9 mode. This indicator is
recorded together with the color bars.
D5600
IMX50
g Setting change and adjustment progress message
display area
6, qj, qk, ql and wa appear only when color bars are displayed.
Status display on the viewfinder
h Operation/error message display area
a Extender
“EX” is displayed when a lens extender is used.
For details, see “Operation/error messages” on page 175.
7-2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i Iris setting/auto iris override
1F to 8F, 16F: Number of frames in SLS mode
This indicates the f-stop (iris setting) of the lens.
Also, the auto iris override is displayed using bars which
appear in the upper and lower parts to the left of the F
number respectively.
m Gain
This indicates the gain of the video amplifier, as set by the
GAIN selector.
For details, see “Changing the reference value” on page
91.
n White balance memory
This indicates the currently selected white balance
automatic adjustment memory.
j Remaining disc capacity
This indicator indicates the remaining disc recording time
(in minutes) of the VDR.
A: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to A.
B: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to B.
P: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST
or when the preset button on the RM-B150 has been
pushed.
Examples of remaining disc recording time indication
T: Displayed when ATW is being used.
Indication
F - 30
Remaining disc recording time
Full to 30 minutes
30 to 25 minutes
25 to 20 minutes
20 to 15 minutes
15 to 10 minutes
10 to 5 minutes
5 to 4 minutes
o Filter
30 - 25
This indicates the currently selected filter types.
25 - 20
p Time code
This indicates the time code, user bits or other information
selected by the DISPLAY switch.
20 - 15
15 - 10
10 - 5
q ID number
5 MIN
This indicates the ID number selected from ID 1 to ID 4.
The ID number is recorded together with the color bars.
4 MIN
4 to 3 minutes
3 MIN
3 to 2 minutes
2 MIN
2 to 1 minutes
r Date and time
This indicates the date and time of recording, which are
recorded together with the color bars.
1 (flashing)
0 MIN (flashing)
1 to 0 minutes
0 minutes
s Model name and serial number
This indicates the model name and serial number of the
camcorder, which are recorded together with the color
bars.
k Audio level
These indicate the level of audio channel 1 and channel 2.
The peak indication of the VDR level meter is related as
follows to the audio level when an 1-kHz sine wave is
input.
t 16:9/4:3 mode
“16:9” or “4:3” is displayed depending on the currently
selected aspect ratio.
Audio channel 1
level indicator
Audio channel 2
level indicator
u *
VDR level meter
indicator
This flashes when the color bars are displayed and is
recorded together with the color bars
v Recording format
This indicates the current recording format.
l Shutter speed
This indicates the shutter speed or the shutter mode.
However, if the SHUTTER selector is set to OFF, nothing
is displayed.
1/100 (PDW-510/530) or 1/60 (PDW-510P/530P), 1/125,
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000: Shutter speed (in
seconds) in standard mode (scan mode:I)
1/40, 1/60, 1/120 (PDW-510/530) or 1/33, 1/50, 1/100
(PDW-510P/530P), 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/
2000: Shutter speed (in seconds) in standard mode
(scan mode:PsF)
w D5600 indication
This appears when the electric 5600 K color temperature
filter function is on.
x EM indicator
This appears when essence marks are recorded on the disc.
For details, see 3-2-3 “Recording Essence Marks” (page
42).
ECS: ECS mode
EVS: EVS mode
122
7-2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Description
7-2-2 Selecting the Display Items
DISP SHUTTER
Shutter speed and ECS mode
indicator
To select the items to be displayed on the viewfinder
screen from the VF DISP 1 and VF DISP 2 pages of the
USER menu, turn on or off the indication next to each
item.
DISP AUDIO
DISP DISC
DISP IRIS
Audio level indicator
Remaining disc capacity indicator
Iris opening indicator
To select the items to be displayed on the viewfinder
screen, proceed as follows.
1) The viewfinder display can be also turned on or off by using the DISPLAY
switch on the viewfinder.
2) For detailed information on the display mode, see 7-2-3 “Display Modes
VF DISP 2 page
Item
Description
CANCEL/PRST /
ESCAPE switch
DISP ZOOM
Zoom position indicator
Displays the color temperature.
DISP COLOR
TEMP.
MENU knob
MENU ON/OFF switch
DISP BATT
REMAIN
Displays the battery voltage/
1)
remaining capacity of an internal
battery pack or an external battery
connected to the DC IN connector.
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.
DISP DC IN
Displayed when the power is supplied
from an external battery connected to
the DC IN connector.
The last accessed menu page appears on the
viewfinder screen.
DISP 16:9/4:3 ID
Displays the 16:9/4:3 mode indicator.
DISP WRR RF LVL Displays the reception level of the
wireless microphone.
Turn the MENU knob until the VF DISP 1 or VF DISP
2 page appears, and press the MENU knob to select the
page.
DISP TIME CODE
Displays the time code.
DISP REC FORMAT Displays the recording format.
1) When an Anton Bauer battery system or a BP-GL65/GL95 battery pack is
installed, the remaining battery power is shown as a percentage value (%)
according to the setting of this item.
INT: When one of the above batteries is installed, the remaining power is
shown as a percentage value (%) when there is a change in the value
or when the power is low.
AUTO: The remaining power is shown as a percentage value (%) when
one of the above batteries is installed. Otherwise the voltage (VOLT)
is displayed continuously.
U04 VF DISP 1
VF DISP
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
ON
3
VF DISP MODE
DISP EXTENDER
DISP FILTER
DISP WHITE
DISP GAIN
DISP SHUTTER
DISP AUDIO
DISP DISC
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
DISP IRIS
VOLT: The voltage (VOLT) is displayed continuously.
VF DISP 1 page
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item
you want to set, and press the MENU knob.
You can select the following items to be displayed on
the screen on the VF DISP 1 or VF DISP 2 page.
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting
changes to a ? mark.
VF DISP 1 page
Item
Description
Turn the MENU knob to select whether the selected
item should appear in the viewfinder display (the
“ON” setting), or not appear (the “OFF” setting), and
press the MENU knob.
VF DISP
Turning on or off the viewfinder
1)
display
2)
VF DISPLAY MODE
Selecting the display mode
DISP EXTENDER
DISP FILTER
DISP WHITE
DISP GAIN
Extender indicator
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark.
Types of the ND filter
White balance memory indicator
Gain indicator
Note that pressing the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE
switch to CANCEL/PRST on this page has no effect.
7-2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
6
To set another item to “ON” or “OFF”, repeat steps 3
and 4.
Changing the display mode
The currently set display mode appears on the VF DISP 1
page of the USER menu. To change it, proceed as follows.
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating
section.
1
USER menu appears on the screen.
7-2-3 Display Modes and Setting
Change Confirmation/
Adjustment Progress
Messages
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “VF
DISPLAY MODE”, and press the MENU knob.
The b mark on the left of “VF DISPLAY MODE”
changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the
setting changes to a ? mark.
You can limit or suppress the messages that give details of
setting changes and adjustment progress and results by
setting a display mode.
The conditions under which messages are displayed and
their correspondence with the display mode are as follows:
3
4
Turn the MENU knob until the desired display mode
appears, and press the MENU knob.
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark.
Setting change confirmation/adjustment progress messages
and display modes
Y: Message is displayed.
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating
section.
N: Message is not displayed.
Message
display
condition
Message
Display
mode
setting
7-2-4 Setting the Marker Display
1
2
3
Use the MARKER 1 page of the USER menu to switch the
display of the center and safety zone markers on or off and
to select whether the area indicated by the safety zone
marker is 80%, 90% or 100% of the screen area.
When the filter
selection has
been changed
ND : n, CC : m (where n =
1, 2, 3, 4, m = A, B, C, D)
N
N
Y
When the gain
setting has been 0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB,12dB,
changed
GAIN : n (where n = -3dB,
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
18dB, 24dB, 30dB, 36dB,
42dB, 48dB)
When the
WHITE : n (where n = A
CH, B CH, PRESET) or
ATW : RUN
setting of the
WHITE BAL
switch has been
changed
CANCEL/PRST /
ESCAPE switch
When the
DCC : ON (or OFF)
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
OUTPUT/DCC
selector has
been set to DCC
ON or OFF
MENU knob
MENU ON/OFF switch
When the
shutter speed
and mode
SS : 1/100 (PDW-510/530)
or 1/60 (PDW-510P/530P)
(or 1/125, 1/250, 1/500,
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.
The last accessed menu page appears on the screen.
setting has been 1/1000, 1/2000,ECS, SLS)
1)
changed
Turn the MENU knob until the MARKER 1 page
appears, and press the MENU knob to select the page.
When the black E.g. WHITE : OK
or white balance
has been
N
Y
Y
adjusted
1) This is also displayed for about 3 seconds when the SHUTTER selector is
set to ON.
124
7-2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-2-5 Setting the Viewfinder
U07 MARKER 1
MARKER
TOP
OFF
:
Use the VF SETTING page of the USER menu to select
items related to the viewfinder.
CENTER
:
:
:
:
:
:
OFF
OFF
90%
OFF
4:3
OFF
1/4
OFF
SAFETY ZONE
SAFETY AREA
ASPECT
ASPECT SELECT
ASPECT MASK
ASPECT MASK LVL :
100% MARKER
:
You can set the following items on the MARKER 1
page.
CANCEL/PRST /
ESCAPE switch
Item
Description
MENU knob
MENU ON/OFF switch
MARKER
Not to display all markers, set to OFF.
To display the center marker, set to ON.
To display the safety zone, set to ON.
CENTER
SAFETY ZONE
SAFETY AREA
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.
To select the safety zone range (80%,
90%, 92.5 % or 95 %), when SAFETY
ZONE is set to ON.
The last accessed menu page appears on the screen.
ASPECT
To display the aspect marker, set to ON.
To select the type of the aspect marker.
Turn the MENU knob until the VF SETTING page
appears, and press the MENU knob to select the page.
ASPECT
SELECT
ASPECT MASK
(4:3)
To make the areas out of the selected
aspect marker dimmer, set to ON.
1)
U09 VF SETTING
ZEBRA
ZEBRA SELECT
:
:
OFF
1
ASPECT MASK
LVL
To set the mask level (1/2, 1/4 or 1/8),
when the ASPECT MASK is set to ON.
ZEBRA1 DET.LEVEL:
ZEBRA1 APT.LEVEL:
ZEBRA2 DET.LEVEL:
70%
10%
100%
100 % MARKER To display the effective pixel area, set to
ON.
VF DETAIL LEVEL :
OFF
VF ASPECT
:
AUTO
1) The ASPECT MASK item is for processing the signal to be output to the
viewfinder. When R, G, or B is selected for the TEST OUT SELECT item
from the menu, the same video signal is output to the viewfinder and the
TEST OUT connector. Thus, when the ASPECT MASK (4:3) item is set
to “ON” with R/G/B selected, the masked video signal is output to the
TEST OUT connector.
Item
Description
Turns the zebra display on or off.
Selects ZEBRA 1, ZEBRA 2 or BOTH.
1)
ZEBRA
ZEBRA SELECT
3
Perform the settings for each item.
ZEBRA 1 DET. LVL Adjusts the level of the zebra 1 (70%)
display.
1 Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the
item you want to set, and press MENU knob.
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes
to the z mark and the z mark on the left of the
setting changes to a ? mark.
ZEBRA 1 APT. LVL Adjusts the aperture level of the zebra
1 display. (1 to 10 to 20)
ZEBRA 2 DET. LVL Adjusts the level of the zebra 2 (100%)
display.
VF DETAIL LEVEL Adjusts the sharpness of the
2 Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and
press the MENU knob.
2)
viewfinder (–99 to 0 to 99).
Turns the VF detail function on or off
and adjusts the level.
The zmark on the left of the selected item changes
to a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting
changes to a z mark.
VF ASPECT
Selects the viewfinder aspect ratio.
(AUTO/16:9)
3)
4
5
To continue setting other items, repeat step 3.
1) When you use the viewfinder which is not equipped with the ZEBRA
switch, turns the display on or off using this item. When you use the
viewfinder with the ZEBRA switch, the most recent operation of the
ZEBRA switch and this menu operation is effective.
2) The sharpness setting at the viewfinder does not affect the recorded image.
3) When the VF ASPECT item is set to “AUTO”, this is linked to the 16:9/
4:3 selection on the FORMAT page.
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating
section.
When the VF ASPECT item is set to “16:9”, but “4:3” is selected on the
FORMAT page, then it is not possible to mix the zebra display and marker
display signals on the output signal from the TEST OUT connector.
The menu disappears from the screen, and the display
indicating the current status of the camcorder appears
along the top and bottom of the screen.
7-2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item
you want to set, and press the MENU knob.
U12 SHOT DISP
SHOT DATE
SHOT TIME
SHOT MODEL NAME :
SHOT SERIAL NO
SHOT ID SEL
SHOT 16:9 ID
:
:
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting
changes to a ? mark.
:
:
:
SHOT BLINK CHARA:
Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and press
the MENU knob.
You can set the following items on the SHOT DISP
page.
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark.
Item
Description
5
6
To continue setting other items, repeat steps 3 and 4.
SHOT DATE
Selects whether or not the shot data is
superimposed (ON or OFF).
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating
section.
SHOT TIME
Selects whether or not shot time is
superimposed (ON or OFF).
SHOT MODEL
NAME
Selects whether or not the model name
is superimposed (ON or OFF).
The menu disappears from the screen, and the display
indicating the current status of the camcorder appears
along the top and bottom of the screen.
SHOT SERIAL
NO.
Selects whether or not the serial
number is superimposed (ON or OFF).
Selects whether or not the shot ID set
on the SHOT ID page is
SHOT ID SEL
1)
7-2-6 Recording Shot Data
Superimposed on the Color
Bars
superimposed (1 to 4 or OFF).
SHOT 16:9 ID
Selects whether or not the 16:9 mode
indicator is superimposed (ON or OFF).
SHOT BLINK
CHARA
Selects whether or not the blinking * is
superimposed (ON or OFF).
In the SHOT DISP page of the USER menu, you can select
which shot data is recorded superimposed on the color
bars. You can also select which of the shot IDs (1 to 4) set
in the SHOT DATA page is recorded superimposed on the
picture.
1) To carry out superimposed recording, select the SHOT ID number (1 to 4).
Not to carry out superimposed recording, select “OFF”.
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item
you want to set, and press MENU knob.
Proceed as follows.
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting
changes to a ? mark.
CANCEL/PRST /
ESCAPE switch
Turn the MENU knob to select whether or not to
record the selected item superimposed on the color
bars, and press the MENU knob.
MENU knob
MENU ON/OFF switch
The z mark on changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark.
5
6
To continue setting other items, repeat steps 3 and 4.
Selecting the shot data for superimposed recording
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating
section.
The last accessed menu page appears on the screen.
Turn the MENU knob until the SHOT DISP page
appears, and press the MENU knob to select the page.
To carry out superimposed recording
To actually record the items selected for superimposed
recording on the SHOT DISP page, set the OUTPUT/DCC
switch to BARS, DCC OFF.
126
7-2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The items selected for superimposed recording appear on
the screen and are recorded superimposed on the color
bars.
U11 SHOT ID
ID-1 :?
ID-2 : ssssssssssss
ID-3 : ssssssssssss
ID-4 : ssssssssssss
TOP
x
7-2-7 Setting the Shot ID
$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:
;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR
STUVWXYZ[\]_
INS DEL RET
ESC END
On the SHOT ID page of the USER menu, you can set a
shot ID of up to 12 alphanumeric characters, spaces, and
symbols.
When the OUTPUT/DCC switch is set to BARS, DCC
OFF, this shot ID is output with the color bar signal. The
shot ID comprises ID1 to ID4, and the setting can be
changed using the SHOT DISP page of the USER menu.
You can select the SHOT ID to be recorded superimposed
on the color bars on the SHOT DISP page.
4
Enter or change the shot ID.
When you are entering the whole shot ID, go to step
2.
1 Turn the MENU knob to move the x mark to the
character which you want to change, then press the
MENU knob.
Note
A character table appears.
When the menu is displayed, the shot ID is not displayed
even if the color bar signal is output.
U11 SHOT ID
ID-1 :?
TOP
x
To set the shot ID, proceed as follows.
ID-2 : ssssssssssss
ID-3 : ssssssssssss
ID-4 : ssssssssssss
x
$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:
;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR
STUVWXYZ[\]_
INS DEL RET
ESC END
CANCEL/PRST /
ESCAPE switch
2 Turn the MENU knob until the x mark moves to
the character position that you want to select, then
press the MENU knob.
MENU knob
MENU ON/OFF switch
Example: To input “+”
U11 SHOT ID
ID-1 :?
ID-2 : ssssssssssss
ID-3 : ssssssssssss
ID-4 : ssssssssssss
TOP
Setting the shot ID
+
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.
x
$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:
;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR
STUVWXYZ[\]_
INS DEL RET
The last accessed menu page appears on the screen.
ESC END
Turn the MENU knob until the SHOT ID page
appears, and press the MENU knob to select the page.
5
6
Repeat step 4 for each of the remaining characters.
U11 SHOT ID
TOP
When the input is complete, turn the MENU knob to
move the x mark over “END”, then press the MENU
knob.
ID-1 : ssssssssssss
ID-2 : ssssssssssss
ID-3 : ssssssssssss
ID-4 : ssssssssssss
This ends the input, and returns to the original SHOT
ID page.
To insert a space
Proceed as follows.
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the ID
(one of ID-1 to ID-4) you want to set, and press the
MENU knob.
1
In step 4 above, move the x mark over “INS”, and
press the MENU knob.
A x mark appears over the first character position in
the string, and characters can now be input.
7-2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This window allows you to confirm why the ! (warning)
indicator lights.
U11 SHOT ID
TOP
You can use the ‘!’ LED page of the USER menu to set
whether or not the ! (warning) indicator lights.
ID-1 : CM015
ID-2 : ssssssssssss
ID-3 : ssssssssssss
ID-4 : ssssssssssss
FUNCTION window
$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:
;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR
STUVWXYZ[\]_
Move the x mark
over “INS”.
INS DEL RET
ESC END
FUNCTION
FORMAT:
I
ASSIGN<1> ATW <2> OFF
<3> OFF <4> OFF
<T>TURBO
2
Move the x mark over “RET”, then press the MENU
knob.
ZEBRA :OFF SELECT:
1
10%
DET
DET2 100%
P.CACHE
70%
APT:
:
OFF: 0-2s
- Actual State ---------
REAR BNC:OFF
U11 SHOT ID
TOP
ID-1 : CM 015
This window allows you to confirm the assigned function
of the ASSIGN 1/2/3/4 switches, ON/OFF of the Loop Rec
function, and ON/OFF of the output of the VIDEO OUT
connector.
ID-2 : ssssssssssss
ID-3 : ssssssssssss
ID-4 : ssssssssssss
Space inserted
$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:
;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR
STUVWXYZ[\]_
INS DEL RET
ESC END
AUDIO STATUS window
To delete a character
AUDIO STATUS
knob.
16bit DF F.MIC:MONO
CH2:FRONT
CH2:FRONT
CH3:FRONT
CH4:FRONT
This deletes the character under the x mark in the shot ID
row.
To cancel deleting the character, move the x mark over
“RET”, and press the MENU knob.
1:
2:
3:
4:
This window allows you to confirm the following items
related to audio.
• Audio bit rate
• Setting condition of DF/NDF (only for the PDW-510/
530)
• Type of front microphone
• Type of input signal to audio channels 1 to 4
• Input level of audio channels 1 to 4
You can use the SET STATUS page of the USER menu to
set whether or not the status confirmation windows are
displayed.
To cancel entering or changing shot ID
Before executing step 6 of the procedure for setting the
top right of the screen, then press the MENU knob or push
the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch down to ESCAPE.
This cancels all changes, and returns to the SHOT ID page.
7-2-8 Displaying the Status
Confirmation Windows
You can confirm the settings or status of the camcorder on
the screen by displaying the following three windows.
• ABNORMAL <!> window
• FUNCTION window
• AUDIO STATUS window
To display the status confirmation
windows
You can use the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch as the
STATUS ON/SEL / OFF switch when the MENU ON/
OFF switch is set to OFF (when the cover of the menu
operating section is closed, OFF is automatically selected).
ABNORMAL <!> window
ABNORMAL<!>
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
!GAIN
!SHUTTER
WHT PRESET : ON
:
:
ON
ON
3dB
OFF
W:P
OFF
OFF
1B
ATW RUN
EXTENDER
!FILTER
:
:
ON
ON
: OFF
ON
OVERRIDE
:
OFF
128
7-2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting
changes to a ? mark.
4
Turn the MENU knob to select whether or not to
display the selected window, then press the MENU
knob.
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark.
By pushing the STATUS ON/SEL
/ OFF switch up to ON/SEL, the
confirmation window appears.
Each time you push this switch up
to ON/SEL, the window switches.
After 10 seconds, the window
disappears automatically.
5
6
To continue setting other windows, repeat steps 3 and
4.
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating
section.
To make the window disappear
promptly after displaying the
window, push this switch down
to OFF.
7-2-9 Confirming the Image of the
Return Video Signal in the
Viewfinder
You can set whether or not the image of the return video
signal input to the GENLOCK IN connector is displayed in
the viewfinder, using the GENLOCK page of the
MAINTENANCE menu.
To disable display of the status
confirmation windows
Proceed as follows.
Proceed as follows.
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON while holding
down the MENU knob.
The last accessed menu page appears on the screen.
The TOP menu appears.
Turn the MENU knob until the SET STATUS page
appears, and press the MENU knob to select the page.
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to
“MAINTENANCE”, then press the MENU knob.
U13 SET STATUS
If this is the first time the MAINTENANCE menu has
been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the
MAINTENANCE menu appears.
STATUS ABNORMAL :
STATUS FUNCTION :
ON
ON
ON
STATUS AUDIO
:
If the menu has been used before, the last accessed
page appears.
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU
knob to move the b mark to “GENLOCK”, then press
the MENU knob to display the GENLOCK page.
Item
Description
ABNORMAL
Selects whether or not the ABNORMAL
window is displayed (ON or OFF).
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob
until the GENLOCK page appears, then press the
MENU knob to select the page.
FUNCTION
Selects whether or not the FUNCTION
window is displayed (ON or OFF).
STATUS AUDIO Selects whether or not the STATUS
AUDIO window is displayed (ON or
OFF).
M15 GENLOCK
TOP
GENLOCK
RETURN VIDEO
:
:
ON
OFF
GL H PHASE
GL SC PHASE
GL SC 0/180 SEL :
:
:
0
0
180
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item
you want to set, and press MENU knob.
7-2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
129
4
Carry out setting operations as follows.
7-3 Adjustments and
Settings From
Menus
1 Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to
“GENLOCK”, and press the MENU knob.
The b mark on the left of “GENLOCK” changes to
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the
GENLOCK setting changes to a ? mark.
2 Turn the MENU knob until ”OFF” appears, then
press the MENU knob.
The camcorder provides menus for adjustments and
settings.
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark, and the setting is executed.
7-3-1 Setting Gain Values for the
GAIN Selector Positions
3 Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to
“RETURN VIDEO”, and press the MENU knob.
The b mark changes to a z mark and the z mark
changes to a ? mark.
Before using the camcorder, use the GAIN SW page of the
USER menu to set the gains corresponding to the L, M,
and H positions of the GAIN selector, which switches the
gain of the video amplifier.
4 Turn the MENU knob until “ON” appears, then
press the MENU knob.
To set the gain values, proceed as follows.
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark, and the setting is executed.
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.
5
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating
section.
The last accessed menu page appears on the screen.
Turn the MENU knob until the GAIN SW page
appears, then press the MENU knob to select the page.
To see the image of the return video signal
on the viewfinder screen
U08 GAIN SW
TOP
GAIN LOW
GAIN MID
GAIN HIGH
GAIN TURBO
:
:
:
:
0db
9db
18db
42db
Hold down the RET switch on the lens. The image of the
return video signal input to the GENLOCK IN connector
is displayed on the viewfinder screen while you are
holding down the RET switch.
TURBO SW IND.
:
OFF
When the return video function is assigned to the ASSIGN
1/3/4 switch, you can see the image of the return video
signal on the viewfinder screen while you are holding
down the ASSIGN 1/3/4 switch even if the RETURN
VIDEO item is set to “OFF” on the GENLOCK page of the
MAINTENANCE menu.
Item
Description
GAIN LOW
Sets the gain value corresponding to
the L position of the GAIN selector.
GAIN MID
Sets the gain value corresponding to
the M position of the GAIN selector.
Note
GAIN HIGH
GAIN TURBO
TURBO SW IND
Sets the gain value corresponding to
the H position of the GAIN selector.
When no signal is input to the GENLOCK IN connector,
the image is not changed even if you hold down the RET
switch on the lens.
However, the image is switched while you are holding
down the ASSIGN 1/3/4 switch to which the return video
function is assigned, even if no signal is input to the
GENLOCK IN connector.
Sets the gain value corresponding to
TURBO GAIN button selection.
OFF: When you operate the GAIN
selector after pressing the TURBO
GAIN button once, the video gain is
changed according to the GAIN
selector operation.
ON: When the video gain is boosted to
the video gain to the value preset by
pressing the TURBO GAIN button
once, the video gain is not changed
even if you operate the GAIN selector,
until you press the TURBO GAIN
button once more.
130
7-3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item
you want to set, and press MENU knob.
U01 OUTPUT
TOP
LCD BRIGHT <L>
LCD BRIGHT <H>
LCD COLOR
:
:
:
0
0
0
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting
changes to a ? mark.
i.LINK MODE
:
AV/C
PB WIDE ID(IMX) :: THROU
REAR BNC OUT SEL: VBS
OFF
LIVE LOGGING
:
Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and press
the MENU knob.
The z mark on the left of the selected item changes to
a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting
changes to a z mark.
Item
Description
LCD BRIGHT <L> Adjusts the LCD brightness when the
LCD switch is in the L position.
LCD BRIGHT <H> Adjusts the LCD brightness when the
LCD switch is in the H position.
Any of –3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 42 or 48 dB
can be set for each of the L, M, and H positions, in any
sequence.
LCD COLOR
i.LINK MODE
Adjusts the color saturation of the LCD.
Selects whether or not to use the
i.LINK connector SBP2 interface.
For TURBO, any of –3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 30, 36,
42 or 48 dB can be selected.
REAR BNC OUT Selects the type of the video signal to
SEL
be output from the VIDEO OUT
connector.
To change the gain corresponding to another switch
position, return to step 3.
SDI : Outputs the SDI signal. When
SDI is selected, connect the
VIDEO OUT connector to the SDI
IN connector of the video monitor.
VBS: Outputs the analog composite
video signal. When VBS is
selected, connector the VIDEO
OUT connector to the VIDEO IN
connector of the video monitor.
This setting allows you to save the
power.
5
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating
section.
The menu display disappears, and the current status of
the camcorder is shown along the top and bottom of
the screen.
7-3-2 Selecting the Output Signals
3
4
5
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “REAR
BNC OUT SEL”, and press the MENU knob.
When the CBK-SD01 is installed, you can select the type
of video signals (VBS/SDI) from the VIDEO OUT
connector on the OUTPUT page of the USER menu.
Use the POWER SAVE page to specify whether or not to
enable DV stream output from the i.LINK DV IN/OUT
S400 connector of this unit.
When DV stream output is enabled, it is output when the
recording format is any of MPEG IMX 50Mbps, 40Mbps,
30Mbps or DVCAM.
The b mark on the left of “REAR BNC OUT SEL”
changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the
setting changes to a ? mark.
Turn the MENU knob to change the desired setting,
and press the MENU knob.
The z mark on the left of the selected item changes to
a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting
changes to a z mark.
To select the signal output from the VIDEO
OUT connector
Proceed as follows.
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating
section.
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.
To enable DV stream output
Proceed as follows.
The last accessed menu page appears on the screen.
Turn the MENU knob until the OUTPUT page
appears, then press the MENU knob to select the page.
1
Holding down the MENU knob, move the MENU ON/
OFF switch to ON.
The TOP menu appears.
7-3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to
1
2
Holding down the MENU knob, move the MENU ON/
OFF switch to ON.
“OPERATION”, then press the MENU knob.
If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been
displayed, the CONTENTS page appears. If the menu
has been used before, the last accessed page appears.
The TOP menu appears.
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to
“PAINT”, and press the MENU knob.
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU
knob to move the b mark to POWER SAVE, then
press the MENU knob.
If this is the first time the PAINT menu has been
displayed, the CONTENTS page appears. If the menu
has been used before, the last accessed page appears.
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob
until the POWER SAVE page appears, then press the
MENU knob.
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU
knob to move the b mark to “WHITE”, and press the
MENU knob to display the WHITE page.
The POWER SAVE page appears. The current
settings appear on the right side of each item.
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob
until the WHITE page appears, and press the MENU
knob to select the page.
04 POWER SAVE
TOP
i.LINK OUT
REC AUDIO OUT
:
:
DSABL
EE
P02 WHITE
NETWORK/THUMB
:
SAVE
COLOR TEMP
COLOR FINE
R GAIN
B GAIN
D5600K
COLOR TEMP
COLOR FINE
R GAIN
B GAIN
D5600K
<A>:
<A>:
<A>:
<A>:
<A>:
<B>:
<B>:
<B>:
<B>:
:
3200
0
0
0
OFF
3200
0
0
0
OFF
Item
Setting
i.LINK OUT
Enable or disable i.LINK (AV/C) OUT.
Item
Description
REC AUDIO OUT
Select whether to output E-E signals
or no audio from the AUDIO OUT
connector during recording.
COLOR TEMP
<A>
Sets the color temperature for the
desired value. Adjust the value while
looking at the real image because error
tends to be bigger for adjustment of
high color temperature.
NETWORK/
THUMB
Select whether to permanently enable
the CBK-NC01 (option) and thumbnail
display, or to disable them in power
saving mode.
COLOR FINE <A> Adjusts the value more precisely when
the color temperature adjustment
through COLOR TEMP is not
4
5
6
Move the b mark to “i.LINK OUT”, then press the
satisfactory.
MENU knob.
R GAIN <A>
B GAIN <A>
D5600K
Only the value of R GAIN is changed.
Only the value of B GAIN is changed.
The b mark changes to a z mark, and the z mark
changes to a ? mark.
Sets the color temperature to
approximately 5600 K.
Turn the MENU knob to select “ENABL”, then press
the MENU knob.
The above table shows the adjustment of the white
balance of channel A.
Items followed by “<B>” are used to adjust the white
balance of channel B.
The setting is confirmed. The z mark changes to a b
mark and the ? mark changes to a z mark.
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF.
4
5
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item
you want to set, and press MENU knob.
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting
changes to a ? mark.
7-3-3 Setting the Color Temperature
Manually
Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and press
the MENU knob.
You can adjust the value of the white balance manually by
setting the color temperature.
Proceed as follows.
132
7-3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark.
To set other items, go back to step 3.
Item
Description
COLOR FINE <A> Adjusts the value more precisely if the
adjustment by WARM-COOL <A> is
not satisfactry.
6
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating
section.
OFFSET WHITE
<B>
Turns the setting of the offset for
channel B ON or OFF. ON: Adds the
offset adjusted on this page to the
white balance.
WARM-COOL <B> Sets the offset for the white balance of
channel B, using the color
7-3-4 Specifying an Offset for the
Auto White Balance Setting
temperature. Adjust the value while
looking at the real image because
error tends to be bigger for adjustment
of high color temperature.
By setting an offset for the value of auto white balance,
you can make the picture warmer or colder.
The OFFSET WHT page of the OPERATION menu
allows you to do this setting.
COLOR FINE <B> Adjusts the value more precisely if the
adjustment by WARM-COOL <B> is
not satisfactory.
Proceed as follows.
4
Set the WHITE BAL switch to the position
corresponding to the desired channel (A or B).
1
2
Holding down the MENU knob, move the MENU ON/
OFF switch from OFF to ON.
Note
The TOP menu appears.
If the WHITE BAL switch is not set to A or B when
you operate the camcorder, the adjustment value will
not be reflected in the output signal.
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to
“OPERATION”, and press the MENU knob.
If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been
displayed, the CONTENTS page appears. If the menu
has been used before, the last accessed page appears.
5
6
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item
you want to set, and press MENU knob.
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting
changes to a ? mark.
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU
knob to move the b mark to “OFFSET WHT”, and
press the MENU knob to display the OFFSET WHT
page.
Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and press
the MENU knob.
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob
until the OFFSET WHT page appears, and press the
MENU knob to select the page.
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark.
To set other items, go back to step 3.
P17 OFFSET WHT
TOP
To set the other white balance channel, go back to step
2.
OFFSET WHITE <A>:
WARM COOL
COLOR FINE
OFF
3200
0
<A>:
<A>:
OFFSET WHITE <B>:
WARM COOL <B>:
COLOR FINE <B>:
OFF
3200
0
7
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating
section.
7-3-5 Assigning Functions to
ASSIGN 1/2/3/4 Switches
Item
Description
OFFSET WHITE
<A>
Turns the setting of the offset for
channel A ON or OFF. ON: Adds the
offset adjusted on this page to the
white balance.
You can assign the desired function to any of the ASSIGN
1/2/3/4 switches and the TURBO GAIN button.
Proceed as follows.
WARM-COOL <A> When OFFSET WHITE <A> is ON,
sets the offset for the white balance of
channel A, using the color
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.
temperature. Adjust the value while
looking at the real image because
error tends to be bigger for adjustment
of high color temperature.
The last accessed menu page appears on the screen.
7-3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Turn the MENU knob until the FUNCTION 1 page
appears, then press the MENU knob to select to page.
Function
Description
TEST OUT
CHARACTER
Assigns the function to switch whether or
not text is superimposed on the video
signal to be output from the TEST OUT
connector.
U03 FUNCTION1
TOP
ASSIGN SW <1>
ASSIGN SW <2>
ASSIGN SW <3>
ASSIGN SW <4>
TURBO SW
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
ATW
OFF
OFF
MARKER
Assigns the ON/OFF function to display
1)
all markers.
OFF
TURBO
DF
OFF
DF/NDF
CACHE/INTVAL
RETAKE
ATW
Assigns the function to delete the last
recorded clip.
Assigns the ON/OFF function of auto-
tracing white balance.
RETURN VIDEO Assigns the ON/OFF function to display
the image of the return video signal on
Item
Description
2)
the viewfinder to the switch.
ASSIGN SW 1
ASSIGN SW 2
ASSIGN SW 3
ASSIGN SW 4
Assigns the function to ASSIGN 1
(push-type) switch.
LENS RET
Assigns the same function as that of the
RET switch on the lens to the switch.
Assigns the function to ASSIGN 2
(slide-type) switch.
REC SWITCH
Assigns the VTR S/S (start/stop) function
to the switch.
Assigns the function to ASSIGN 3
(push-type) switch.
TURBO
SWITCH
Assigns the turbo gain function to the
switch.
Assigns the function to ASSIGN 4
(push-type) switch.
ZEBRA
Assigns the zebra pattern display
function to the switch.
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item
corresponding to the switch to which you want to
assign the function, and press the MENU knob.
FREEZE MIX
Outputs the freeze image and camera
input alternately, to allow frame alignment
(automatic switching).
FREEZE MIX
(Manual)
Outputs the freeze image and camera
input alternately, to allow frame alignment
(manual switching).
The corresponding ASSIGN SW SEL window
appears.
ASSIGN SW1 <3/4> SEL window
D5600
Applies an electrical 5600 K filter.
ZOOM TELE/
WIDE
When using a serial lens, assign the
ZOOM TELE setting to ASSIGN 3, and
the WIDE setting to ASSIGN 4.
ASSIGN SW1 SEL ESC
3)
OFF
PICTURE CACHE ON/OFF
TEST OUT CHARACTER
MARKER
RE-TAKE
ATW
RETURN VIDEO
LENS RET
REC SWITCH
TURBO SWITCH
ZOOM WIDE/
When using a serial lens, assign the
ZOOM WIDE setting to ASSIGN 3, and
the TELE setting to ASSIGN 4.
3)
TELE
SHOT MARK1
SHOT MARK2
Assigns the function to record a SHOT
MARK 1 essence mark.
ASSIGN SW2 SEL window
Assigns the function to record a SHOT
MARK 2 essence mark.
ASSIGN SW2 SEL ESC
4)
Assigns the items assigned in the
ASSIGN SEL menu.
UA01 to UA10
OFF
PICTURE CACHE ON/OFF
TEST OUT CHARACTER
MARKER
ZEBRA
FREEZE MIX
FREEZE MIX(Manual)
D5600
EXT REC CONTROL
1) Even when the MARKER item is set to “OFF” on the MARKER page of
the USER menu, the ASSIGN 1/3/4 switch allows you to display or not to
display all markers.
2) Even if the RETURN VIDEO item is set to “OFF” on the GENLOCK page
of the MAINTENANCE menu, you can use this switch to display the
image of the return video signal on the viewfinder.
3) Only the Assign 3SEL and Assign 4 SEL screens appear.
4) This does not appear if nothing is assigned in the Assign menu.
Functions to be assigned to the ASSIGN 1/3/4
(push-type) switch
Functions to be assigned to the ASSIGN 2 (slide-
type) switch
Function
OFF
CACHE
Description
Disables the switch.
Assigns execution of recording in picture
cache mode.
Function
OFF
Content
Disables the switch.
CACHE
Assigns execution of recording in picture
cache mode.
134
7-3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation of the ASSIGN 1/2/3/4 switches when
UA01 to UA10 are assigned
Function
Content
TEST OUT
CHARACTER
Assigns the function to switch whether or
not the characters are mixed to the video
signal to be output from the TEST OUT
connector.
When an on/off switchable function (or menu item) is
assigned to one of the ASSIGN 1/2/3/4 switches, each time
the switch is pressed toggles the function on or off.
When another type of menu item is assigned, pressing the
switch displays the item and its setting value on the
viewfinder screen.
You can then change the setting by pressing and turning
the MENU knob.
The viewfinder screen display disappears approximately
three seconds after the last operation.
MARKER
Assigns the ON/OFF function to display
all markers.
1)
ZEBRA
D5600
Assigns the zebra pattern display
function to the switch.
Applies an electrical 5600 K filter.
EXT REC
CONTROL
Selects whether or not recording control
of external devices connected through
the CCZ connector (26-pin) of a CA-702
is possible.
7-3-6 Setting the Date/Time of the
Internal Clock
REC VIDEO
SOURCE
Selects which signals you will record
pictures being shot by the camcorder or
video signals from external equipment
connected to GENLOCK IN connector.
2)
You can set or change the date and time of the internal
clock. The date and time set are reflected in the time code.
Proceed as follows.
3)
Assigns the items assigned in the
ASSIGN SEL menu.
UA01 to UA10
1
Holding down the MENU knob, move the MENU ON/
OFF switch to ON.
1) Even when the MARKER item is set to “OFF” on the MARKER page of
the USER menu, the ASSIGN 2 switch allows you to display or not to
display all markers.
2) When the CBK-SC01 is not installed, this item does not appears since this
function is not effective.
The TOP menu appears.
3) This does not appear if nothing is assigned in the Assign menu.
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to
“DIAGNOSIS”, and press the MENU knob.
Note
For functions that are assigned to the ASSIGN 2
switch, you cannot change those settings using other
menus. The function assigned to ASSIGN 2 switch
takes precedence over the menu setting.
If this is the first time the DIAGNOSIS menu has been
displayed, the CONTENTS page appears. If the menu
has been used before, the last accessed page appears.
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU
knob to move the b mark to “TIME/DATE”, and press
the MENU knob to display the TIME/DATE page.
4
5
6
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item
you want to set, and press MENU knob.
The b mark changes to a z mark, and the z mark by
the setting changes to a ? mark.
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob
until the TIME/DATE page appears, then press the
MENU knob to select the page.
Turn the MENU knob to switch to the desired setting,
and press the MENU knob.
04 TIME/DATE
ADJUST
:
EXEC
The z mark changes to a b mark, and the ? mark
changes to a z mark, confirming the setting.
HOUR
MIN
SEC
:
:
:
12
55
58
YEAR
MONTH
DAY
:
:
:
00
07
31
To continue with other settings, repeat steps 3 and 4.
To return to the previous page
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “ESC” at the
right top of the window and press the MENU knob.
Alternatively, push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch
down to the ESCAPE side.
4
Press the MENU knob.
The TIME ADJUST setting window appears.
To end the menu operation
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF or close the cover
of the menu operating section.
7-3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you are using a serial lens, you can automatically
load the lens file number corresponding to your lens by
setting LENS AUTO RECALL in the LENS FILE 1 page of
the FILE menu to ON.
TIME ADJUST ESC
HOUR
MIN
SEC
:
:
:
12
55
58
YEAR
MONTH
DAY
:
:
:
00
07
31
Proceed as follows to select the lens file.
OK
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.
The last accessed menu page appears on the screen.
Item
Description
Turn the MENU knob until the LENS FILE page
appears, then press the MENU knob to select the page.
HOUR
MIN
Sets the hour value.
Sets the minutes value.
Sets the seconds value.
Sets the year.
The LENS FILE page shows the number and the name
of the currently selected lens file.
SEC
YEAR
MONTH
DAY
Sets the month.
U15 LENS FILE
LENS FILE SELECT:
F.ID :
TOP
1
Sets the day.
5
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item
you want to set, and press MENU knob.
<LENS INFORMATION>
L.ID:
L.MF:
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting
changes to a ? mark.
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to LENS
FILE SELECT, and press the MENU knob.
6
Turn the MENU knob to display the desired value, and
press the MENU knob.
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting
changes to a ? mark.
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark.
Turn the MENU knob until the lens file No. in use
appears, then press the MENU knob.
7
8
To continue the remaining settings, repeat steps 5 and
6.
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark.
When you finish settings, turn the MENU knob to
move the b mark to “OK”, then press the MENU knob.
If you do not want to use a lens file
Select NO OFFSET.
The internal clock is set with the date and time set in
steps 5 to 7. The TIME/DATE page of the
DIAGNOSIS menu appears again. The time set on the
TIME ADJUST setting window is displayed.
5
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating
section.
To cancel the setting
Before executing step 8, move the b mark to “ESC” at the
top right of the window and press the MENU knob.
Alternatively, push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch
down to the ESCAPE side.
All settings or changes are discarded and the TIME/DATE
page of the DIAGNOSIS menu appears.
7-3-8 Selecting the Aspect Ratio
The FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu allows you
to select the aspect ratio of the video output signal.
Note
7-3-7 Selecting the Lens File
When the CA-701/702/702P camera adaptor is used with
the camcorder, this function is not available. To select the
aspect ratio, disconnect the CA-701/702/702P camera
adaptor from the camcorder or turn off the power of the
CA-701/702/702P camera adaptor.
The LENS FILE page of the USER menu allows you to
change the lens file according to the lens in use.
Proceed as follows.
136
7-3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
Follow the procedure of steps 1 to 3 described in
FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu.
20 FORMAT
16:9/4:3 SELECT :
16:9
I
SCAN MODE
:
:
UC/J SELECT
UC
Color bars (SMPTE type)
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “16:9/4:3
SELECT”, and press MENU knob.
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting
changes to a ? mark.
Color bars (EBU type)
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to display the desired aspect
ratio, and press the MENU knob.
16:9 mode indicator on the color bar display
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark.
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating
section.
To display the aspect ratio of 16:9/4:3 on the
viewfinder screen
By setting the “DISP 16:9/4:3 ID” item on the VF DISP 2
page of the USER menu to “ON”, “16:9” or “4:3” appears
on the viewfinder screen when the aspect ratio of 16:9 is
selected.
For details, see 7-2-2 “Selecting the Display Items” on
To display “16:9” in color bars
By setting the “SHOT 16:9 ID” on the SHOT DISP page
of the USER menu to ON, you can record a “16:9” mode
indicator superimposed on the color bars.
For details, see 7-2-6 “Recording Shot Data
7-3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
137
7-3-9 Setting the CCD Scan Mode
Since the camcorder has CCDs that use an “all pixels read-
out method,” a progressive scan mode is also available in
addition to the conventional interlace scan mode.
You can select either of the following modes using the
FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu.
• I (interlace scan) mode
• PsF (progressive scan) mode
Installing the CBK-FC01 allows you to select the 24P
mode.
Each mode is described below using timing charts.
I (interlace scan) mode
CCD output
Video output signal
O: Odd
E: Even
Interlace scan mode timing chart
The video signal of an odd scanning line and that of an
even scanning line are output from the CCD alternately.
Thus, the timing of the odd-field video signal and even-
field video signal are different.
PsF (progressive scan) mode
CCD output
Video output signal
O: Odd
E: Even
Progressive scan mode timing chart
The video signal of an odd scanning line and that of an
even scanning line are output from the CCD at the same
time. Then they are sent to the memory and separated into
odd-field and even-field scanning lines. Thus the timing of
an odd-field video signal and an even-field video signal are
the same.
24P mode (2-3 pull-down) mode (PDW-510/530 only)
23.98 frames per second
CCD output
A ( O + E )
B ( O + E )
C ( O + E )
D ( O + E )
A ( O + E )
A O
A E
B O
B E
B O
C E
C O
D E
D O
D E
A O
A E
Video output signal
29.97 frames per second
O: Odd
E: Even
24P mode timing chart
After reading from the CCDs in 24P mode (23.98 frames
per second), a pull-down conversion is carried out to the 30
frames (29.97 frames per second) of the normal
progressive scan mode.
138
7-3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the CCD scan mode
The scan mode of the camcorder has been set to the
interlace scan mode at the factory. The FORMAT page of
the OPERATION menu allows you to change the CCD
scan mode to the progressive scan mode or 24P mode
(PDW-510/530 only).
3
Turn the MENU knob to display “PsF” or “24P”, and
press the MENU knob.
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark.
19 FORMAT
1
Follow the procedures given in steps 1 to 3 described
FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu.
16:9/4:3 SELECT :
16:9
PsF
UC
SCAN MODE
:
:
UC/J SELECT
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “SCAN
MODE”, and press the MENU knob.
The b mark on the left of “SCAN MODE” changes to
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting
changes to a ? mark.
4
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF.
19 FORMAT
16:9/4:3 SELECT :
16:9
I
SCAN MODE
:?
UC/J SELECT
:
UC
7-3-10 Using UMID Data
To perform operations from interviewing to editing
effectively and to detect audio-visual materials easily
when reusing them, metadata that provides additional
information is recorded along with audio-visual data on a
disc. As one of application of metadata, the UMID
(Unique Material Identifier) is internationally
standardized.
What is a UMID?
The UMID (Unique Material Identifier) is a unique
identifier for audio-visual material defined by the
SMPTE330M-2003 standard.
The UMID may be used either as the 32-byte Basic UMID
or as the extended UMID, which includes an additional 32
bytes of Source Pack to make a total 64 bytes.
For details, refer to SMPTE 330M.
Extended UMID (64 bytes)
Basic UMID (32 bytes)
Source Pack (32 bytes)
Spatial
Universal label
12 bytes
L
1
Inst. No. Material Number
Time/Date
8 bytes
Country Org
User
Co-ordinates
3 bytes
16 bytes
12 bytes
4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes
7-3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Globally unique ID is automatically recorded every
shooting.
The Extended UMID is metadata that provides additional
information such as location, time/date, company and so
on.
The UMID is applied as follows.
Source Pack
Shooting information (when,
where and who)
Same as the above
Material No.
ID generated when shooting
Same as the above
Instance No.
Original material: 00 00 00
Copied material: generation number
(1 byte) + random number (2 byte)
M
M
M
Distinguishing between the
original material and copied
material
Material source ID/detecting
material
Metadata pack that identifies
the source of material unit by
defining the when, where
and who of the material unit
with which it is associated.
Using the Extended UMID
If this is the first time the Operation menu has been
displayed, the CONTENTS page appears.
If the menu has been used before, the last accessed
page appears.
You have to enter a country code, organization code and
user code. Set the country code referring to the ISO-3166
table, and set the organization code and user code
independently.
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU
knob to move the b mark to “UMID SET”, and press
the MENU knob.
For details, see “UMID Menu Setup” on page 140.
Functions of UMID data
The UMID data enables the followings:
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob
until the UMID SET page appears, then press the
MENU knob.
• Add a globally unique ID to every shot of audio-visual
material. The unique ID is used to detect the material
source and to link it with the original source material.
• Distinguishing between original material and copied
material. 00 is added to the Instance Number for original
material.
The UMID SET page appears.
The current settings appear on the right side of each
item.
• Recording based on the UTC. The UTC is used when
recording the UMID. This enables uniform control of
source material recorded all over the world based on the
universal time code.
• Calculating the date difference among source materials.
The source material is recorded based on the MJD
(Modified Julian Date), which enables easy calculation
of date difference among source materials.
?22 UMID SET
COUNTRY CODE
TOP
:
ssss
ORGANIZATION CODE: ssss
USER CODE
TIME ZONE
:
ssss
00:+00:00
Proceed as follows.
UMID Menu Setup
Item
Contents
The UMID SET page of the OPERATION menu allows
you to make settings for UMID data.
Proceed as follows.
COUNTRY CODE Sets the country code.
ORGANIZATION
USER CODE
TIME ZONE
Sets the organization code.
Sets the user code.
Sets the time difference from UTC.
1
2
Holding down the MENU knob, set the MENU ON/
OFF switch from OFF to ON.
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item
you want to set, and press the MENU knob.
The TOP menu appears.
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to
“OPERATION”, and press the MENU knob.
The b mark to the left of the selected item changes to
a z mark and the z mark to the left of the setting
changes to a ? mark.
140
7-3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
6
Turn the MENU knob to change the setting of the
selected item or to display the desired value, and press
the MENU knob.
has been acquired, it is forbidden to enter an arbitrary
string. As a rule, the code “00” must be entered. Freelance
operators who do not belong to an origination should enter
“~”.
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark.
USER CODE
When you select this item, the USER CODE window
appears.
(Refer to the COUNTRY CODE window above.)
Enter the 4-byte alphanumeric strings for user
identification.
The user code is registered with each organization locally.
It is usually not centrally registered.
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF.
Additional information related to the UMID
COUNTRY CODE
When the user code is less than 4 bytes, enter the user code
from the beginning of the 4 bytes and enter the space
character (20h) in the remaining strings.
This user code is determined by the organization. The
methods used depend on the organization.
When you select this item, the COUNTRY CODE window
appears.
22 UMID SET
TOP
COUNTRY CODE
ORGANIZATION
:
:
sss
sssss
USER CODE
:
sssss
Note
TIME ZONE : 1B : -07:30
-0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKL
MNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghij
klmnopqrstuvwxyz
User bits cannot be entered when no organization code has
been entered.
INS DEL RET
ESC END
TIME ZONE
When you select this item, the TIME ZONE window
appears.
The UTC is calculated based on the local time, using the
time zone. If the time zone is not set, the UTC is not
recorded correctly.
Enter an abbreviated alphanumeric string (4-byte
alphanumeric strings) according to the values defined in
ISO 3166-1.
There are about 240 country codes.
Find your own country code on the following home page.
TIME ZONE
00.UTC
ESC
Refer to ISO-3166-1:
http://www.din.de/gremien/nas/nabd/iso3166ma/
codlstp1/en_listp1.html
GREENWICH
01.UTC-01:00 AZORES
02.UTC-02:00 M-ATRANTIC
03.UTC-03:00 ARZENTINE
04.UTC-04:00 HALIFAX
05.UTC-05:00 NEW YORK
06.UTC-06:00 CHICAGO
07.UTC-07:00 DENVER
08.UTC-08:00 LOSANGELES
09.UTC-09:00 ALASKA
When the country code is less than 4 bytes, the active part
of the code will occupy the first part of the 4-bytes and the
remainder must be filled with the space character (20h).
Example: In the case of Japan
For Japan, if the country code is JP, it is 2 bytes, if JPN, it
is 3 bytes.
Thus, enter the following:
Set the time difference from UTC. When setting the
summer time or daylight savings time, change the code to
one which will advance the time by 1 hour.
JP_ _
or
Note
JPN _
When you change the time zone, adjust the built-in clock
to local time and turn the power of the camcorder off and
then the power on again.
where _ represents a space.
ORGANIZATION (organization code)
When you select this item, the ORGANIZATION window
appears.
(Refer to the COUNTRY CODE window above.)
Enter an abbreviated 4-byte alphanumeric string for the
organization code.
7-3-11Making Network Settings
The NETWORK page of the MAINTENANCE menu
allows you to make settings for connections to other DV
devices via a network.
Note
There are no problems in recording or playing back audio-
video signals,if ORGANIZATION is not set.
Organization codes must be acquired by applying to the
SMPTE registration office. When no organization code
7-3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The acquired IP address is displayed in the “IP
ADDRESS” line of the NETWORK page.
If an IP address could not be acquired, “0.0.0.0” is
displayed. In this case, contact your network
administrator.
Enabling automatic acquisition of the IP
address
When the unit is shipped from the factory, automatic
acquisition of the IP address is disabled. Proceed as
follows to enable it.
Setting the IP address, subnet mask, and
default gateway
1
Holding down the MENU knob, set the menu switch
from OFF to ON.
The unit is shipped from the factory with the following
settings.
The TOP menu appears.
IP ADDRESS:
192.168. 1.10
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to
SUBNET MASK: 255.255.255. 0
DEF. GATEWAY: 0. 0. 0. 0
Proceed as follows to change the settings.
“MAINTENANCE”, and press the MENU knob.
If this is the first time the MAINTENANCE menu has
been displayed, the CONTENTS page appears.
If the menu has been used before, the last accessed
page appears.
1
the NETWORK page of the MAINTENANCE menu.
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU
knob to move the b mark to “NETWORK”, and press
the MENU knob.
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “IP
ADDRESS”, then press the MENU knob.
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob
until the NETWORK page appears, then press the
MENU knob.
The IP ADDRESS setting window appears.
3
4
Move the b mark to the value that you want to change,
then press the MENU knob.
The NETWORK page appears. The current settings of
the items on the page appear to the right of the items.
The b mark changes to a ? mark.
Turn the MENU knob to display the desired value,
then press the MENU knob.
M18 NETWORK
TOP
DISABL
DHCP
:
:
:
:
:
:
IP ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
DEF. GATEWAT
LINK SPEED
DUPLEX
192 168
1
10
0
The ? mark changes to a b mark.
255 255 255
0
0
0
0
AUTO
AUTO
To cancel the change and restore the standard
setting
Push the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch to the
CANCEL/PRST side.
4
Press the MENU knob, and turn it to move the b mark
to “DHCP”, then press the MENU knob.
For details, see 7-1-3 “Basic Menu Operations” (page
115).
The b mark to the left of “DHCP” changes to a z
mark, and the z mark to the left of the setting changes
to a ? mark.
5
6
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to set the remaining values.
When you are finished, move the b mark to SET, then
press the MENU knob.
5
6
Turn the MENU knob to display “ENABL”, then press
the MENU knob.
7
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to
“SUBNET MASK”, then press the MENU knob.
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark.
SUBNET MASK setting window appears.
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF.
8
9
Carry out steps 3 to 6 to set the subnet mask.
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “DEF.
GATEWAY”, then press the MENU knob.
Note
Before enabling automatic acquisition of the IP address,
check to be sure that this unit is connected to a network
with a network cable.
The DEF. GATEWAY setting window appears.
142
7-3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10Repeat steps 3 to 6 to set the default gateway.
7-4 Resetting USER
Menu Settings to the
Standard Settings
11To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF.
Setting the communications speed
Set the communications speed by choosing AUTO,
10Mbps, or 100Mbps from the menu.
The factory default setting is “AUTO”.
Proceed as follows.
You can return all settings in the USER menu to the
standard settings. It is also possible to change the standard
settings from their factory default values.
1
the NETWORK page of the MAINTENANCE menu.
For details on how to change the factory settings, refer to
the Maintenance Manual.
Proceed as follows.
2
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “LINK
SPEED”, then press the MENU knob.
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the
desired value, then press the MENU knob.
The last accessed menu appears on the screen.
Turn the MENU knob until the USER FILE page
appears, and press the MENU knob.
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF.
The USER FILE page appears.
Setting the communications mode (full
duplex or half duplex)
U16 USER FILE
USER FILE LOAD
USER FILE SAVE
:
:
EXEC
EXEC
Set the communications speed by choosing AUTO, FULL
(full duplex) or HALF (half duplex) from the menu.
The factory default setting is “AUTO”.
Proceed as follows.
F.ID : sssssssssssssssss
USER PRESET EXEC
:
1
the NETWORK page of the MAINTENANCE menu.
USER FILE page
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “USER
2
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to
PRESET”, and press the MENU knob.
“DUPLEX”, then press the MENU knob.
The message “LOAD OK? YES b NO” appears.
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the
desired mode, then press the MENU knob.
U16 USER FILE
LOAD OK?
USER FILE LOAD
USER FILE SAVE
YES NO
: EXEC
:
EXEC
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF.
F.ID : sssssssssssssssss
USER PRESET EXEC
:
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to”YES”,
and press the MENU knob.
The settings for all items in the USER menu are reset
to the standard settings.
7-4 Resetting USER Menu Settings to the Standard Settings
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving and Loading User
Setting Data
8
Chapter
Inserting the “Memory Stick”
Proceed as follows.
8-1 Saving and Loading
User Files to and
from a “Memory
Stick”
1
Open the cover of the menu operating section.
The “Memory Stick” slot is now visible.
The camcorder is equipped with a “Memory Stick” drive,
which enables you to save user files, scene files, lens files,
reference files and “ALL” files. You can load these files
from the “Memory Stick” for immediate recall of a
particular setting configuration.
When a menu page is displayed, you can set up the
camcorder so that inserting a “Memory Stick”
automatically jumps to the appropriate file-related menu
page.
2
Hold the “Memory Stick” with the notch facing
downward and the arrow facing away from you, and
insert the “Memory Stick” into the “Memory Stick”
slot until it clicks into place. Then close the cover.
For details about scene files, see 8-2 “Saving and Loading
For details about lens files, reference files and “ALL”
files, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
For details of the function for jumping to the appropriate
file-related menu page, see 8-3 “Jumping to a File-Related
153.
“Memory Sticks” usable with this
camcorder
“Memory Stick”
With this camcorder, you can use a Sony “Memory Stick”
whose capacity does not exceed 128 MB or a Sony
“Memory Stick PRO” whose capacity does not exceed
2 GB.
Inserting the “Memory Stick”
Note
If it does not fit into the slot properly or if there is some
resistance when you insert it, the “Memory Stick” may be
turned around or upside down. Do not force the “Memory
Stick” into the slot. Confirm the direction of the notch and
arrow on the “Memory Stick” before inserting the
“Memory Stick”, and then try inserting it again.
8-1-1 Handling the “Memory Stick”
The “Memory Stick” can be inserted to or removed from
the camcorder with the power turned on or off.
144
8-1 Saving and Loading User Files to and from a “Memory Stick”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• When storing and carrying the “Memory Stick”, keep it
in its original case to ensure protection of important data.
• When carrying the camcorder with the “Memory Stick”
inserted, close the cover of the menu operating section.
• Avoid removing the “Memory Stick” from the insertion
slot while the access indicator is lit.
Removing the “Memory Stick”
Check that the access indicator is not lit, then gently press
in the “Memory Stick” and release. It pops out, and you
can withdraw it from the slot.
• Do not format the “Memory Stick” using a PC.
For formatting the “Memory Stick”, see the description
of the MEMORY STICK page of the FILE menu on
8-1-2 Saving User Menu Data to the
“Memory Stick”
Check that the access
indicator is not lit
Gently press in
You can save USER menu settings held in the camcorder
as user files in the “Memory Stick”.
Removing the “Memory Stick”
You can save up to 100 user files in the “Memory Stick”.
Insert the “Memory Stick”, then proceed as follows.
Note
Do not remove the “Memory Stick” while the access
indicator is lit. You may lose data, or damage the “Memory
Stick”.
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.
The last accessed menu page appears on the screen.
Turn the MENU knob until the USER FILE page
appears, then press the MENU knob to select the page.
Protecting saved data
To prevent accidental erasure of important setup data, use
the LOCK switch on the “Memory Stick”.
Slide the switch right to the write protect position. It is now
impossible to write or delete data on the “Memory Stick”.
U15 USER FILE
USER FILE LOAD
USER FILE SAVE
:
:
EXEC
EXEC
F.ID : sssssssssssssssss
USER PRESET
:
EXEC
If you want to set a file ID for the data to be saved
Set the file ID before going to step 3.
LOCK switch on the “Memory Stick”
Notes on using and storing the “Memory
Stick”
• Avoid touching the connector of the “Memory Stick” or
contacting it with a metal object.
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to USER
FILE SAVE, and press the MENU knob.
• When attaching a label to the “Memory Stick”, use only
the label supplied for the “Memory Stick”.
• Do not drop, bend, or submit the “Memory Stick” to
external shock.
The P00 USER SAVE page appears.
?P00 USER SAVE
DISPLAY MODE
ESC
ALL
:
• Do not disassemble or modify the “Memory Stick”.
• Avoid getting liquids on the “Memory Stick”.
• Avoid using or storing the “Memory Stick” in a location
subject to:
001.NEW FILE
002.NEW FILE
003.NEW FILE
004.NEW FILE
005.NEW FILE
- extremely high temperature such as the hot inside of a
car or the outdoors exposed to a burning sun, or a place
near a heater.
- direct sunlight
- high humidity
When a ? appears on the left of “P00” at the top left of
the page, you can change the page. Up to 20 pages,
- excessive dust
8-1 Saving and Loading User Files to and from a “Memory Stick”
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
from P00 to P19, can be used to save user files in the
“Memory Stick”. Each page can hold up to 5 files.
7
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating
section.
4
5
6
Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains
the desired file number appears, and press the MENU
knob.
The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen, and
the display indicating the current status of the
camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the
screen.
P00 USER SAVE
DISPLAY MODE
ESC
ALL
USER menu settings to be saved in the “Memory
Stick”
Settings for items on all pages of the USER menu are
saved in the “Memory Stick” as a user file. However, you
can select the items which are not to be saved in the
“Memory Stick”.
:
001.NEW FILE
002.NEW FILE
003.NEW FILE
004.NEW FILE
005.NEW FILE
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the
desired file number, and press the MENU knob.
If data cannot be saved
If one of the following error messages appears during or
after the save operation, then the data was not saved.
The message “SAVE OK? YES b NO” appears.
Data save error messages
P00 USER SAVE
SAVE OK?
DISPLAY MODE
ESC
ALL
When a file number is
shown as “NEW FILE”,
this means that the file
is empty. When data is
stored in a file number,
the file name appears.
YES NO
:
Error message
Cause
Action
001.NEW FILE
002.NEW FILE
003.NEW FILE
004.NEW FILE
005.NEW FILE
NO MEMORY
No “Memory
Insert or reinsert the
STICK (flashing) Stick” is inserted. “Memory Stick”.
MEMORY STICK The LOCK
Set the LOCK switch
to the write enable
position.
LOCKED
switch on the
“Memory Stick”
is set to the write
protect position.
To carry out the save, move the b mark to “YES” and
press the MENU knob.
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving the b mark
pointing to “NO”.
MEMORY STICK Circuit or
Check the circuitry, or
replace the “Memory
Stick”.
ERROR
“Memory Stick”
fault.
(flashing)
The access indicator lights.
Setting the file ID
Before data is saved to a “Memory Stick”, it is useful to set
a file ID for the “Memory Stick” to identify it.
When data is saved to a “Memory Stick”, the file ID is
saved to the “Memory Stick” together with the data.
When the saving is completed, the message
“COMPLETE” appears and the access indicator goes
off.
If no “Memory Stick” has been inserted, the message
“NO MEMORY STICK” will appear. Insert a
“Memory Stick”.
Note
Set the file ID before saving data in the “Memory Stick”.
Otherwise, the file ID is not saved with the other data.
If you select a file number where data has already
been saved
The message “OVERWRITE OK? YES b NO”
appears. In this case, the b mark appears on the left of
“NO”, which is flashing.
• To stop overwriting, press the MENU knob.
• To overwrite, move the b mark to “YES” and press
the MENU knob.
Proceed as follows.
1
On the USER FILE page, turn the MENU knob to
move the b mark to “F. ID”.
You can select the information displayed on each
USER SAVE or USER LOAD page.
For details, see “Selecting the display contents” on
146
8-1 Saving and Loading User Files to and from a “Memory Stick”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark until the
desired type of the display contents (see the following
table) appears, then press the MENU knob.
U16 USER FILE
TOP
USER FILE LOAD
USER FILE SAVE
:
:
EXEC
EXEC
F.ID : sssssssssssssssss
USER PRESET
:
EXEC
P00 USER LOAD
DISPLAY MODE
ESC
:
F.ID
001.USER1
002.USER2
003.NO FILE
004.USER4
005.USER5
2
Press the MENU knob.
A character table appears, allowing you to select
characters you want to enter.
Display type Description
U16 USER FILE
TOP
ALL
File ID (10 characters) and date ((month/
day/year) for PDW-510/530 and (day/month/
year) for PDW-510P/530P)
USER FILE LOAD
USER FILE SAVE
:
:
EXEC
EXEC
F.ID :?
x
F.ID
File ID (16 characters)
$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:
;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR
STUVWXYZ[\]_
DATE
Saved date (year/month/day/hours/minutes/
seconds)
INS DEL RET
ESC END
MODEL
Information on the model
3
4
ID.
8-1-3 Loading Saved Data From a
“Memory Stick”
When you finish entering the file ID, turn the MENU
knob to move the x mark to “END”, then press the
MENU knob.
Note
The data loaded from the “Memory Stick” overwrites the
data saved in the camcorder.
The entered file ID is now displayed.
Proceed as follows.
13 USER FILE
TOP
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.
USER FILE LOAD
USER FILE SAVE
:
:
EXEC
EXEC
The last accessed menu page appears on the screen.
F.ID : sssssssssssssssss
USER PRESET EXEC
:
Turn the MENU knob until the USER FILE page
appears, then press the MENU knob. Alternatively,
select “USER FILE” on the CONTENTS page.
File ID set in step 3
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “USER
FILE LOAD”, and press the MENU knob.
After setting the file ID, carry out the procedure from
step 3 in 7-1-2 “Saving User Menu Data to the
The P00 USER LOAD page appears.
?P00 USER LOAD
DISPLAY MODE
ESC
ALL
The set file ID is saved in the “Memory Stick” with the
data.
:
001.USER1
002.USER2
003.NO FILE
004.USER4
005.USER5
JAN/01/04
JAN/15/04
FEB/05/04
FEB/20/04
Selecting the display contents
You can select the contents of the file to be displayed on
the USER SAVE page and USER LOAD page.
Proceed as follows.
Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains
the desired file number appears, then press the MENU
knob.
1
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to
“DISPLAY MODE”, and press the MENU knob.
8-1 Saving and Loading User Files to and from a “Memory Stick”
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P00 USER LOAD
DISPLAY MODE
ESC
ALL
8-2 Saving and Loading
Scene Files
:
001.USER1
002.USER2
003.NO FILE
004.USER4
005.USER5
JAN/01/04
JAN/15/04
FEB/05/04
FEB/20/04
You can save various settings for shooting a particular
scene as a scene file. Loading the scene file, you can
quickly recreate setup conditions suitable for the scene.
You can save up to five scene files in the camcorder
memory and up to 100 scene files in a “Memory Stick”.
You can also load data from the “Memory Stick” into the
camcorder memory.
5
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the
desired file number to be loaded, and press the MENU
knob.
The message “LOAD OK? YES b NO” appears.
Data that can be saved in a scene file
You can save the following data in a scene file:
• Values adjusted using the PAINT menu
P00 USER LOAD
LOAD OK?
DISPLAY MODE
ESC
ALL
YES NO
:
001.USER1
002.USER2
003.NO FILE
004.USER4
005.USER5
JAN/01/04
JAN/15/04
FEB/05/04
FEB/20/04
For details of the PAINT menu, refer to the Maintenance
Manual.
• Shutter speed settings made in the standard mode and
ECS mode
• The white balance data included in a scene file depends
on the SCENE WHITE DATA setting on the
REFERENCE page of the FILE menu.
6
7
To carry out the load, move the b mark to “YES” and
press the MENU knob.
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving the b mark
pointing to “NO”.
The access indicator lights.
When the load is completed, the message
“COMPLETE” appears and the access indicator goes
off.
8-2-1 Saving a Scene File
The USER FILE page appears again.
Proceed as follows to save a scene file in the camcorder
memory or the “Memory Stick”.
To save a scene file in the “Memory Stick”, insert the
“Memory Stick” before starting the operation.
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating
section.
If data cannot be loaded
If one of the following error messages appears during or
after the load operation, then the data was not loaded.
1
2
In the TOP menu, select the FILE menu.
Turn the MENU knob until the SCENE FILE page
appears, then press the MENU knob to select the page.
Alternatively, select “SCENE FILE” on the
Data load error messages
CONTENTS page to display the SCENE FILE page.
Error message
Cause
Action
NO MEMORY
No “Memory
Insert or reinsert the
STICK (flashing) Stick” is inserted. “Memory Stick”.
04 SCENE FILE
TOP
MEMORY STICK Circuit or
Recheck, and
consult your Sony
representative.
s
s
s
s
s
s
1
2
3
4
5
:STANDARD
:STANDARD
:STANDARD
:STANDARD
:STANDARD
ERROR
(flashing)
“Memory Stick”
fault.
STANDARD
FILE ERROR
(flashing)
The “Memory
Stick” contains
data that cannot
be loaded into this
camcorder.
Do not try to load
data saved from
another camcorder.
SCENE RECALL
SCENE STORE
F.ID:
:
:
EXEC
EXEC
If you want to set a file ID for the data to be saved
Set the file ID before going to step 3.
148
8-2 Saving and Loading Scene Files
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For details on setting the file ID, see “Setting the file
P01 SCENE STORE
DISPLAY MODE
ESC
ALL
:
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “SCENE
STORE”, and press the MENU knob.
001.SCENE1
FEB/05/02
002.STANDARD
003.STANDARD
004.STANDARD
005.STANDARD
***.5FILE SAVE
MEM1-5
F04 SCENE FILE
TOP
s
s
s
s
s
s
1
2
3
4
5
:STANDARD
:STANDARD
:STANDARD
:STANDARD
:STANDARD
2 Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the
desired file number, and press the MENU knob.
The message “STORE OK? YES b NO” appears.
STANDARD
SCENE RECALL
SCENE STORE
F.ID:
:
:
EXEC
EXEC
P01 SCENE STORE
STORE OK?
DISPLAY MODE
ESC
ALL
YES NO
:
The SCENE STORE page appears.
001.SCENE1
FEB/05/02
002.STANDARD
003.STANDARD
004.STANDARD
005.STANDARD
?P00 SCENE STORE
DISPLAY MODE
ESC
ALL
:
***.5FILE SAVE
MEM1-5
MEM-01:STANDARD
MEM-02:STANDARD
MEM-03:STANDARD
MEM-04:STANDARD
MEM-05:STANDARD
3 To carry out the storing, move the b mark to
“YES” and press the MENU knob.
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving the b
mark pointing to “NO”.
4
Select the desired file number.
You can select the contents of the user file to be
displayed on the page.
When no “Memory Stick” has been inserted
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the
desired file number, and press the MENU knob.
When the save is completed, the SCENE FILE page
appears again.
For details, see “Selecting the display contents” on
5
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating
section.
When you select a file number where data has
already been saved
The message “OVERWRITE OK? YES b NO”
appears. In this case, the b mark is placed on the left
of “NO”.
• To stop overwriting, press the MENU knob.
• To overwrite, move the b mark to “YES” and press
the MENU knob.
To return to the SCENE FILE page
After the message “COMPLETE” is displayed, move
the b mark to “ESC” at the top right of the page by
turning the MENU knob, then press the MENU knob.
White balance setting data to be saved in
the scene file
The white balance setting data to be saved in the scene file
depends on the setting of the SCENE WHITE DATA item
on the REFERENCE page of the FILE menu.
When a “Memory Stick” has been inserted
You can use up to 20 pages, from P01 to P20, to save
scene files in the “Memory Stick”. Each page can hold
up to 5 files.
1 Turn the MENU knob until the page which
contains the desired file number appears, then press
the MENU knob.
F05 REFERENCE
REFERENCE STORE :
REFERENCE CLEAR :
EXEC
EXEC
REFERENCE LOAD
REFERENCE SAVE
:
:
EXEC
EXEC
F.ID: sssssssssssssssss
SCENE WHITE DATA: OFF
8-2 Saving and Loading Scene Files
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When SCENE WHITE DATA is set to ON
Note
The white balance setting data selected when you save the
scene file is saved. For example, when the WHITE BAL
switch is set to A, the adjusted values in memory A are
saved in the scene file, and when the WHITE BAL switch
is set to PRST, the preset value is saved.
If files have been saved in the page selected in step 2, those
files are replaced with files loaded from the camcorder
memory. For example, files from 001 to 005 are replaced.
Setting the file ID
Before the data is saved as a scene file, it is useful to set a
file ID to identify it. The set file ID is saved together with
the data.
When SCENE WHITE DATA is set to OFF
White balance setting data is not stored in the scene file.
To set the file ID, proceed as follows.
Saving scene files from the camcorder
memory to the “Memory Stick”
You can save five scene files from the camcorder to the
“Memory Stick” in a single operation.
Proceed as follows.
1
On the SCENE FILE page, turn the MENU knob to
move the b mark to “F. ID”.
F04 SCENE FILE
TOP
1
After displaying the SCENE FILE page (see page 148)
turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “SCENE
STORE”, then press the MENU knob.
s
s
s
s
s
s
1
2
3
4
5
:STANDARD
:STANDARD
:STANDARD
:STANDARD
:STANDARD
STANDARD
One of the SCENE STORE pages appears.
SCENE RECALL
SCENE STORE
F.ID:
:
:
EXEC
EXEC
2
Turn the MENU knob until the desired SCENE
STORE page appears, then press the MENU knob.
2
Press the MENU knob.
A character table appears, allowing you to select
characters you want to enter.
P01 SCENE STORE
DISPLAY MODE
ESC
ALL
:
001.SCENE1
002.SCENE2
003.NO FILE
004.SCENE4
005.SCENE5
FEB/05/02
FEB/06/02
U16 USER FILE
TOP
FEB/08/02
FEB/08/02
$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:
;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR
STUVWXYZ[\]_
***.5FILE SAVE
MEM1-5
INS DEL RET
ESC END
s
STANDARD
SCENE RECALL
SCENE STORE
:
:
EXEC
EXEC
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “5FILE
SAVE B MEM1-5”, and press the MENU knob.
F.ID:
x
The message “SAVE OK? YES b NO” appears.
3
4
Carry out the operations for steps 4 and 5 described in
file ID.
P01 SCENE STORE
SAVE OK?
DISPLAY MODE
ESC
ALL
YES NO
:
001.SCENE1
002.SCENE2
003.NO FILE
004.SCENE4
005.SCENE5
Note
Set the file ID before saving the scene file in the
“Memory Stick” or the camcorder memory.
Otherwise, the file ID is not saved with the other data.
***.5FILE SAVE
MEM1-5
When you finish entering the file ID, turn the MENU
knob to move the x mark to “END”, then press the
MENU knob.
4
5
To carry out the save, move the b mark to “YES” and
press the MENU knob.
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving the b mark
pointing to “NO”.
The SCENE FILE page appears again.
When the save is completed, the message
“COMPLETE” appears.
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF.
150
8-2 Saving and Loading Scene Files
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The camcorder returns to the settings before selecting
this scene file.
04 SCENE FILE
TOP
s
s
s
s
s
s
1
2
3
4
5
:STANDARD
:STANDARD
:STANDARD
:STANDARD
:STANDARD
To load a scene file saved in the “Memory Stick”
Proceed as follows.
STANDARD
SCENE RECALL
SCENE STORE
F.ID: SCENE21
:
:
EXEC
EXEC
1 Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to
“SCENE RECALL”, and press the MENU knob.
The P00 SCENE RECALL page appears.
?P00 SCENE RECALL
ESC
DISPLAY MODE
:
F.ID
The set file ID is saved together with the data.
MEM<1>:STANDARD
MEM<2>:STANDARD
MEM<3>:STANDARD
MEM<4>:STANDARD
MEM<5>:NO FILE
Selecting the display contents
You can select the items of file information to be displayed
on the SCENE STORE pages (P01 to P20) or the SCENE
RECALL pages (P01 to P20) used for saving data to or
loading data from a “Memory Stick”.
2 Turn the MENU knob until the page which
contains the desired file number appears, then press
the MENU knob.
3 Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the
8-2-2 Loading Scene Files
desired file number, and press the MENU knob.
Proceed as follows.
The message “RECALL OK? YES bNO” appears.
1
2
In the TOP menu, select the FILE menu.
P01 SCENE RECALL
RECALL OK? YES NO
ESC
ALL
DISPLAY MODE
:
Turn the MENU knob until the SCENE FILE page
appears, then press the MENU knob to select the page.
Alternatively, on the CONTENTS page select
“SCENE FILE”, and press the MENU knob to display
the SCENE FILE page.
001.SCENE1
002.SCENE2
003.NO FILE
004.SCENE4
005.SCENE5
***.5FILE LOAD
MEM1-5
3
Load the scene file.
4
5
To carry out the recall, move the b mark to “YES” and
press the MENU knob.
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving the b mark
pointing to “NO”.
To load the scene file stored in the camcorder
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the
desired file number, and press the MENU knob.
The s which is displayed on the left of the file number
changes to x.
When the loading is completed, the message
“COMPLETE” appears. The camcorder is set up
according to the loaded scene file.
The camcorder is set up according to the loaded scene
file.
If no file is present with a particular file number, this
is shown as “NO FILE”.
04 SCENE FILE
TOP
s
x
s
s
s
s
1
2
3
4
5
:SCENE 25
:SCENE 26
:SCENE 27
:SCENE 28
:NO FILE
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating
section.
STANDARD
SCENE RECALL
SCENE STORE
F.ID: SCENE21
:
:
EXEC
EXEC
Loading scene files from a “Memory Stick”
into the camcorder memory
You can load up to five scene files stored in the “Memory
Stick” into the camcorder memory in a single operation.
To cancel the selected scene file
Move the b mark to x, and press the MENU knob. x
changes to s.
8-2 Saving and Loading Scene Files
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
After displaying the SCENE FILE page (see page
“SCENE RECALL”, and press the MENU knob.
For details about the items in the reference file, refer to the
Maintenance Manual.
knob to move the b mark to “STANDARD”, and press the
MENU knob.
A SCENE RECALL page appears.
2
3
Turn the MENU knob until the SCENE RECALL
page which contains the desired scene files appears,
then press the MENU knob.
F04 SCENE FILE
TOP
s
s
s
s
s
x
1
2
3
4
5
:SCENE 25
:SCENE 26
:SCENE 27
:SCENE 28
:NO FILE
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “5FILE
LOAD b MEM 1-5”, and press the MENU knob.
STANDARD
SCENE RECALL
SCENE STORE
F.ID: SCENE21
:
:
EXEC
EXEC
The message “RECALL OK? YES bNO” appears.
P01 SCENE RECALL
RECALL OK? YES NO
ESC
ALL
The s displayed on the left of STANDARD changes to x.
When x changes to s, the settings of the camcorder are
reset to the settings saved in the reference file.
DISPLAY MODE
:
001.SCENE1
002.SCENE2
003.NO FILE
004.SCENE4
005.SCENE5
If you press the MENU knob again while x is displayed,
the operation is cancelled and the camcorder returns to the
settings before STANDARD was selected.
***.5FILE LOAD
MEM1-5
4
5
To carry out the recall, move the b mark to “YES” and
press the MENU knob.
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving the b mark
pointing to “NO”.
When loading is complete, the message
“COMPLETE” appears and the access indicator goes
off.
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating
section.
Notes
• The scene files loaded from the “Memory Stick”
overwrite data saved in the camcorder memory.
• To load the scene file saved in the camcorder memory
when the “Memory Stick” is inserted, return to the P00
SCENE RECALL page and load the desired scene file in
the camcorder memory.
• When there is no file to be loaded (shown as “NO
FILE”), an existing file of the same number is
unaffected. In the example shown in step 3, MEM(3) is
not overwritten.
8-2-3 Resetting the Settings of the
Camcorder to the Standard
Settings Saved in the
Reference File
You can reset the settings of the camcorder to the settings
saved in the reference file (standard settings).
152
8-2 Saving and Loading Scene Files
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting
Description
8-3 Jumping to a File-
Related Menu Page
When Inserting a
USER 1
Jumps to the USER 1 page.
5
Press the MENU knob to confirm the selection.
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark
changes to a z mark.
“Memory Stick”
Notes
In the following cases, jumping to the target page is
impossible.
• When the power is turned on after you insert a “Memory
Stick”.
• When OFF is selected for the MS IN > JUMP TO item.
• When any of the following menu pages is already
displayed.
- A file-related page such as the USER FILE page of the
FILE menu
A “Memory Stick” enables you to save user files, scene
files, lens files, reference files and “ALL” files. The
camcorder menu system allows you to make a setting so
that when a “Memory Stick” holding these files is inserted
while in menu operating mode, a menu page relating to the
desired file is automatically displayed on the screen. Thus
you can proceed to file operation quickly. This is very
convenient especially when you manage data files using
“Memory Stick”s.
- MEMORY STICK, ALL FILE, SCENE FILE, LENS
FILE, REFERENCE FILE or ROM VERSION page
To make this setting, proceed as follows.
1
2
In the TOP menu, select the FILE menu.
Turn the MENU knob until the MEMORY STICK
page of the FILE menu appears, then press the MENU
knob to select the page. Alternatively, on the
CONTENTS page select MEMORY STICK to display
the MEMORY STICK page.
09 MEMORY STICK
TOP
FORMAT
MS IN > JUMP TO :
:
EXEC
OFF
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “MS IN
> JUMP TO”, and press the MENU knob.
The b mark on the left of “MS IN > JUMP TO”
changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the
setting changes to a ? mark.
Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting
(target FILE menu page).
Setting
OFF
Description
Disables this function.
USER
ALL
Jumps to the USER FILE page.
Jumps to the ALL FILE page.
Jumps to the SCENE FILE page.
Jumps to the LENS FILE 1 page.
Jumps to the REFERENCE page.
SCENE
LENS
REFER
8-3 Jumping to a File-Related Menu Page When Inserting a “Memory Stick”
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up the
Camcorder
9
Chapter
2
Slide the battery pack down until its “LOCK” arrow
points at the matching line on the camcorder.
9-1 Power Supply
The following power supplies can be used with the
camcorder.
• BP-GL65/GL95/L60S Lithium-ion Battery Pack
• AC power using the AC-550/550CE or AC-DN10 AC
adaptor
“LOCK”
arrow
Matching line on
the camcorder
9-1-1 Using a Battery Pack
When a BP-GL95 Battery Pack is used, the camcorder will
operate continuously for about 120 minutes. Before use,
charge the battery pack with a BC-M150 Battery Charger.
It takes about 145 minutes to charge one BP-GL95.
Detaching the battery pack
ACCESS
indicator
For details, refer to the battery charger operation manual.
Note on using the battery pack
Holding the
button in, pull
the battery
pack up.
A warm battery pack may not be able to be fully recharged.
Attaching the battery pack
1
Press the battery pack against the back of the
camcorder, aligning the line on the side of the battery
pack with the matching line on the camcorder.
Detaching the battery pack
Note
During recording or playback (while the ACCESS
indicator is lit), be careful never to remove the battery
pack.
Back of camcorder
BP-GL65/
GL95/L60S/
L80S
Align these
lines.
154
9-1 Power Supply
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-1-2 Avoiding Breaks in Operation
Due to an Exhausted Battery
When the battery pack is becoming exhausted, you can
perform battery replacement without causing a break to the
camcorder operation by using an AC adaptor.
To do this, proceed as follows.
to an AC power
source
1
Connect an AC-550/AC-550CE Adaptor to an AC
power source, then connect it to the DC IN connector
of the camcorder.
Connecting to an AC power source using the AC-DN10 AC Adaptor
9-1-4 Using the Anton Bauer
Ultralight System
For details, see the next section.
The power source switches automatically from the
battery pack to the AC adaptor connected to the DC IN
connector.
By fitting the camcorder with the Anton Bauer Ultralight
system, and setting the LIGHT switch to AUTO, you can
switch the light on and off automatically as you start and
stop REC operation. This system operates with lights
powered by 12 V, with a maximum power consumption of
50 W.
Note
There may be some noise on the video signal at the
time of power source switching.
2
Replace the battery pack with a fully charged one.
9-1-3 Using an AC Adaptor
Using the AC-550/550CE AC adaptor
Connect the camcorder to the AC power supply through
the AC-550/550CE AC Adaptor as shown in the following
figure, and turn the POWER switch of the AC-550/550CE
on.
to an AC power source
Power switch on
AC Adaptor
AC-550/
550CE
DC OUT
DC IN
DC output cable (supplied with
the AC-550/550CE)
Using an AC adaptor
Using the AC-DN10 AC adaptor
Mount the AC-DN10 on the camcorder in the same way as
a battery pack, then connect to the AC power supply. The
AC-DN10 can supply up to 100 W of power.
9-1 Power Supply
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
Loosen the viewfinder front-rear positioning lever and
the LOCK knob.
9-2 Adjusting the
Viewfinder
Slide the viewfinder longitudinally to the most
convenient position.
Tighten the viewfinder front-rear positioning lever and
the LOCK knob.
For maximum viewing convenience, you can adjust the
viewfinder position in the left-right and backward-forward
directions.
9-2-2 Adjusting the Viewfinder
Focus and Screen
9-2-1 Adjusting the Viewfinder
Position
Adjusting the viewfinder focus
Turn the diopter adjustment ring until the viewfinder
image is sharpest.
Adjusting the position to the left or right
Proceed as follows.
Diopter adjustment ring
Adjusting the position to the left or right
Adjusting the viewfinder focus
Adjusting the viewfinder screen
Adjust the brightness, contrast, and peaking of the
viewfinder screen with the controls shown below.
1
2
3
Loosen the viewfinder left-right positioning ring.
Slide the viewfinder to the most convenient position.
Tighten the viewfinder left-right positioning ring.
BRIGHT control
To store the camcorder in the carrying case
Always store the camcorder with the viewfinder moved
fully in the direction opposite to the barrel and the
viewfinder left-right positioning ring tightened.
CONTRAST
control
PEAKING
control
Adjusting the position backward or
forward
Proceed as follows.
Adjusting the viewfinder screen
Adjusting the position backward or forward
156
9-2 Adjusting the Viewfinder
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Fit two of the four holes in the back of the viewfinder
shoe over the upper two pins on the fixing plate. Make
sure that the triangular mark on the viewfinder shoe is
pointing up.
9-2-3 Detaching the Viewfinder
Viewfinder stopper
Pins
Fit these holes over
the pins.
Triangular mark
3
Using the bolts and spring washers removed in step 1,
fix the viewfinder shoe to the camcorder.
Detaching the viewfinder
1
2
3
Point the viewfinder barrel up or down.
Loosen the viewfinder left-right positioning ring.
Holding the viewfinder stopper up, slide the
viewfinder in the direction indicated by the arrow and
detach it.
4
Remove the viewfinder cable and microphone cable
from the clamps and disconnect them.
9-2-4 Moving the Viewfinder Shoe
Up
9-2-5 Using the BKW-401
Viewfinder Rotation Bracket
1
Using a hexagonal wrench 2.5 mm across flats,
remove the bolts (M3 × 25) and spring washers, to
detach the viewfinder shoe from the camcorder body.
By fitting a BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket (not
supplied), you can rotate the viewfinder out of the way so
that your right leg does not hit the viewfinder while you are
carrying the camcorder.
Viewfinder shoe assembly (A-8278-412-G)
Using the BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket
To fit the BKW-401 to the camcorder, proceed as follows.
9-2 Adjusting the Viewfinder
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
Turn the arm of the rotation mechanism assembly of
the BKW-401 in the direction of the arrow in the
following illustration.
Next, using a hexagonal wrench 3 mm across flats,
remove the bolts (M4 × 8), to separate the rotation
mechanism assembly from the viewfinder front-back
positioning mechanism assembly.
9-2-6 Detaching the Eyepiece
Removing the eyepiece gives a clearer view of the screen
from further away. It is also easy to remove dust from the
viewfinder screen and mirror when the eyepiece is
detached.
1
Turn the eyepiece locking ring fully counterclockwise,
to align the red marks on the locking ring and the
viewfinder barrel.
2
3
Remove the two M3 × 10 hexagon socket bolts from
the front-back positioning mechanism assembly,
together with the washers. Take care not to lose these
bolts and washers.
Red mark
Red mark
Hexagon socket bolts
(M3 × 10)
Line up the red marks.
Locking ring
Using a hexagonal wrench 2.5 mm across flats, detach
the viewfinder shoe from the camcorder body.
2
Detach the eyepiece.
Reattaching the eyepiece
1
2
Align the red marks on the eyepiece locking ring and
the viewfinder barrel.
4
Using the two bolts (M3 × 10) and washers removed in
step 2, attach the rotation mechanism assembly of the
BKW-401 to the camcorder.
Align the red mark on the end of the eyepiece end with
the red marks on the eyepiece locking ring and the
viewfinder barrel. Then insert the eyepiece into the
viewfinder barrel.
158
9-2 Adjusting the Viewfinder
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-3 Mounting the Lens
To mount the lens, proceed as follows.
For information about using the lens, refer to the lens
manual.
Red mark on the end of the eyepiece
Lens mount
securing rubber
3
Turn the eyepiece locking ring clockwise until its
“LOCK” arrow points at the red mark on the
viewfinder barrel.
Note
When the eyecup is worn out, replace it with a new one
(service part number 3-723-079-03).
(The camcorder was shipped with an eyecup whose part
number is 3-776-341-01.)
Mounting the lens
1
2
3
Push the lens locking lever up and remove the lens
mount cap from the lens mount.
Align the center slot in the lens mount with the center
pin on the lens, and insert the lens into the mount.
Holding the lens in place, push the lens locking lever
down to mount the lens.
Note
If the lens is not firmly locked, it may come off while
the camcorder is being used. This could cause a serious
accident. Make sure the lens is firmly locked. It is
recommended that the lens mount securing rubber be
put on the lens-locking lever as illustrated above.
4
5
Connect the lens cable to the LENS connector.
Secure the lens cable with the cable clamps.
9-3 Mounting the Lens
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-4 Adjusting the Flange 9-5 Audio Input System
Focal Length
9-5-1 Using the Supplied
If the lens does not stay in focus properly as you zoom
from telephoto to wide angle, adjust the flange focal length
Microphone
(the distance from the plane of the lens mounting flange to
the imaging plane). Make this adjustment after mounting
or changing the lens.
You can use the supplied microphone either detached from
or attached to the camcorder.
Using the microphone detached from the
camcorder
Adjusting the flange focal length
The position of the controls for adjusting the flange focal
length vary somewhat from lens to lens. Check the
identification of the various controls in the lens manual.
Connect to the MIC IN connector.
Set the AUDIO IN switch for the desired
audio recording channel to FRONT.
About 3 m (10 ft)
Adjusting the flange focal length
Using the microphone detached from the camcorder
1
2
Set the iris to manual.
Note
Open the iris. Place the flange focal length adjustment
chart about 3 m (10 ft) away from the camera, lit well
enough to provide a satisfactory video output level.
When using the supplied microphone with an extension
cable, always use an external power supply type cable.
Using the microphone attached to the
camcorder
3
Loosen the fixing screws on the F.f or F.B ring (flange
focal length adjustment ring).
1
Loosen the screw and open the microphone holder
clamp.
4
5
Use manual or power zoom to set the lens to telephoto.
Point the camera at the chart by turning the focus ring
and focus on it.
6
7
Set the zoom ring to wide angle.
Clamp of the
Microphone holder
Turn the F.f or F.B ring until the chart is in focus,
being careful not to disturb the focus ring.
8
9
Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the chart stays in focus all the
way from wide angle to telephoto.
Tighten the F.f or F.B ring fixing screws.
160
9-4 Adjusting the Flange Focal Length / 9-5 Audio Input System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Place the microphone in the microphone holder.
Place the microphone in
the holder so that “UP” is at
Tighten the screw.
the top.
+48V/OFF switch
Monaural
microphone
Close the microphone holder.
AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2
connector
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches
Using an external microphone (not attached to the camcorder)
3
Plug the microphone cable into the MIC IN connector,
then set the AUDIO IN switch for the desired
recording channel to FRONT or F.
XLR connection automatic detection function
With the XLR connection automatic detection function
being on, when a cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1
or CH2 connector, the input from that connector is
automatically selected for audio recording, regardless of
the setting of the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch.
The XLR connection automatic detection function can be
switched on or off on the AUDIO-1 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu, with the REAR XLR AUTO
item.
Connect to the MIC IN connector.
Note
In order for the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 connectors on
the camcorder to be able to provide a phantom 48 V power
supply, female XLR connectors (3-pin) are fitted. If the
microphone cable has a female connector, use an adaptor.
4
Secure the microphone cable with the cable clamp.
9-5-2 Using an External Microphone
Using an external microphone attached to
the camcorder
You can attach an external microphone to the camcorder.
You can connect up to two external monaural microphones
using the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 connectors.
1
Remove the fixing screws for external microphone
holder.
Switch settings when using an external
microphone
When using an external microphone, make the following
switch settings.
• Set the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector to MIC.
• Make the following setting, depending on the type of
microphone used.
Using a microphone with an internal power supply:
set the +48V/OFF switch to OFF.
Using a microphone with an external power supply:
set the +48V/OFF switch to +48V.
• If the XLR connection automatic detection function (see
next item) is off (the factory default setting), set the
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switch for the channel to which
the microphone is connected to “REAR”.
2
Attach the CAC-12 Microphone Holder.
9-5 Audio Input System
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note
When you detach the CAC-12 Microphone Holder
once you have attached to the camcorder, be careful
not to lose the two screws fixing the CAC-12. After
detaching the CAC-12, be sure to put the two screws
back into their original places (see the figure
illustrating the step 1 operation).
Screws removed
in step 1
CAC-12
9-5-3 Attaching a UHF Portable
Tuner (for a UHF Wireless
Microphone System)
3
Open the CAC-12 and remove the microphone
adaptor.
To use a Sony UHF wireless microphone system, fit one of
the following UHF portable tuners.
Open the CAC-12.
• WRR-855A/855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit
• WRR-862 UHF Portable Tuner.
For each of these UHF portable tuners, use the following
attachment procedure.
Microphone
adaptor
1)
For details, refer to the UHF portable turner manual.
Loosen the screw.
Fitting the WRR-855A/855B
You can use the WRR-855A/855B UHF Synthesized
Tuner Unit simply by inserting it into the slot in the
camcorder, and fastening the fixing screws.
1) Attach the microphone adaptor when using a small-diameter external
microphone.
4
Place an electret condenser microphone in the CAC-
12.
1
Undo the four fixing screws holding the cover of the
slot, and remove the cover.
Close the CAC-12.
ECM-672 or
similar
microphone
Tighten the screw.
m
2
Insert the WRR-855A/855B, and fasten the four fixing
screws.
5
Connect the microphone cable to the AUDIO IN CH1
or AUDIO IN CH2 connector. Set the switches as
described in the section “Switch settings when using
162
9-5 Audio Input System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For details about attaching the BP-GL65/GL95/L60S/
M100 Battery Pack, see 9-1-1 “Using a Battery Pack”
WRR-855A/
855B
BP-GL65/GL95/L60S/
L80S
Set the AUDIO IN switch (see page 161)
to WIRELESS for the channel to be used.
Adjustment screws
Mount plate
(supplied with WRR-862)
For the operation of the WRR-855A/855B, refer to the
manual supplied with the WRR-855A/855B.
Back of
camcorder
Notes
Phillips type screwdriver
• When the XLR connection automatic detection function
is on, even if the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch is set
to WIRELESS, the signal input to the AUDIO IN CH1
or CH2 connector is automatically selected when an
audio cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2
connector. In such a case, set REAR XLR AUTO to OFF
on the AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.
• The audio signals to be recorded on audio channels 3 and
4 depend on the settings of the AUDIO IN CH-3/CH-4
switches without being affected by the XLR connection
automatic detection function.
2
Mount the tuner on the WRR tuner fitting.
WRR-862
Fitting the WRR-862 (Using a BP-GL65/
GL95/L60S/L80S Battery Pack)
1
(1) Attach the WRR tuner fitting (not supplied,
service part number: A-8278-057-A) to the back
of the camcorder.
3
4
Connect the tuner power cord to the DC OUT
connector of the camcorder, and the audio output cable
to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector.
1 Use a Phillips type screwdriver to tighten the
four screws placed in the tuner fitting. For
three of these screws, insert the screwdriver
through the corresponding hole and tighten the
screw.
Set the switches as follows.
• Set the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC switch for the
channel to which the audio out cable is attached to
MIC.
2 Loosen the adjustment screws.
• When the XLR connection automatic detection
function is off, set the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2
switch for the channel to which the audio output
cable is connected to REAR.
If the XLR connection automatic detection function
is on, the input signal for audio recording is selected
automatically, and therefore this setting is not
required.
3 Adjust the tuner fitting position for a BP-
GL65/GL95/L60S/L80S Battery Pack to be
attached, and tighten the adjustment screws to
fix its position.
4 Attach the mount plate supplied with the
WRR-862.
(2) Attach the battery pack.
9-5 Audio Input System
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LINE/AES/EBU/
MIC switch
LINE /AES/EBU /
MIC switch
Audio equipment
to AUDIO IN
CH1 or CH2
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2
switches
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches
to DC OUT connector
to AUDIO IN CH1 or
CH2 connector
Line input connection
9-5-4 Connecting Line Input Audio
Equipment
Connect the audio output connector of the audio
equipment that supplies the line input signal to the AUDIO
IN CH1 or CH2 connector.
Switch settings
Set the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC switch for the channel to
which the audio signal source is connected to “LINE”.
Selecting the audio inputs to be recorded
• With the XLR connection automatic detection function
being off (the factory default setting): A signal must be
selected for audio recording by setting the AUDIO IN
CH-1 or CH-2 switch to “REAR”, depending on which
of the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 connectors is used for
connecting the external audio equipment.
• With the XLR connection detection function being on:
When a cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 or
CH2 connector, the input from that connector is
automatically selected for audio recording, regardless of
the setting of the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch.
The XLR connection automatic detection function can be
switched on or off on the AUDIO-1 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu, with the REAR XLR AUTO
item.
164
9-5 Audio Input System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note
The tripod adaptor pin may remain in the engaged position
even after the camcorder is removed. If this happens, press
the red button against the lever a second time and move the
lever as shown below until the pin returns to the stowed
position. If the pin remains in the engaged position, you
will not be able to mount the camcorder on the tripod
adaptor.
9-6 Tripod Mounting
You can easily mount and dismount the camcorder on a
tripod by using the VCT-14 tripod adaptor (not supplied).
1
Attach the tripod adaptor to the tripod.
Stowed position
Tripod adaptor
Camera mount
Pin
If the pin remains in the engaged position
2
Mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor.
Slide the camcorder
forward along the
groove in the adaptor
until it clicks.
Removing the camcorder from the tripod
adaptor
Whilepressing
the red button
against the
lever, move
the lever in the
direction
indicated by
the arrow.
Red button
Lever
Removing the camcorder from the tripod adaptor
9-6 Tripod Mounting
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-7 Attaching the
Shoulder Strap
9-8 Adjusting the
Shoulder Pad
Position
Attach the supplied shoulder strap as shown below.
You can shift the shoulder pad from its center position
(factory setting) backward by up to 10 mm (3/8 inch) or
forward by up to 25 mm (1 inch). This adjustment helps
you get the best balance for shooting with the camcorder
on your shoulder.
Shoulder strap post
1,3
Bottom
Shoulder pad
2
Attaching the shoulder strap
Adjusting the shoulder pad position
Attaching
1
2
3
Raise the lever in the center of the shoulder pad to
unlock the shoulder pad.
Pull up the strap to lock
the fitting.
Clip
Slide the shoulder pad backward or forward until it is
in the most convenient position.
Bring down the lever to lock the shoulder pad in the
selected position.
Attaching the shoulder strap
Removing
Press here and pull in the direction
shown by the arrow to release.
Removing the shoulder strap
166
9-7 Attaching the Shoulder Strap / 9-8 Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To disable the camcorder REC START button and
the lens VTR button
On the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE
menu, set REC START/STOP to “RM”.
If the same function as that of the REC START button is
assigned to the ASSIGN 1/3/4 switch or the TURBO
GAIN button, this setting also disables these controls.
9-9 Connecting the
Remote Control Unit
Connecting the RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit
enables remote control of the principal camera functions.
Connecting the remote control unit to the REMOTE
connector (8-pin) automatically puts the camcorder into
remote control mode. If you disconnect the remote control
unit, the remote control mode is cancelled.
To enable the camcorder REC START button and
the lens VTR button
On the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE
menu, set REC START/STOP to “CAM”.
If the same function as that of the REC START button is
assigned to the ASSIGN 1/3/4 switch or the TURBO
GAIN button, this setting also enables these controls.
RM-B150/B750
To enable all of the camcorder REC START
button, the lens VTR button, and the remote
control unit VTR button
On the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE
menu, set REC START/STOP to “PARA”.
If the same function as that of the REC START button is
assigned to the ASSIGN 1/3/4 switch or the TURBO
GAIN button, this setting also enables these controls.
REMOTE
connector
Remote control cable
When the monitor is connected to the
MONITOR OUT connector of the remote
control unit
The MONITOR connector (BNC type) of the RM-B150/
B750 outputs the same signal as that from the TEST OUT
connector on the camcorder.
Use the black cable supplied with the RM-B150/B750 to
connect the monitor to the MONITOR connector on the
RM-B150/B750.
Camcorder switch functions when the
remote control unit is connected
The following switches on the camcorder do not function.
• GAIN selector
• OUTPUT/DCC switch
• WHITE BAL switch
• AUTO W/B BAL switch
• SHUTTER selector
• TURBO GAIN button (ASSIGN 1 switch to which the
TURBO GAIN function is assigned)
• REC START button (VTR button on the lens and the
ASSIGN 1/3/4 or the TURBO GAIN switch to which the
REC START/STOP function is assigned) (When the
REC START/STOP item on the FUNCTION 3 page of
the MAINTENANCE menu is set to RM.)
For details of the function of the REC START button, see
remote control unit is connected” on this page.
When the remote control unit is
disconnected from the camcorder
The camcorder settings return to the settings in effect
before the remote control unit was connected.
By making a menu setting, the setting of the paint
adjustment made with the remote control unit can be
retained even after the remote control unit is removed from
the camcorder.
For details, see “Structure of the paint adjustment data”
on the next page.
Paint adjustment when the remote control
unit is connected
The settings of the paint adjustment that were in effect the
last time the remote control unit was used are recalled.
Function of the REC START button when
the remote control unit is connected
You can select the function of the REC START button on
the camcorder when the remote control unit is connected,
using the REC START/STOP item on the FUNCTION 3
page of the MAINTENANCE menu.
9-9 Connecting the Remote Control Unit
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Structure of the paint adjustment data
independent data region will be renewed when you change
the settings on the remote control unit. Thus, the settings
of the paint data made with the remote control unit can be
retained even if the remote control unit is removed.
However, if the switch position on the remote control unit
differs from the one on the camcorder, the switch position
on the camcorder takes precedence over that on the remote
control unit.
Also, it is possible to keep the settings that are in effect
before you connect the remote control unit. In this case,
you should set the control knob to the relative value mode
on the remote control unit.
Non-volatile memory
Independent data
region
MASTER BLACK
MASTER GAMMA
KNEE POINT
Setup
DETAIL LEVEL
menu of
R/B GAIN
the
cam-
corder
R/B BLACK
Hardware
of the
camera
RM-
For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with
the remote control unit.
B150
Remote control data
region
MASTER BLACK
MASTER GAMMA
KNEE POINT
DETAIL LEVEL
R/B GAIN
RM-B150
connected
or not
R/B BLACK
connected
As the illustration above shows, the non-volatile memory
of the camcorder consists of two regions: one is the
independent data region that becomes effective when the
remote control unit is not connected, and the other is the
remote control data region that becomes effective when the
remote control unit is connected. Paint adjustment data is
automatically selected depending on whether or not the
remote control unit is connected to the camcorder.
Thus, when the remote control unit is connected to the
camcorder, the effective data region is switched to the
remote control data region and the settings of the paint
adjustment that were in effect the last time the remote
control unit was used are recalled.
1)
Settings of the absolute value control knobs and absolute
2)
value switches are overwritten by those on the remote
control unit after the remote control unit is connected.
1) Absolute value control knob
The data corresponding to the rotation degree (position) of the control
knobs is output. The data corresponding to the rotation amount is called
the relative value control knob.
2) Absolute value switch
Like the toggle switches or slide switches (except the momentary
switches), the switches (or controls) whose positions must coincide with
their functions are called absolute value switches.
When the remote control unit is removed from the
camcorder, the independent data region becomes effective.
Thus the camcorder will return to the settings that were in
effect before the remote control unit was connected.
When RM COMMON MEMORY is set to ON on the
FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, you
can use settings of the paint adjustment data stored in the
independent data region even if you connect the remote
control unit. In this case, the settings stored in the
168
9-9 Connecting the Remote Control Unit
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
10
Chapter
4
After confirming that the disc is not write-protected,
load the disc and close the disc compartment lid.
10-1 Testing the
Camcorder Before
Condensation
If you move the camcorder from a very cold place to a
warm place, or use it in a damp location, condensation may
form on the optical pickup. Then, if the camcorder is
operated in this state, recording and playback may not be
performed properly.
Do the following to prevent this from happening.
• When you move or operate the camcorder in an
environment where condensation may form, be sure to
load a disc in advance and close the disc compartment
lid.
Shooting
Check the functions of the camcorder before setting out for
a shooting session, preferably by operating the camcorder
together with a color video monitor.
10-1-1Preparations for Testing
• Whenever you turn on the power, check that the HUMID
indicator does not appear on the color LCD. If it
appears, wait until it disappears before loading a disc.
3
4
1
For details, see 3-1-4 “Loading and Unloading a Disc” on
10-1-2Testing the Camera
2
Set the switches and selectors as follows.
1
2
Attach a fully charged battery pack.
Iris: Automatic
Set the POWER switch to ON and check that the
HUMID indicator does not appear and that the BATT
indicator shows at least five segments.
• If the HUMID indicator appears, wait until it
disappears.
• If the BATT indicator does not show at least five
segments, replace the battery pack with a fully
charged one.
Zoom: SERVO/MAN
WHITE BAL: A or B
VDR SAVE/STBY: SAVE
GAIN: Set as low as possible.
OUTPUT/DCC: BARS
3
Check that there are no obstructions near the disc
compartment, and then press the EJECT button to
open the disc compartment lid.
10-1 Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
169
8
9
Set both of the AUDIO IN switches to FRONT, and
check that when sound is input to a microphone
connected to the MIC IN connector on the front of the
camcorder, the audio level indicators appear on the
viewfinder screen.
Testing the viewfinder
Proceed as follows.
1
2
Adjust the position of the viewfinder.
Check that the color bars are displayed on the
viewfinder screen, and adjust the BRIGHT,
CONTRAST, and PEAKING controls to give the best
color bar display.
Check that setting the ZEBRA switch to ON and OFF
makes the zebra pattern appear and disappear on the
viewfinder screen.
Note
3
Check each of the following operations.
The results of checking in steps 3 to 9 may not be as
expected, depending on the settings relating to the
viewfinder display function. In this case, set the desired
items on the VF DISP 1 and VF DISP 2 pages of the USER
menu.
• The menu is displayed on the viewfinder screen.
• Turn the MENU knob and check that the menu page
changes to the next page.
• Press the MENU knob and check that settings of
each item of the selected page are displayed.
• Turn the MENU knob and check that the b mark
moves within the page.
For details, see 7-2-2 “Selecting the Display Items” on
• Press the MENU knob and check that the b mark
placed before the item changes to a z mark and the
z mark placed before the setting of the item changes
to a ? mark.
• Turn the MENU knob and check that the setting of
the selected item changes.
Testing the iris and zoom functions
1
2
3
Set the zoom to automatic zoom mode and check that
the power zoom operates correctly.
Set the zoom to manual zoom mode and check the
zoom functions manually.
4
5
Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM, and change
the FILTER selector position in the sequence of 1, 2, 3
and 4.
Check that the FILTER indicator on the viewfinder
screen displays the correct numbers.
Set the iris switch on the lens to AUTO and point the
camera at objects of different brightness. Check that
the automatic iris adjustment operates correctly.
Carry out of the following operations, and check that
that the ! indicator lights if the corresponding item has
been turned on on the ‘!’ LED page of the USER
menu.
4
5
Set the iris switch on the lens to MANUAL and check
that turning the iris ring manually adjusts the iris
correctly.
• Set the gain to anything but 0 dB by using the GAIN
selector and the GAIN SW page of the
OPERATION menu.
Set the iris switch on the lens back to AUTO and check
the following points when the GAIN selector is moved
from L to M to H.
• Set the SHUTTER selector to ON.
• Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.
• Use the lens extender.
• Set the FILTER selector to other than the position
“1” (PDW-510/510P) or other than the position
“1B” (PDW-530/530P).
• For objects of the same brightness, the iris is
adjusted to correspond to the change in setting.
• The gain indicator on the viewfinder screen changes
to correspond to the change in setting.
6
If an extender mechanism is incorporated in your lens,
put the extender lever of the lens into the 2x position
and check the following points.
• Set the reference value of the auto iris to other than
the standard value.
6
7
Move the SHUTTER selector from ON to SELECT
repeatedly, and check that the shutter setting changes
on the viewfinder screen.
• The indication “EX” appears at the top left on the
viewfinder screen.
• The auto iris functions correctly.
Pointing the camera at a suitable subject, focus the
camera and check the picture on the viewfinder screen.
10-1-3Testing the VDR
Perform tests (1) to (7) consecutively.
170
10-1 Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 switches to
AUTO.
(1) Testing the recording and playback
functions
3
4
Set the AUDIO IN CH-3/CH-4 switches to F (front).
1
2
3
Set the VDR SAVE/STBY switch to SAVE and check
that the SAVE indicator in the viewfinder goes on.
Aim the microphone connected to the MIC IN
connector at a suitable sound source. Check that the
level indications for channels 1 to 4 correspond to the
sound level, respectively.
Set the VDR SAVE/STBY switch to STBY and check
that the SAVE indicator in the viewfinder goes off.
Set the switches located below the color LCD as
follows.
(3) Testing the manual audio level
adjusting functions
LCD switch: L or H
DISP SEL switch: STATUS
DISPLAY switch: COUNTER
1
2
Set the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches to FRONT.
Turn the MIC LEVEL control. Check that the channel-
1 and -2 audio level meters on the color and
monochrome LCDs show more and more segments as
you turn the control counterclockwise as seen from the
front of the camcorder.
4
5
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to PRESET,
and set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN to R-RUN.
Press the REC START button and check the following
points.
• The indication in the counter display is changing.
• The REC indicator in the viewfinder is on.
• The RF and SERVO indicators on the color LCD are
off.
(4) Testing the earphone and speaker
1
2
Turn the MONITOR volume control and check that
the speaker volume changes accordingly.
6
7
Press the REC START button again and check that
recording stops and that the REC indicator in the
viewfinder goes off.
Connect an earphone to the front or rear EARPHONE
jack. Check that the speaker sound is cut off and that
you can hear the sound from the microphone in the
earphone.
Repeat the checks of steps 5 and 6, this time using the
VTR button on the lens.
3
4
Turn the MONITOR volume control and check that
the earphone volume changes accordingly.
Press the RESET button and check that the indication
in the counter display on each of the color and
monochrome LCDs is “00:00:00:00”.
Connect the earphone to the other EARPHONE jack.
Check the earphone as in step 3.
8
9
Press the F REV button and check that fast reverse
playback is performed. Next, press the PLAY button
and check that normal playback is performed.
(5) Testing external microphones
You can do this test by using both of the AUDIO IN CH1
and CH2 connectors simultaneously. Alternatively, you
can do the test by using one of the connectors, and then
execute the same procedure using the other connector.
The following is the testing procedure when both
connectors are used.
Press the STOP button and check that playback stops.
Next, press the F FWD button and check that fast
forward playback is performed.
10Press the STOP button again, then press the PREV
button. Check that the image of the beginning of the
current or previous clip is displayed.
1
2
Connect external microphones to the AUDIO IN CH1/
CH2 connectors.
11Press the NEXT button, and check that the image of
Set the +48V/OFF switches as follows.
the beginning of the next clip is displayed.
• If the connected microphone is of the internal power
supply type, set the switch to OFF.
• If the connected microphone is of the external power
supply type, set the switch to +48V.
(2) Testing the automatic audio level
adjusting functions
1
Set the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches to FRONT.
3
Set the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches to REAR.
10-1 Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
5
Aim the microphones at a sound source.
6
7
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN, and
check that the time code indication starts changing
again and continues to change even when you restart
recording and stop recording again.
Check that the audio level meters on the color and
monochrome LCDs and the audio level indicators in
the viewfinder reflect the changing sound level.
Set the DISPLAY switch to U-BIT, and check that the
user bit data that was set is displayed.
(6) Checking the XLR connection
automatic detection function
Before starting to check, remove the front microphone
connected to the MIC IN connector if it is connected.
1
Perform the operations of steps 1 and 2 explained in
(5) “Testing external microphones”.
2
3
Set the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches to FRONT.
Perform the operations of steps 4 and 5 explained in
(5) “Testing external microphones”.
If the audio level meters on the color and monochrome
LCDs and the audio level indicators in the viewfinder
reflect the changing sound level, the function of the
XLR connection automatic detection is working
correctly.
If it does not reflect the changing sound level, the
function of the XLR connection automatic detection
function is off. Set REAR XLR AUTO to “ON” on the
VDR MODE 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.
If it does not reflect even after making this setting, the
XLR connection automatic detection function does not
work correctly.
(7) Checking the user bit and time code
functions
1
Set the user bits as required.
For the operation, see 5-6-3 “Setting the User Bits”
2
Set the time code.
For the operation, see 5-6-1 “Setting the Time Code”
3
4
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN.
Press the REC START button, and check that
recording starts and that the time code indication in the
counter display changes.
5
Press the REC START button again, and check that
recording stops and that the time code indication stops
changing.
172
10-1 Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Be sure to correctly assemble the fog-proof filter, the
packing ring, and the eyecup so that the reassembled
eyepiece is waterproof.
10-2 Maintenance
Note
10-2-1Cleaning the Viewfinder
When cleaning the fog-proof filter, wipe it very gently
with a soft cloth to avoid damaging the anti-fogging
coating.
Use a dust blower to clean the CRT screen and mirror
inside the viewfinder barrel.
Clean the lens and protecting filter with a commercially
available lens cleaner.
10-2-2Note About the Battery
Terminal
Caution
The battery terminal of this unit (the connector for battery
packs and AC adaptors) is a consumable part.
Never use organic solvents such as thinners.
The unit may not operate properly if the pins of the battery
terminal are bent or deformed by shock or vibrations, or if
they become corroded due to prolonged outdoor use.
If you notice bending, deformation, or surface corrosion,
contact your dealer or a Sony service representative as
soon as possible to have the battery terminal replaced.
Periodic inspections are recommended to keep the unit
working properly and to prolong its usable lifetime.
Contact your dealer or a Sony service representative for
more information about inspections.
Disassembling the eyepiece for cleaning
Viewfinder Eyecup
barrel
holder
Eyecup
Protecting
filter
Packing
ring
1
Detach the eyepiece from the viewfinder barrel.
For the detaching procedure, see 9-2-6 “Detaching
2
3
Remove the eyecup from the eyecup holder.
Remove the protecting filter, together with the packing
ring, from inside the eyecup holder.
4
Detach the protecting filter from the packing ring.
Fog-proof filter
Depending on the temperature and humidity, the
protecting filter may mist because of vapor or your breath.
To ensure that the viewfinder is always clear, replace the
protecting filter with a fog-proof filter (Part No. 1-547-
341-11, not supplied).
Fitting the fog-proof filter
Replace the protecting filter on the packing ring with the
fog-proof filter.
10-2 Maintenance
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-3 Operation Warnings
When a problem occurs at power on or during operation, a
warning is given by the relevant indicators on the color and
monochrome LCDs, in the viewfinder and on the
camcorder body. The speaker and earphone also give
audible warnings.
Operation warnings
Alarm
Indicators on color/ Indicators in viewfinder/
Warning
sounds
Problem VDR
operation
Action to take
Message monochrome LCDs on camcorder body
Warning/ Flashing/
:
:Continuous
:4 flashes/s
:1 flash/s
Battery
status
indication
continuous
4 beeps/s
:
WARNING REC/tally BATT
1 beep/s
:
Continuou
s beep
**-
** 1)
–
–
–
–
–
Recording Recording
error stops.
Turn off the power
and consult your
Sony representative.
E
2)
2)
2)
2)
2)
2)
MEM Full
ILL.REC!
–
–
Shockproo Recording
f memory continuous but shocks and vibration.
Protect the unit from
overflow
may be
substandard.
–
–
Input sync Recording
Turn off the power
error
continuous but and contact your
may be
Sony service
substandard.
representative. (This
indication may be
given momentarily
when a GENLOCK
signal is connected or
disconnected, but this
does not indicate a
problem.)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Disc Error!
HUMID!
Before
–
–
–
A disc
defect was continues,
detected.
Recording
If defects are
detected repeatedly,
exchange the disc.
avoiding the
defect, but
may be
substandard.
2)
2)
3)
–
Continuous
Condensa- Recording/
tion on the playback
optical
pickup.
Stop recording/
playback, turn off the
continues but power, then turn it on
stops when an again, and wait until
error occurs
on the drive.
the HUMID indicator
disappears.
4)
2)
2)
2)
6)
7)
DISC
Disc
Operation
Be prepared to
change the disc.
Flashing
8)
almost full. continues.
Full
5)
6)
6)
DISC
FULL!
DISC and
E
Disc full.
Recording
stops.
Change the disc.
Flashing
6)
4)
7)
LOW
BATT
Battery
almost
exhausted.
Operation
continues.
Change the battery.
Flashing
8)
5)
BATT!
5)
BATT
EMPTY!
BATT and
E
Battery
exhausted. stops.
Operation
Change the battery.
Flashing
High
TEMP!
–
–
–
Internal
temperatur continues.
e high.
Operation
Power the unit off and
move it to a cool
place.
174
10-3 Operation Warnings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm
Indicators on color/ Indicators in viewfinder/
Warning
sounds
Problem VDR
operation
Action to take
Message monochrome LCDs on camcorder body
Warning/ Flashing/
:
:Continuous
:4 flashes/s
:1 flash/s
Battery
status
indication
continuous
4 beeps/s
:
WARNING REC/tally BATT
1 beep/s
:
Continuou
s beep
ACC
Sensor!
–
–
–
Internal
drive
sensor
error
Operation
continues.
Protect the unit from
shock and vibrations,
turn off the power,
and contact a Sony
service
Skew!
Sensor
representative.
1) Asterisks (*) are replaced by digits in the display.
2) During recording
6) During recording pause
7) During recording or pause
3) During playback, fast forward, fast reverse, or stop
4) 1 flash/second
8) During recording, displayed in color LCD only (when the DISP SEL
switch is set to STATUS)
5) 4 flashes/second
Operation/error messages
An operation or error message is displayed in the
viewfinder.
Message
Meaning and action to take
No Support!
A recorded clip cannot be handled by this
unit. Exchange or format the disc.
FORMAT NG! The disc cannot be used by this unit.
Exchange the disc.
Operation/error
message
Meaning
Disc Damage
The disc cannot be recorded. To record,
exchange the disc.
AUTO INTERVAL
**M**S
Indicates the camera is in the Auto
Interval Rec mode. **M**S indicates
the shooting interval.
Non AV Full
MAX # Files
The disc is full. Exchange or format the
disc.
MANU INTERVAL Indicates the camera is in the single
*FRAME
shot mode of the Manual Interval Rec
mode. *FRAME indicates the number
of frames.
DI read err
Read err
DRV ADJ err
The disc was not recognized. Try ejecting
the disc and inserting it again. Or
exchange the disc.
INTERVAL **S(M/ Indicates the camera is in the
Run Salvage
Salvage NG
REC INHI.!
Salvage processing needs to be done on
the disc. To record on the disc, eject the
disc, insert it again, and execute salvage
processing.
H)*FRAME
consecutive mode of the Manual
Interval Rec mode. **S(M/H) indicates
the trigger interval and *FRAME
indicates the number of frames.
Salvage processing failed. For details, see
3-1-6 “Handling of Discs When Recording
LOW LIGHT
Appears, depending on the setting, to
indicate the subject illumination is
inadequate.
ON-BOARD
Appears when the backup battery for
The Write Inhibit tab of the disc is in the
recording disabled position, or salvage
processing needs to be done on the
loaded disc. Set the tab to the recording
enabled position. Or eject the disc, insert it
again, and perform salvage processing.
1)
BATTERY EMPTY
the internal clock has been used up.
HIGH
TEMPERATURE
Indicates that temperatures have risen
inside the unit. Avoid continued use in
this state.
1) To replace the backup battery, contact your nearest Sony dealer.
1)
The loaded disc has a different recording
format. Exchange the disc, or change the
recording format.
IMX** Clip
DVCAM Clip
4CH/24 Clip
8CH/16 Clip
A message for DVR operation is displayed in the setting
change and adjustment progress message display area in
Index File!
There is an unsupported index file on the
disc to which you are trying to record.
Exchange or format the disc.
Message
Meaning and action to take
ILL. Disc!
The disc cannot be used by this unit. Insert
another Professional Disc.
File System
There is an unsupported file system on the
disc to which you are trying to record.
Exchange or format the disc.
ILL. Index!
No FS!
Index file or file system error. Exchange or
format the disc.
Unknown FS!
10-3 Operation Warnings
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Phenomena specific to CCD image
sensors
The following phenomena that may appear in images are
specific to CCD (Charge Coupled Device) image sensors.
They do not indicate malfunctions.
Message
Meaning and action to take
2)
Disc operations are not possible when the
DC IN connector is not connected and the
CA-755 is being used.
KEY INHI.!
ILL. PLAY
Lid Closed!
Lid Open!
No Clip!
An A/V phase error occurred during
playback. Stop the disc.
White flecks
The lid of the disc compartment does not
open. Check the lid.
Although the CCD image sensors are produced with high-
precision technologies, fine white flecks may be generated
on the screen in rare cases, caused by cosmic rays, etc.
This is related to the principle of CCD image sensors and
is not a malfunction.
The lid of the disc compartment is not
closed. Close it securely.
There are no clips recorded on the disc.
Exchange for a recorded disc.
No Disc!
There is no disc loaded. Insert a disc and
try the operation again.
The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the following
cases:
• when operating at a high environmental temperature
• when you have raised the master gain (sensitivity)
• when operating in Slow-Shutter mode
STOP ONCE! The operation is not possible while the disc
REC mode!
is being played or recorded. Stop the disc.
Disc Top!
Disc End!
The operation is not possible because the
disc is at the top or end.
Formatting!
The disc is being automatically formatted.
Wait until the format ends.
This product has a compensation function and the problem
may be alleviated by automatic black balance adjustment
Live Logg!
The operation you attempted is not
possible in Live Logging mode.Turn Live
Logging mode off and try again.
Vertical smear
When an extremely bright object, such as a strong spotlight
or flashlight, is being shot, vertical tails may be produced
on the screen, or the image may be distorted.
Recording
The unit is writing to the file system. Wait
until writing finishes.
No EM Space Essence marks cannot be inserted. For
EM Full!
details, see 3-2-3 “Recording Essence
SB CLP mode Try the operation again after pressing the
SUB CLIP button to turn off the sub clip
indicator.
Vertical tails shown on the
image.
Monitor screen
No SEL List
No clip list is selected. Create a new clip
list, or load a clip list from the disc.
No List!
There is no clip list. Create a clip list.
Bright object (e.g. strong
spotlight, strong reflected
light, flashlight, the sun)
No SUB Clip
There are no sub clips in the clip list.
Register a sub clip, or load another clip list.
SUB Clip NG
The In and Out point positions are invalid.
Set correct In and Out points.
MAX# SB CLP The total number of sub clips is over the
upper limit (300).
Aliasing
CL OVER DUR The total duration of sub clips in the current
clip list is over the upper limit (24 hours).
When fine patterns, stripes, or lines are shot, they may
appear jagged or flicker.
FAN Stopped! The main unit or drive fan has stopped.
DR-FAN Stop
Avoid use under high temperatures, turn
off the power, and contact a Sony service
representative.
MEM REC NG! (only when CBK-PC01 is installed)
Proxy data recording failed because the
memory card ran out of memory.Exchange
the memory card, and copy the proxy data
that could not be recorded.
1) “**” indicates the bit rate (50/40/30).
2) REC INHI.! appears if you attempt to start recording.
176
10-3 Operation Warnings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendixes
Dimensions in mm (inches)
Specifications
General
Power voltage
12 V DC +5.0/–1.0 V
Power consumption
Approx. 32 W (with 12 V DC supply, when
recording with the color LCD off)
Operating temperature
–5°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)
Operating humidity
10% to 90% (relative humidity)
Storage temperature
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)
Recording format
Video: MPEG IMX (50/40/30 Mbps), DVCAM (25
332 (13 1/8)
Supplied accessories
Shoulder strap (1)
Monaural microphone (super cardioid directional,
external power supply type) (1)
Operation manuals
Mbps)
Proxy video: MPEG-4
Audio:
English version (1)
Japanese version (1)
CD-ROM manual (1)
1)
MPEG IMX: 16 bits or 24 bits, 48 kHz,
4 channels
PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software (1)
DVCAM: 16 bits/48 kHz
Proxy audio: A-law (8/4 channels, 8 bits, 8 kHz)
Video Camera Section
1) The MPEG-4 CODEC is a product of Ingenient Technologies, Inc.
General
Imager
2
/ -inch type 16:9 widescreen Power HAD EX
3
Continuous operating time
CCD
Approx. 120 min. (with BP-GL95)
Mass Approx. 4.1 kg (9 lb) (main body only)
Approx. 5.7 kg (12 lb 9 oz) (with microphone,
viewfinder, disc and BP-GL95 Battery
Pack)
Total picture elements
1038 (H) × 1008 (V) for PDW-510/530
1038 (H) × 1188 (V) for PDW-510P/530P
Effective picture elements
980 (H) × 988 (V) for PDW-510/530
980 (H) × 1164(V) for PDW-510P/530P
Imager Configuration
RGB 3 CCDs
Spectral system
F1.4 prism system (with quartz filter)
Specifications
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Built-in filters
PDW-510/510P
Optical Disc Drive Section
CC + ND filter
1: 3200K
General
Usable disc
Data transfer rate
Recording/playback time
MPEG IMX 50Mbps: 45 minutes
1
2: 5600K + / ND
3: 5600K
4: 5600K + / ND
8
PFD23 Professional Disc
1
Max. 72Mbps (per optical head)
64
PDW-530/530P
CC filter
A: Cross filter
40Mbps: 55 minutes
30Mbps: 68 minutes
B: 3200K
C: 4300K
D: 6300K
DVCAM: 85 minutes
ND filter
1: Clear
Digital video
Sampling frequency
1
2: / ND
4
Y: 13.5 MHz
R–Y/B–Y: 6.75 MHz
1
3: / ND
16
1
4: / ND
64
Quantization
10 bits/sample (8 bits/sample for
compression processing)
2
Lens mount
Sensitivity
/ -inch 48 bayonet mount
3
Compression MPEG-2 4:2:2P@ML 50/40/30 Mbps or
DVCAM
F11 standard (89.9% reflection chart, 2000 lx)
Minimum illumination
Audio (with standard playback machine)
Frequency response 20 Hz to 20 kHz –1.0 dB
Dynamic range
Distortion (THD)
Cross talk
0.13 1x (at F1.4, +48 dB gain)
0.008 lx (F1.4, +48 dB, with 16-frame
accumulation)
85 dB min.
0.08% max.
–70 dB max.
Below measurable limit
Video S/N ratio
65 dB (Y typical) (for PDW-510/530)
63 dB (Y typical) (for PDW-510P/530P)
Modulation (at screen center)
Wow and flutter
4:3 mode: 55%
16:9 mode: 70%
Input/output connectors
Registration
Signal inputs
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2
0.05% or less for entire screen area (excluding
distortion due to lens)
Geometric distortion
XLR type, 3-pin, female
–60 dBu/+4 dBu
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms.)
None identified (excluding distortion due to
lens)
Smear
LCD panel
6.3 cm (2.5 inches)
–140 dB (Y-typical)
MIC IN
GENLOCK IN
XLR type, 3-pin, female –60 dBu
BNC type
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, unbalanced
BNC type
Pixel resolution: 211,200 pixels (960 wide ×
TC IN
220 high)
0.5 V to 18 Vp-p, 10 k Ω
Effective picture elements: more than 99.99%
Signal outputs
TEST OUT
BNC type
Viewfinder
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, unbalanced
CRT
Horizontal resolution
4:3 mode: 600 TV lines (at screen center)
16:9 mode: 450 TV lines (at screen center)
2-inch monochrome, quick start type
VIDEO OUT
BNC type, 75 Ω, unbalanced
VBS OUT: 1.0 Vp-p
SDI OUT: 0.8 Vp-p (only when the CBK-SD01 is
installed)
AUDIO OUT
TC OUT
EARPHONE (minijack)
XLR type, 5-pin, male, 0 dBm
BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω
8 Ω, –∞ to –18 dBs variable
Others
DC IN
XLR type, 4-pin, male, 11 to 17 V DC
178
Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DC OUT
4-pin, 11 to 17 V DC, maximum rated
For Audio equipment described above, confirm whether
the connector is male or female and the number of pins on
the connector.
current 0.2 A
12-pin
8-pin
2-pin
6-pin
LENS
REMOTE
LIGHT
i.LINK
The audio input connectors of the camcorder are female
and 3-pin and the audio output connectors are male and 5-
pin. A converting adaptor may be required depending on
the audio equipment to be connected to the camcorder.
Recommended Additional
Equipment
Extension boards
CBK-SD01 SDI Output Board
Power supply and related equipment
BP- GL65/GL95/L60S/L80S Battery Pack
BC-M50/L500/L70 Battery Charger
AC-550/550CE AC Adaptor
CBK-SC01 Composite Input Board
CBK-FC01 Pull Down Board (for the PDW-510/530 only)
CBK-NC01 Network Adaptor
CBK-PC01 Memory Card Adaptor
AC-DN10 AC Adaptor
CA-701/702/702P Camera Adaptor
Equipment for maintenance and easier
handling
Viewfinder and related equipment
LC-777 Hard Carrying Case
LC-DS300SFT Soft Carrying Case
Tripod Adaptor VCT-14
BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket
Fog-proof filter (Part No. 1-547-341-11)
Lens assembly (farsighted) (Part No. A-8262-537-A)
Lens assembly (low magnification) (Part No. A-8262-538-
A)
Lens assembly (standard magnification with special
compensation for aberrations) (Part
No. A-8267-737-A)
Maintenance Manual
Design and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
Notes
• Always make a test recording, and verify that it was
recorded successfully.
Optical attachments
SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF
ANY KIND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON
ACCOUNT OF FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS
RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL STORAGE
SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE
SYSTEMS TO RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE.
• Always verify that the unit is operating properly before
use. SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF
ANY KIND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON
ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS OF PRESENT OR
PROSPECTIVE PROFITS DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS
UNIT, EITHER DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD
OR AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE WARRANTY, OR
FOR ANY OTHER REASON WHATSOEVER.
1
ND filter ( / ND) (Part No. 3-174-685-01)
8
1
ND filter ( / ND) (Part No. 3-174-683-01)
32
Consult your Sony representative for more information
about these filters.
Equipment for remote control
RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit
Audio equipment
ECM-672 Microphone
CAC-12 Microphone Holder
CCXA-53 Audio Cable (for converting 5-pin connector to
two 3-pin connectors)
WRR-855A/855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit
WRR-862 UHF Portable Tuner
WRT-8T UHF Transmitter
WRR Tuner Fitting (service part number: A-8278-057-A)
STEREO MIC IN connector (MA-126A board)
(service part number: A-1053-453-A)
DMX-P01 Portable Digital Mixer
Specifications
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu List
This section briefly explains menus that the camcorder
provides for adjustments and settings using tables.
This manual also explains some adjustments and settings
to be made using the OPERATION menu, PAINT menu,
MAINTENANCE menu, FILE menu and DIAGNOSIS
menu.
For the menu organization and the USER menu, see
Chapter 6.
For details of these menus, refer to the Maintenance
Manual.
OPERATION Menu List
The following table lists and describes the items in the
OPERATION menu. Some pages of the OPERATION
menu have been registered in the USER menu at the
factory. These pages are indicated by a circle (a) in the
USER menu column. The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE
menu allows you to add and delete pages in the USER
menu to suit your requirements.
When the setting range in the Settings column is
surrounded by parentheses ( ), the setup value is a relative
value. The setting range shown on the menu screen may
differ from what is shown in the manual.
USER
menu
No.
Page
Item
Settings
Default
Description
a
01
OUTPUT
LCD BRIGHT <L>
LCD BRIGHT <H>
LCD COLOR
(–32 to +31)
(–32 to +31)
(–32 to +31)
AV/C/FAM
0
0
0
i.LINK MODE
AV/C
THROU
1)
PB WIDE ID (IMX)
(PDW-530/530P only)
THROU/AUTO
When playing back a disc
recorded as MPEG IMX 50/
40/30 Mbps, specifies
whether to add wide picture
information recorded on the
disc to the output signal.
THROU: Output the video
signals of the disc being
played back without
adding wide picture
information.
AUTO: When wide picture
information is detected
on the disc being played
back, add wide picture
information to the output
video signals.
REAR BNC OUT SEL
(when option board is
connected)
VBS/SDI
OFF/ON
VBS
OFF
1)
LIVE LOGGING
See 3-2-9 “Recording in Live
180
Menu List
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USER
menu
No.
Page
Item
Settings
Default
Description
a
02
TEST OUT
TEST OUT MARKER
OFF/ON
OFF
Selects whether or not the
marker signal is mixed to the
output signal from the TEST
OUT connector.
TEST OUT VFDISP
TEST OUT MENU
TEST OUT DISP SEL
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
VF/LCD
OFF
OFF
VF
Selects whether or not the VF
DISP display signal is mixed
to the output signal from the
TEST OUT connector.
Selects whether or not the
MENU display signal is mixed
to the output signal from the
TEST OUT connector.
Selects VF (viewfinder) or
LCD for the text information
mixed to the output signal
from the TEST OUT
connector.
TEST OUT ZEBRA
OFF/ON
OFF
Selects whether or not the
ZEBRA display signal is
mixed to the output signal
from the TEST OUT
connector.
TEST OUT TC
OFF/ON
OFF
ENC
Selects whether or not a time
code signal is mixed to the
output signal from the TEST
OUT connector.
TEST OUT SELECT
ENC/R/G/B
Selects the output signal of
TEST OUT.
Menu List
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USER
menu
No.
Page
Item
Settings
Default
Description
a
03
FUNCTION 1 ASSIGN SW <1>
OFF/CACHE/
ATW
See 7-3-5 “Assigning
CHARA/MARKR/
RTAKE/ATW/RET.V/
RET/REC/TURBO/
D5600/ZEBRA/
FREZE/M.FRZ etc.
ASSIGN SW <2>
OFF/CACHE/
OFF
CHARA/MARKR/
V.SRC/ZEBRA/
FREZE/5600 etc.
ASSIGN SW <3>
ASSIGN SW <4>
OFF/CACHE/
OFF
OFF
CHARA/MARKR/
RTAKE/ATW/RET.V/
RET/REC/TURBO/
ZEBRA/ZOOMW/
ZOOMT/FREZE/
M.FRZ etc.
TURBO SW
OFF/CACHE/
TURBO
CHARA/MARKR/
RTAKE/ATW/RET.V/
RET/REC/TURBO/
D5600/ZEBRA/
FREZE/M.FRZ etc.
DF/NDF
(PDW-510/530 only)
DF/NDF
DF
Switches between drop frame
(DF) mode and non-drop
frame (NDF) mode.
CACHE/INTVAL REC
OFF/CACHE/A.INT/ OFF
M.INT
See 3-2-4 “Starting a Shoot
Stored Picture Data (Picture
(CACHE)
CACHE REC TIME
0-2/2-4/4-6/6-8/8-10/ 0-2s
10-12s
(A.INT)
TAKE TOTAL TIME
5/10/15/20/30/40/50 5MIN
MIN,
1/2/3/4/5/7/10/15/20/
30/40/50/70/100 H
See 3-2-5 “Time-Lapse Video
(A.INT)
REC TIME
5/10/15/20/30/40/50 5SEC
SEC,
1 to 85 MIN
(A.INT or M.INT except
TRIGGER MODE:M)
PRE-LIGHTING
OFF/2SEC/5SEC/
10SEC
OFF
(M.INT)
1/2/4/8
1
NUMBER OF FRAME
(M.INT)
TRIGGER INTERVAL
M, 1 to 10/15/20/30/
40/50 SEC,
M
1 to 10/15/20/30/40/
50 MIN,
1/2/3/4/6/12/24H
182
Menu List
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USER
menu
No.
Page
Item
Settings
Default
Description
04
FUNCTION 2 D5600
OFF/ON
OFF
Turns on and off the function
which electrically applies a
5600K color temperature
filter.
WIDE AWB
OFF/ON
ON
Turns on and off the function
which widens the range
adjustable by Auto White
Balance.
WHITE SWTCH <B>
SHOCKLESS WHITE
MEM/ATW
OFF/1/2/3
MEM
1
Sets the function of the
WHITE BAL B switch.
Changes the white gain
smoothly when operating the
WHITE BAL switch.
ATW SPEED
1/2/3/4/5
4
Sets the convergence speed
for Auto Tracing White
balance.
ZOOM SPEED
LOW LIGHT
0 to 99
20
0
Sets the zoom speed when a
serial lens is connected.
–99 to +99
Turns the warning display on
or off when the video average
level is less than the preset
value.
LOW LIGHT LEVEL
VF BATT WARNING
–99 to +99
10/20%
16
Sets the level at which the
LOW LIGHT function
becomes effective.
10%
Sets the threshold value of
remaining battery capacity to
make the remaining capacity
indication flash.
05
06
POWER
SAVE
i.LINK OUT
ENABL/DSABL
EE/SAVE
STBY/SAVE
OFF/ON
1/2/3
DSABL
EE
REC AUDIO OUT
NETWORK/THUMB
VF DISP
STBY
ON
a
VF DISP 1
VF DISP MODE
DISP EXTENDER
DISP FILTER
3
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
INT/VOLT/AUTO
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
ON
ON
DISP WHITE
ON
DISP GAIN
ON
DISP SHUTTER
DISP AUDIO
ON
ON
DISP DISC
ON
DISP IRIS
ON
a
07
VF DISP 2
DISP ZOOM
ON
DISP COLOR TEMP
DISP BATT REMAIN
DISP DC IN
OFF
INT
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
DISP 16:9/4:3 ID
DISP WRR RF LVL
DISP TIME CODE
DISP REC FORMAT
Menu List
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USER
menu
No.
Page
Item
Settings
Default
Description
a
08
‘!’LED
GAIN
<!>
<!>
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
80/90/92/95%
OFF/ON
16:9/13:9/4:3
OFF/ON
1/2, 1/4, 1/8
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
1 to 465
ON
SHUTTER
ON
WHT PRESET<!>
ATW RUN <!>
EXTENDER <!>
FILTER <!>
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OVERRIDE <!>
MARKER
a
09
MARKER 1
OFF
OFF
OFF
90%
OFF
4:3
CENTER
SAFETY ZONE
SAFETY AREA
ASPECT
ASPECT SELECT
ASPECT MASK
ASPECT MASK LVL
100% MARKER
USER BOX
OFF
1/4
OFF
OFF
245
10
MARKER 2
Turns the box cursor on or off.
USER BOX WIDTH
Width (from the center to right
or left side)
USER BOX HEIGHT
1 to 120
72
Height (from the center to top
or bottom)
USER BOX H POS.
USER BOX V POS.
CENTER H POS.
–461 to +461
–118 to +118
–48 to +47
0
0
0
H position of the center
V position of the center
H position of the center
marker
CENTER V POS.
–15 to +14
0
V position of the center
marker
a
a
11
12
GAIN SW
GAIN LOW
–3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/ 0 dB
See 7-3-1 “Setting Gain
30/36/42/48 dB
GAIN MID
9 dB
GAIN HIGH
GAIN TURBO
TURBO SW IND.
18 dB
42 dB
OFF/ON
OFF
OFF
1
VF SETTING ZEBRA
ZEBRA SELECT
OFF/ON
1/2/BOTH
20 to 107%
1 to 20%
ZEBRA1 DET.LEVEL
ZEBRA1 APT.LEVEL
ZEBRA2 DET.LEVEL
VF DETAIL LEVEL
VF ASPECT
70%
10%
100%
0
52 to 109%
(–99 to +99)
AUTO/16:9
AUTO
184
Menu List
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USER
menu
No.
Page
Item
Settings
Default
Description
a
13
AUTO IRIS
IRIS OVERRIDE
IRIS SPEED
CLIP HIGH LIGHT
IRIS WINDOW
IRIS WINDOW IND.
IRIS VAR WIDTH
IRIS VAR HEIGHT
IRIS VAR H POS.
IRIS VAR V POS.
ID-1
OFF/ON
OFF
0
See 5-4 “Changing the
Automatic Iris Adjustment” on
(–99 to +99)
OFF/ON
OFF
1
1/2/3/4/5/6/VAR
OFF/ON
OFF
245
85/72
0
20 to 465
20 to 120
–447 to +446
–104 to +104
12 characters
0
a
a
14
15
SHOT ID
—
ID-2
ID-3
ID-4
SHOT DISP
SHOT DATE
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
See 7-2-6 “Recording Shot
SHOT TIME
SHOT MODEL NAME
SHOT SERIAL NO
SHOT ID SEL
OFF/ID-1/ID-2/ID-3/ OFF
ID-4
SHOT 16:9 ID
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF
OFF
ON
SHOT BLINK CHARA
a
16
17
SET STATUS STATUS ABNORMAL
STATUS FUNCTION
See 7-2-8 “Displaying the
ON
STATUS AUDIO
ON
OFFSET
WHT
OFFSET WHITE <A>
WARM-COOL <A>
OFF
3200
See 7-3-4 “Specifying an
Balance Setting” on page
133.
Display color
temperature
COLOR FINE <A>
OFFSET WHITE <B>
WARM-COOL <B>
(–99 to +99)
OFF/ON
0
OFF
3200
Display color
temperature
COLOR FINE <B>
(–99 to +99)
OFF/ON
0
18
SHT ENABLE SHUTTER SLS
SHUTTER ECS
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1
See 5-3 “Setting the
88.
OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/60
OFF/ON
The items which can be set
differ depending on the CCD
scan mode setting (see page
SHUTTER 1/100
SHUTTER 1/125
SHUTTER 1/250
SHUTTER 1/500
SHUTTER 1/1000
SHUTTER 1/2000
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
a
19
LENS FILE
LENS FILE SELECT
1 to 32
F.ID
(Display only)
(Display only)
(Display only)
—
L.ID
L.MF
—
—
Menu List
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USER
menu
No.
Page
Item
Settings
Default
Description
20
FORMAT
16:9/4:3 SELECT
SCAN MODE
16:9/4:3
16:9
I
I/PsF/24P
(24P only when
option board
installed)
UC/J SELECT
UC/J
UC
Selects the signal format.
(PDW-510/530 only)
21
SOURCE
SEL
REC VIDEO SOURCE
EXT REC CONTROL
i.LINK MODE
CAM/EXT
CAM
See 3-4 “Recording Video
OFF/ON
OFF
AV/C / FAM
MONO/STREO
AV/C
STREO
FRONT MIC SELECT
(when stereo microphone
is connected)
EXT VIDEO SOURCE
(when option board is
connected)
i.LINK/CMPST
SYNC/VIDEO
0.0/7.5
i.LINK
SYNC
EXT OUTPUT DELAY
(when option board is
connected)
SETUP REMOVE
(PDW-510/530 only)
7.5
—
22
23
UMID SET
COUNTRY CODE
ORGANIZATION
USER CODE
4-byte alphanumeric
strings
4-byte alphanumeric
strings
—
4-byte alphanumeric —
strings
TIME ZONE : 00
TITLE
00 to xx
DSABL/ENABL
—
00
1)
CLIP TITLE
DSABL
EXEC
See 3-2-8 “Assigning User-
Defined Clip Titles
SELECT PREFIX (When
the TITLE item is set to
“ENABL”)
CLEAR NUMERIC
(When the TITLE item is
set to “ENABL”)
—
—
EXEC
EXEC
TITLE
LOAD PREFIX DATA
(When the TITLE item is
set to “ENABL”)
PREFIX (When the
TITLE item is set to
“ENABL”)
Up to 10
alphanumeric
characters and
symbols
NUMERIC (When the
TITLE item is set to
“ENABL”)
5-digit number
00001
FILE
NAMING
NAMING FORM
C****/FREE
C****/TITLE
C****
C****
See 3-2-9 “Assigning User-
24
6)
AUTO NAMING (When
the NAMING FORM item
is set to “FREE”)
186
Menu List
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USER
menu
No.
Page
Item
Settings
Default
Description
25
MEMORY
REC
COPY CURRENT CLP
COPY ALL CLIPS
ABORT COPY
—
—
—
—
—
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
See 3-2-11 “Recording Proxy
CBK-PC01 Installed)” on
1)
DEL ALL MEM CLP
FORMAT MEMORY
1) This is supported from firmware version 1.4.
Menu List
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAINT Menu List
The following table lists and describes the items in the
PAINT menu.
value. The setting range shown on the menu screen may
differ from what is shown in the manual.
When the setting range in the Settings column is
surrounded by parentheses ( ), the setup value is a relative
No.
Page
Item
Settings
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
Default Description
01
SW STATUS
GAMMA
CHROMA
ON
ON
Turns the gamma correction on or off.
Turns the chroma of the composite signal on
or off.
MATRIX
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
ON/OFF
OFF/ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
Turns the linear matrix correction on or off.
Turns the knee correction on or off.
Turns the white clipping correction on or off.
Turns the detail signal on or off.
KNEE
WHITE CLIP
DETAIL
APERTURE
FLARE
Turns the aperture function on or off.
Turns the flare function on or off.
Turns the EVS shutter on or off.
EVS
TEST SAW
COLOR TEMP <A>
OFF/REC/SAW OFF
Selects the test signal.
02
WHITE
Display color
temperature
3200
Sets the color temperature of WHITE A.
COLOR FINE <A>
(–99 to +99)
0
Adjusts the value more precisely when the
color temperature adjustment through
COLOR TEMP is not satisfactory.
R GAIN <A>
B GAIN <A>
D5600K <A>
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
OFF/ON
0
Only the value of R GAIN is changed.
Only the value of B GAIN is changed.
0
OFF
Turns the WHITE A electronic 5600K filter on
or off.
COLOR TEMP <B>
COLOR FINE <B>
Display color
temperature
3200
0
Sets the color temperature of WHITE B.
(–99 to +99)
Adjusts the value more precisely when the
color temperature adjustment through
COLOR TEMP is not satisfactory.
R GAIN <B>
B GAIN <B>
D5600K <B>
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
OFF/ON
0
Only the value of R GAIN is changed.
Only the value of B GAIN is changed.
0
OFF
Turns the WHITE B electronic 5600K filter on
or off.
03
BLACK/FLARE MASTER BLACK
R BLACK
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
OFF/ON
0
Adjusts the master black level.
Adjusts the R black level.
0
B BLACK
0
Adjusts the B black level.
MASTER FLARE
R FLARE
0
Adjusts the flare level of the master.
Adjusts the R flare level.
0
G FLARE
0
Adjusts the G flare level.
B FLARE
0
Adjusts the B flare level.
FLARE
ON
ENC
Turns the flare correction circuit on or off.
TEST OUT SELECT
ENC/R/G/B
Selects the output signal of TEST OUT
connector.
188
Menu List
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Page
Item
Settings
Default Description
04
GAMMA
GAMMA
OFF/ON
ON
Turns the gamma correction function on or
off.
STEP GAMMA
0.35 to 0.90
0.45
Sets the master gamma correction curve in
steps.
MASTER GAMMA
R GAMMA
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
ENC/R/G/B
0
Sets the master gamma correction curve.
Sets the R gamma correction curve.
Sets the G gamma correction curve.
Sets the B gamma correction curve.
0
G GAMMA
0
B GAMMA
0
TEST OUT SELECT
ENC
Selects the output signal of TEST OUT
connector.
GAMMA SELECT
GAMMA SEL (STD)
GAMMA SEL (FILM)
STD/FILM
1 to 6
STD
3
Selects the gamma table.
Selects the gamma table of STD.
Selects the gamma table of FILM.
Turns the black gamma correction on or off.
Sets the range affected by black gamma.
1 to 5
1
05
BLACK GAMMA BLACK GAMMA
OFF/ON
OFF
HIGH
BLACK GAM RANGE LOW/L.MID/
H.MID/HIGH
MASTER BLK
GAMMA
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
ENC/R/G/B
0
Adjusts the master black gamma.
R BLACK GAMMA
G BLACK GAMMA
B BLACK GAMMA
TEST OUT SELECT
0
Sets the correction curve of the R black
gamma.
0
Sets the correction curve of the G black
gamma.
0
Sets the correction curve of the B black
gamma.
ENC
Selects the output signal of TEST OUT
connector.
06
KNEE
KNEE
OFF/ON
ON
85.0
0
Turns the knee correction circuit on or off.
Sets the knee point level.
KNEE POINT
KNEE SLOPE
KNEE SATURATION
KNEE SAT LEVEL
WHITE CLIP
WHITE CLIP LEVEL
DETAIL
50 to 109%
(–99 to +99)
OFF/ON
Set the knee slope level.
ON
0
Turns the knee saturation function on or off.
Sets the knee saturation level.
(–99 to +99)
OFF/ON
ON
Turns the white clipping function on or off.
Adjusts the white clipping level.
100.0 to 109.5% 109.0
07
DETAIL 1
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
ON
ON
Sets the detail correction function on or off.
APERTURE
Turns the aperture correction function on or
off.
DETAIL LEVEL
APERTURE LEVEL
DTL H/V RATIO
CRISPENING
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
OFF/ON
0
Sets the general level of the detail signal.
Sets the aperture level.
0
0
Sets the level of the V detail signal.
Sets the crispening level.
0
LEVEL DEPEND
ON
0
Turns the level depend function on or off.
Sets the level of the level depend.
Sets the frequency of the H detail signal.
LEVEL DEPEND LVL (–99 to +99)
DETAIL FREQUENCY (–99 to +99)
0
Menu List
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Page
Item
Settings
OFF/ON
Default Description
08
DETAIL 2
KNEE APERTURE
KNEE APT LVL
DETAIL COMB
OFF
Turns the knee aperture function on or off.
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to 0)
0
0
Sets the knee aperture level.
Sets the level at which the comb filter
becomes effective.
CROSS COLOR
CROSS COLOR LVL
DETAIL LIMIT
DTL WHT LIMIT
DTL BLK LMT
DTL V-BLK LMT
FINE DTL
ON/OFF
OFF
43
Turns the cross color component on or off.
Sets the suppression level of the cross color.
Sets the both detail black and white limiters.
Sets the detail white limiter.
(0 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
OFF/ON
0
0
Sets the detail black limiter.
0
Sets the V detail black limiter.
09
10
DETAIL 3
OFF
0
Turns the fine detail function on or off.
FINE DTL LVL
(–99 to +99)
Sets the level at which the fine detail function
becomes effective.
V DTL CREATION
NAM/G/R+G/Y
R+G
V
Selects the source signal of the V DTL signal.
H/V CONTROL MODE H/V / V
Select the operation mode of DETAIL H/V
RATIO on the DETAIL 1 page. (H/V: H and V
both enabled, V: V DTL only enabled)
SKIN DETAIL
SKIN DETAIL ALL
SKIN DETECT
OFF/ON
OFF
Turns on all of 1, 2 and 3 of the color detail
function.
Moves to color
detection page.
EXEC
OFF
Executes the color detail function.
SKIN AREA IND.
OFF/ON
Turns the zebra indication on or off in the area
of the currently selected type of the color
detail function.
SKIN DTL SELECT
SKIN DETAIL
1/2/3
1
Selects the type of the color detail function.
The following items depend on the selected
type of the color detail function.
OFF/ON
ON
Turns the color detail function on or off for the
type selected in the above item.
SKIN DETAIL LVL
SKIN DTL SAT.
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
0
0
Sets the level of the color detail signal.
Adjusts the saturation level of the hue
possessed by the color detail function.
SKIN DTL HUE
(0 to 359)
(0 to 359)
0
Adjusts the center phase of the hue
possessed by the color detail function.
SKIN DTL WIDTH
40
Adjusts the width of the hue possessed by the
color detail function.
190
Menu List
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Page
Item
Settings
Default Description
11
MTX LINEAR
MATRIX
OFF/ON
ON
OFF
ON
0
Turns the linear matrix correction and user-
set matrix correction functions on or off.
MATRIX (USER)
MATRIX (PRESET)
MATRIX R-G
OFF/ON
Turns the user-set matrix correction function
on or off.
OFF/ON
Turns the preset matrix correction function on
or off.
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
OFF/ON
Sets the arbitrary G-R user-set matrix
coefficients.
MATRIX R-B
0
Sets the arbitrary B-R user-set matrix
coefficients.
MATRIX G-R
MATRIX G-B
MATRIX B-R
0
Sets the arbitrary R-G user-set matrix
coefficients.
0
Sets the arbitrary B-G user-set matrix
coefficients.
0
Sets the arbitrary R-B user-set matrix
coefficients.
MATRIX B-G
MATRIX
0
Sets the arbitrary G-B user-set matrix
coefficients.
12
MTX MULTI
ON
OFF
OFF
Turns the linear matrix correction and multi
matrix correction functions on or off.
MATRIX (MULTI)
MATRIX AREA IND.
OFF/ON
Turns the multi matrix correction function on
or off.
OFF/ON
Turns the zebra indication on or off in the area
corresponding to the currently selected
setting.
MATRIX COLOR DET Moves to color
detection page.
EXEC
B
Detects color.
MTX (MULTI) AXIS
B/B+/MG–/MG/
MG+/R/R+/YL–/
YL/YL+/G–/G/
G+/CY/CY+/B–
Sets the region in which the multi matrix
correction function can be changed. (sixteen-
axis mode)
MTX (MULTI) HUE
MTX (MULTI) SAT
(–99 to +99)
0
0
Adjusts the color phase affected by the multi
matrix correction function in every sixteen-
axis mode.
(–99 to +99)
Adjusts the saturation level affected by the
multi matrix correction function in every
sixteen-axis mode.
13
V
V MOD
OFF/ON
ON
0
Turns the V modulation function on or off.
MODULATION
MASTER VMOD
(–99 to +99)
Turns the master V modulation function on or
off.
R VMOD
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
ENC/R/G/B
0
Turns the R V modulation function on or off.
Turns the G V modulation function on or off.
Turns the B V modulation function on or off.
Selects the output signal of TEST OUT.
G VMOD
0
B VMOD
0
TEST OUT SELECT
ENC
Menu List
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Page
Item
Settings
Default Description
14
LOW KEY SAT. LOW KEY SAT.
L.KEY SAT. LEVEL
OFF/ON
OFF
0
Turns the low key saturation function on or off.
(–99 to +99)
Sets the saturation level of the low luminance
part.
L.KEY SAT. RANGE
LOW/L.MID/
H.MID/HIGH
HIGH
Sets the luminance level at which the low key
saturation function becomes effective.
Y BLACK GAMMA
Y BLK GAM LEVEL
OFF/ON
OFF
0
Turns the Y black gamma function on or off.
(–99 to +99)
Sets the gamma curve in the low luminance
part.
Y BLK GAM RANGE
LOW/L.MID/
H.MID/HIGH
HIGH
Sets the luminance level at which the Y black
gamma becomes effective.
15
SCENE FILE
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Recalls the scene file saved in the memory of
the camcorder.
2
3
4
5
STANDARD
Clears all current detail-adjusted settings and
switch settings and returns the settings to the
standard settings saved in the reference file.
SCENE RECALL
SCENE STORE
F.ID
—
EXEC
EXEC
—
Recalls the scene file from the memory of the
camcorder or the “Memory Stick”.
—
Stores the scene file in the memory of the
camcorder or the “Memory Stick”.
16 characters
Sets the File ID.
192
Menu List
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE Menu List
The following table lists and describes the items in the
MAINTENANCE menu.
When the setting range in the Settings column is
surrounded by parentheses ( ), the setup value is a relative
value. The setting range shown on the menu screen may
differ from what is shown in the manual.
No.
Page
Item
Settings
Default
Description
01
WHITE
SHADING
WHT SHAD CH
SEL
R/G/B/TEST
R
Selects the channel adjusted by this menu. If
TEST is selected, the setting is the same as
the setting of TEST OUT SELECT.
TEST OUT SELECT ENC/R/G/B
ENC
Selects the signal output to the TEST OUT
connector.
R/G/B WHT H SAW (–99 to +99)
R/G/B WHT H PARA (–99 to +99)
R/G/B WHT V SAW (–99 to +99)
R/G/B WHT V PARA (–99 to +99)
WHITE SAW/PARA OFF/ON
0
H Saw white shading compensation
H Parabola white shading compensation
V Saw white shading compensation
V Parabola white shading compensation
0
0
0
ON
Turns white shading Saw and Parabola
compensation on and off.
02
BLACK
SHADING
BLK SHAD CH SEL R/G/B/TEST
TEST OUT SELECT ENC/R/G/B
R
Selects the channel adjusted by this menu. If
TEST is selected, the setting is the same as
the setting of TEST OUT SELECT.
ENC
Selects the signal output to the TEST OUT
connector.
R/G/B BLK H SAW (–99 to +99)
R/G/B BLK H PARA (–99 to +99)
R/G/B BLK V SAW (–99 to +99)
R/G/B BLK V PARA (–99 to +99)
BLACK SAW/PARA OFF/ON
0
H Saw black shading compensation
H Parabola black shading compensation
V Saw black shading compensation
V Parabola black shading compensation
0
0
0
ON
Turns black shading Saw and Parabola
compensation on and off.
MASTER BLACK
(–99 to +99)
0
Master black level adjustment
MASTER
GAIN(TMP)
–3/0/3/6/9/12/18/
24/30/36/42/48 dB
0 db
Temporarily adjusts the master gain value.
03
LEVEL ADJ
ENC VIDEO LEVEL (–99 to +99)
RGB LEVEL (–99 to +99)
TEST OUT SELECT ENC/R/G/B
0
Encoder video level adjustment
R/G/B video level adjustment
0
ENC
Selects the signal output to the TEST OUT
connector.
H BLANKING
WIDTH
(–99 to +99)
0
H blanking width adjustment
Menu List
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Page
Item
Settings
Default
Description
04
BATTERY 1
Info BEFORE END 5/10/15 to 95/100% 5%
Used when a BP-GL65/GL95/M100 Battery
Pack is used. Sets the remaining power (%
value) of the battery at which the BEFORE
1)
END warning should be issued.
Info END
0/1/2/3/4/5%
0%
Used when a BP-GL65/GL95/M100 Battery
Pack is used. Sets the remaining power (%
value) of the battery at which the END
2)
warning should be issued.
Sony BEFORE END 11.5 to 17.0 V
(in 0.1 V steps)
11.5 V
Used when a BP-L60S Battery Pack is used.
Sets the voltage level of the battery at which
the BEFORE END warning should be
1)
issued.
Sony END
11.0 to 11.5 V
(in 0.1 V steps)
11.0 V
11.8 V
Used when a BP-L60S Battery Pack is used.
Sets the voltage level of the battery at which
the END warning should be issued.
2)
Other BEFORE
END
11.5 to 17.0 V
(in 0.1 V steps)
Used when a battery pack other than a BP-
GL65/GL95/L60S/M100 is used. Sets the
voltage level of the battery at which the
BEFORE END warning should be issued.
3)
Other END
11.0 to 14.0 V
(in 0.1 V steps)
11.0 V
11.8 V
Used when a battery pack other than a BP-
GL65/GL95/L60S/M100 is used. Sets the
voltage level of the battery at which the END
warning should be issued.
DC IN BEFORE
END
11.5 to 17.0 V
(in 0.1 V steps)
Used when an external power source is
connected to the DC IN connector. Sets the
voltage level of the connected external power
source at which the BEFORE END warning
should be issued.
3)
DC IN END
11.0 to 14.0 V
(in 0.1 V steps)
11.0 V
Used when an external power source is
connected to the DC IN connector. Sets the
voltage level of the connected external power
source at which the END warning should be
issued.
DETECTED
BATTERY
Info/Sony/Other/DC –
IN
Displays the type of automatically detected
battery.
194
Menu List
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Page
Item
Settings
Default
Description
05
BATTERY 2
TYPE DETECTION AUTO/OTHER
AUTO
AUTO: Automatically detects the type of the
battery.
OTHER: Always judges the battery to be of
4)
the “Others” type regardless of the
actual battery type.
SEGMENT NO.7
SEGMENT NO.6
SEGMENT NO.5
SEGMENT NO.4
SEGMENT NO.3
SEGMENT NO.2
SEGMENT NO.1
11.0 to 17.0 V
(in 0.1 V steps)
17.0 V
16.0 V
15.0 V
14.0 V
13.0 V
12.0 V
11.0 V
When the battery type Battery status
judgment is “Others”,
sets the voltage level
below which the
battery status indicator
segment No.7 should
turn off.
indicator segments
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5)
(“E” and “F” are
always on.)
11.0 to 17.0 V
(in 0.1 V steps)
When the battery type
judgment is “Others”,
sets the voltage level
below which the
battery status indicator
segment No. 6 should
turn off.
11.0 to 17.0 V
(in 0.1 V steps)
When the battery type
judgment is “Others”,
sets the voltage level
below which the
battery status indicator
segment No. 5 should
turn off.
11.0 to 17.0 V
(in 0.1 V steps)
When the battery type
judgment is “Others”,
sets the voltage level
below which the
battery status indicator
segment No. 4 should
turn off.
11.0 to 17.0 V
(in 0.1 V steps)
When the battery type
judgment is “Others”,
sets the voltage level
below which the
battery status indicator
segment No. 3 should
turn off.
11.0 to 17.0 V
(in 0.1 V steps)
When the battery type
judgment is “Others”,
sets the voltage level
below which the
battery status indicator
segment No. 2 should
turn off.
11.0 to 17.0 V
(in 0.1 V steps)
When the battery type
judgment is “Others”,
sets the voltage level
below which the
battery status indicator
segment No. 1 should
turn off.
Menu List
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Page
Item
Settings
Default
Description
06
AUDIO-1
CA-701 AUDIO IN
ENABL/DSABL
ENABL
When a CA-701 camera adaptor is
connected, selects whether or not to enable
input of audio channels 3 and 4 from the
camera adaptor.
ENABL: Camera adaptor can be used.
DSABL: Camera adaptor cannot be used.
AUDIO CH3/4
MODE
CH1/2/SW
OFF/ON
SW
Selects the sources to be recorded to
channels CH-3/4.
CH1/2: Same sources as CH-1/2.
SW: Signals selected by the AUDIO IN CH-3/
CH-4 switches.
REAR XLR AUTO
FRONT MIC REF
REAR MIC REF
MIN ALARM VOL
OFF
Turns the XLR connection automatic
detection on or off.
–60 dB/–50 dB/
–40 dB
–60 dB
–60 dB
OFF
Sets the reference level of the front
microphone.
–60 dB/–50 dB/
–40 dB
Sets the reference level when the AUDIO IN
CH1 connector is set to MIC.
OFF/SET
Volume of the monitor speaker alarm tone
when it is turned all the way down.
OFF: Almost inaudible.
SET: Faintly audible.
SP ATT LEVEL
OFF/3/6/9 dB
OFF
Lowers the volume of the monitor speaker.
Has no effect on earphone volume.
HEADPHONE OUT STREO/MONO
MONO
16bit
Selects whether to make the rear earphone
monaural or stereo.
07
AUDIO-2
AU DATA LEN (IMX) 16 bit//24 bit
(PDW-530/530P
only)
Sets the bit length of the digital audio
recording.
AU REF LEVEL
AU REF OUT
–20 dB/–18 dB/
–16 dB/–12 dB/
EBUL
–20 dB
Sets the reference level (Head Room).
Sets the output reference level.
EBUL/0 dB/+4 dB/ 0 dB
–3 dB
AU CH12 AGC
MODE
MONO/STREO
MONO
Selects whether to perform automatic input
level adjustment of analog audio signals to
be recorded on channels 1 and 2
independently for each channel, or in stereo
mode.
AU CH34 AGC
MODE
MONO/STREO/
OFF
MONO
Selects whether to perform automatic input
level adjustment of analog audio signals to
be recorded on channels 3 and 4
independently for each channel, or in stereo
mode, or not at all (OFF).
AU AGC SPEC
–6/–9/–12/–15 dB
–6 dB
OFF
AGC saturation level setting
AU LIMITER MODE OFF/–6/–9/–12/
–15/–17 dB
For manual audio input level adjustment,
selects the limiter saturation level for loud
input signals.
AU OUT LIMITER
OFF/ON
ON
Turns the audio output limiter on or off.
i.LINK AUDIO OUT 2CH/4CH
2CH
2CH: Output channels 1 and 2 (16 bits, 48
ksps)
4CH: Output channels 1 to 4 (12 bits, 32
ksps)
196
Menu List
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Page
Item
Settings
Default
Description
08
AUDIO-3
AU SG (1kHz)
ON/OFF/AUTO
OFF
Sets whether to output a 1 kHz test tone
during the Color Bar mode or not.
ON: a 1 kHz test tone is output during the
Color Bar mode.
OFF: a 1 kHz test tone is not output during
the Color Bar mode.
AUTO: a 1 kHz test tone is output only when
the CH 1 AUDIO SELECT switch on the
inside panel is in the AUTO position.
MIC CH1 LEVEL
SIDE1/FRONT/
F+S1
FRONT
FRONT
SIDE 1
When recording the front microphone sound
on CH 1, selects which control is to be used
for the level adjustment.
SIDE 1: Adjust it with the LEVEL control (left
side) on the side panel.
FRONT: Adjust it with the MIC LEVEL control
on the front panel.
F + S1: It can be adjusted using either the
LEVEL control (left side) or the MIC
LEVEL control. (The two controls are
linked to each other.)
MIC CH2 LEVEL
SIDE2/FRONT/
F+S2
When recording the front microphone sound
on CH 2, selects which control is to be used
for the level adjustment.
SIDE 2: Adjust it with the LEVEL control
(right side) on the side panel.
FRONT: Adjust it with the MIC LEVEL control
on the front panel.
F + S2: It can be adjusted using either the
LEVEL control (right side) or the MIC
LEVEL control. (The two controls are
linked to each other.)
REAR1/WRR
LEVEL
SIDE1/FRONT/
F+S1
Selects any of these controls to adjust the
audio level of the equipment that is
connected to the wireless microphone and
whatever is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1
connector on the rear panel.
SIDE 1: Adjust it with the LEVEL control (left
side) on the side panel.
FRONT: Adjust it with the MIC LEVEL control
on the front panel.
F + S1: It can be adjusted using either the
LEVEL control (left side) or the MIC
LEVEL control. (The two controls are
linked to each other.)
REAR2/WRR
LEVEL
SIDE2/FRONT/
F+S2
SIDE 2
Selects any of these controls to adjust the
audio level of the equipment that is
connected to the wireless microphone and
whatever is connected to the AUDIO IN CH2
connector on the rear panel.
SIDE 2: Adjust it with the LEVEL control
(right side) on the side panel.
FRONT: Adjust it with the MIC LEVEL control
on the front panel.
F + S2: It can be adjusted using either the
LEVEL control (right side) or the MIC
LEVEL control. (The two controls are
linked to each other.)
Menu List
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Page
Item
Settings
Default
Description
09
TIMECODE
TC OUT
AUTO/GENE
AUTO
Selects the time code signal output.
AUTO: Outputs the time code generator
output during recording and outputs the
time code reader output during playback.
GENE: Outputs the time code generator
output during recording and playback.
DF/NDF
(PDW-510/530 only)
DF/NDF
INT/EXT
DF
Sets DF or NDF mode.
DF: Drop frame mode
NDF: Non-drop frame mode
EXT-LK DF/NDF
(PDW-510/530 only)
INT
Selects either internal setting or external
setting for DF/NDF.
INT: Internal
EXT: External
EXT-LK UBIT
INT/EXT
INT
Sets whether the LTC UBIT setup value locks
to an INT or an EXT source when the time
code is locked to an external source.
INT: Internal lock
EXT: External lock
LTC UBIT
FIX/TIME
FIX/TIME
FIX
FIX
Sets the data to be recorded in UBIT of LTC.
FIX: Records the data that is set by the user.
TIME: Records the present time.
VITC UBIT
Sets the data to be recorded in UBIT of
VITC.
FIX: Records the data that is set by the user.
TIME: Records the present time.
WATCH AUTO ADJ OFF/ON
ON
Matches the time of the built-in clock with the
time data of the user bits of an external time
code. Turns the automatic time correction
function of the built-in clock on or off.
UBIT GROUP ID
VITC INS LINE 1
000/101
000
Selects the UBIT GROUP ID.
9 to 22 H (PDW-
510P/530P)
16H
Selects the line into which VITC is to be
inserted.
12 to 19 H (PDW-
510/530)
19H
18H
21H
ON
VITC INS LINE 2
12 to 19 H (PDW-
510/530)
Selects the line into which VITC is to be
inserted.
9 to 22 H (PDW-
510P/530P)
10
VDR MODE
REC TALLY BLINK OFF/ON
Turns the tally illumination control on or off in
the event of BATTERY BEFORE END/DISC
BEFORE END.
REC START BEEP OFF/ON
OFF
Turns on or off the alarm sound at REC
START/STOP.
SUB LCD MODE
SEL
TIMER/OFF/CONT TIMER
Sets the time code (TC) display after power-
off as follows.
TIMER: The TC display turns off after the
elapse of the time set by the SUB LCD
TIMER below.
OFF: Not displayed.
CONT: Displayed.
SUB LCD TIMER
1H/3H/8H
1H
Sets the duration of time after which the TC
display is to be turned off after power-off,
when the SUB LCD MODE SEL item, above,
is set to TIMER (H: hours).
REC FORMAT
(PDW-530/530P
only)
IMX50/IMX40/
IMX30/DVCAM
IMX50
Selects the type of video codec. Multiple
codecs cannot be mixed on one disc.
198
Menu List
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Page
Item
Settings
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
Default
OFF
Description
11
ESSENCE
MARK
SHOT MARK 1
SHOT MARK 2
OFF
OVER AUDIO LIMIT OFF/ON
GAIN CHG. MARK OFF/ON
OFF
OFF
FILTER CHG.
MARK
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF
SHUTTER CHG.
MARK
OFF
OFF
WHITE CHG.
MARK
FLASH MARK
OFF/ON
1 to 20
OFF
10
FLASH MARK
LEVEL
INDEX PIC. POS.
0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/ 0 SEC
10 SEC
12
PRESET WHT
COLOR TEMP. <P> Display color
temperature.
3200
White balance preset value
COLOR FINE <P> (–99 to +99)
0
—
R GAIN
G GAIN
D5600K
<P> (–99 to +99)
<P> (–99 to +99)
<P> OFF/ON
0
R gain preset value
G gain preset value
0
OFF
Selects whether to electrically apply 5600K
filter to white balance preset value.
AWB ENABLE <P> OFF/ON
OFF
DCC
Turns on and off the function which
automatically acquires the preset value for
automatic white balance adjustment.
13
DCC ADJUST
DCC FUNCTION
SEL
DCC/ADP.K/FIX
Selects the function assigned to the DCC
switch.
ADP.K is Adaptive Knee and FIX is fixed
value.
DCC D RANGE
400/450/500/550/
600%
600%
Sets the timing range when the DCC switch
is set to the ON position.
DCC POINT
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
0
0
0
DCC minimum knee point adjustment
Gain adjustment to DCC detected value
DCC reaction speed adjustment
DCC GAIN
DCC DELAY TIME
Menu List
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Page
Item
Settings
Default
Description
14
AUTO IRIS 2
IRIS WINDOW
1/2/3/4/5/6/VAR
1
Selects the auto iris detection window. VAR
is variable.
IRIS WINDOW IND OFF/ON
OFF
Turns on and off the function which displays
a frame marker for the auto iris detection
window.
IRIS LEVEL
(–99 to +99)
0
0
Level adjustment of the auto iris target value
IRIS APL RATIO
(–99 to +99)
20 to 465
20 to 172
Mix ratio of auto iris detection peak value and
average value
IRIS VAR WIDTH
IRIS VAR HEIGHT
IRIS VAR H POS.
245
Width and height of detection frame when
the auto iris detection window is set to VAR
85/72
Height of detection frame when the auto iris
detection window is set to VAR
–447 to +446
(PDW-510/530)
0
0
0
0
Horizontal position of detection frame when
the auto iris detection window is set to VAR
–447 to +446
(PDW-510P/530P)
IRIS VAR V POS.
–104 to +104
(PDW-510/530)
Vertical position of detection frame when the
auto iris detection window is set to VAR
–124 to +123
(PDW-510P/530P)
IRIS SPEED
(–99 to +99)
OFF/ON
0
Auto iris speed adjustment
CLIP HIGH LIGHT
OFF
Turns on and off the function which, during
auto iris adjustment, ignores very bright
areas by dulling the reaction to high
luminescence.
15
FUNCTION 3
WHT FILTER INH
COLOR BAR SEL
OFF/ON
OFF
Turns on and off the function which inhibits
independent white memory for each filter
position.
SMPTE/EBU/SNG SMPTE
Color bar type
(PDW-
510/530)
EBU
(PDW-
510P/
530P)
REC TALLY
UPPER/BOTH
UPPER
Selects whether to light the upper tally
indicator only, or both upper and lower tally
indicators.
COLOR VF INPUT COMP/VBS/BOTH COMP
Video input selection when a color viewfinder
is used
USER & ALL ONLY OFF/ON
OFF
OFF
Show only USER menu in the top menu.
RM COMMON
MEMORY
OFF/ON
Selects whether or not to share settings for
when an RM remote control unit is connected
and when the unit is used alone.
RM REC START
SHT DISP MODE
RM/CAM/PARA
SEC/DEG
RM
When an RM remote control unit is
connected, selects which REC START/STOP
buttons are enabled. RM/camera/both.
SEC
OFF
Selects shutter speed display in standard
mode.
AWB FIXED AREA OFF/ON
3)
Turns on and off the function which fixes the
on-screen detection area for AWB.
200
Menu List
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Page
Item
Settings
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
Default
ON
Description
16
GENLOCK
GENLOCK
RETURN VIDEO
GL H PHASE
Turns genlock on and off.
Turns return video on and off.
Genlock H phase setting.
OFF
0
(–60 to +139)
(PDW-510/530)
(–59 to +142)
0
(PDW-510P/530P)
GL SC PHASE
GL SC 0/180 SEL
ND OFFSET
(–99 to +99)
0/180
0
Genlock subcarrier phase setting
Genlock subcarrier phase setting
180
—
17
18
ND COMP
OFF/ON
Turns on and off the mode which sets ND
(neutral density) filter color compensation
values.
(PDW-530/530P ADJUST
only)
CLEAR ND
OFFSET
—
EXEC
EXEC
Clears ND filter color compensation values.
Execute the auto black shooting function.
Clears black shooting compensation values.
AUTO SHADING AUTO BLK
SHADING
EXEC
RESET BLK SHD
EXEC
EXEC
ENC
TEST OUT SELECT ENC/R/G/B
Selects the signal output to the TEST OUT
connector.
MASTER GAIN
(TMP)
–3/0/3/6/9/12/18/
24/30/36/42/48 dB
0 dB
Temporarily sets the master gain value.
19
20
DISC
DELETE LAST CLIP EXEC
DELETE ALL CLIPS EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
Delete the last clip.
Delete all clips on the disc.
QUICK FORMAT
EXEC
Formats the disc. All the recorded data is
deleted.
NETWORK
DHCP
ENABL/DSABL
DSABL
Selects whether to enable automatic
acquisition of the IP address from a DHCP
server.
IP ADDRESS
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
192.168.1 Sets the IP address.
.10
SUBNET MASK
255.255.2 Sets the subnet mask.
55.0
DEF. GATEWAY
LINK SPEED
0.0.0.0
AUTO
Sets the default gateway.
AUTO/10 Mbps/
100 Mbps
Sets the communications speed.
DUPLEX
AUTO/FULL/HALF AUTO
Sets the duplex mode.
1) The setting of this item is overridden by the setting of BEFORE END 3
when TYPE DETECTION in the BATTERY 2 page is set to OTHER.
2) The setting of this item is overridden by the setting of END 3 when TYPE
DETECTION in the BATTERY 2 page is set to OTHER.
3) This is supported from firmware version 1.4.
4) When TYPE DETECTION in the BATTERY 2 page is set to AUTO, any
batteries other than Sony BP-series batteries and Anton Bauer intelligent
battery systems are classified as “Others”.
5) Flashes once per second when the battery status is “BEFORE END”, and
flashes 4 times per second when the battery status is “END”.
6) This is supported from firmware version 1.5
Menu List
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FILE Menu List
The following table lists and describes the items in the
FILE menu.
value. The setting range shown on the menu screen may
differ from what is shown in the manual.
When the setting range in the Settings column is
surrounded by parentheses ( ), the setup value is a relative
No.
Page
Item
Settings
Default
EXEC
EXEC
—
Description
01
USER FILE
USER FILE LOAD
USER FILE SAVE
F. ID
—
—
16 characters
—
USER PRESET
EXEC
02
USER FILE2 STORE USR PRESET
CLEAR USR PRESET
—
—
—
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
OFF
Sets the pages registered in the USER menu
to the standard setting.
Clears the standard setting of pages registered
in the USER menu.
CUSTOMIZE RESET
Returns the pages registered in the USER
menu to the factory default state.
LOAD CUSTOM DATA OFF/ON
Selects whether to include pages registered by
the user in user files to be loaded by USER
FILE LOAD.
LOAD OUT OF USER
BEFORE FILE PAGE
USER LOAD WHITE
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Selects whether to include pages not
registered by the user in user files loaded by
USER FILE LOAD.
Selects whether to include data after USER
FILE pages in user files to be loaded by USER
FILE LOAD.
Selects whether to include white balance data
in user files to be loaded by USER FILE LOAD.
03
ALL FILE
ALL FILE LOAD
ALL FILE SAVE
F. ID
—
EXEC
EXEC
—
Load ALL file.
—
Save ALL file.
16 characters
Name ALL file.
ALL PRESET
—
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
OFF
Return items in ALL file to preset values.
Set preset values of items in ALL file.
Clear preset values of items in ALL file.
STORE ALL PRESET
CLEAR ALL PRESET
3SEC CLR PRESET
—
—
OFF/ON
Turns on and off the function which returns
menu items to the preset values when the
MENU knob is kept pressed for 3 seconds.
NETWORK DATA
OFF/ON
OFF
Selects whether or not to read in the network-
related data.
04
SCENE FILE
1
—
—
2
—
—
3
—
—
4
—
—
5
—
—
STANDARD
SCENE RECALL
SCENE STORE
F. ID
—
—
—
EXEC
EXEC
—
—
16 characters
202
Menu List
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Page
Item
Settings
Default
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
—
Description
05
REFERENCE REFERENCE STORE
REFERENCE CLEAR
REFERENCE LOAD
REFERENCE SAVE
F. ID
—
Save reference file in internal memory.
Clear reference file.
—
—
Load reference file.
—
Save reference file to “Memory Stick”.
Name reference file.
16 characters
OFF/ON
SCENE WHITE DATA
OFF
06
LENS FILE 1 LENS FILE RECALL
LENS FILE STORE
F. ID
—
EXEC
EXEC
—
Load lens file.
—
Save lens file.
16 characters
Name of selected lens file
SOURCE
—
MEMORY1 Number of selected lens file
LENS NO OFFSET
IRIS GAIN
—
EXEC
0
Clear lens file.
(–99 to +99)
Iris gain value of lens file
LENS AUTO RECALL
OFF/ON/S.No ON
When a serial lens is connected with this item
set to ON, the corresponding lens file is loaded
automatically and its content is reflected in the
lens settings.
L.ID
—
—
Name of the lens file corresponding to the
connected serial lens
L.MF
—
—
0
Manufacturer of the connected serial lens
Lens file V Saw seed
1)
07
LENS FILE 2
(–99 to +99)
LENS M VMOD
1)
1)
–48 to +47
0
Horizontal position compensation of lens file
center marker
LENS CENTER H
–15 to +14
0
Vertical position compensation of lens file
center marker
LENS CENTER V
TEST OUT SELECT
ENC/R/G/B
(–99 to +99)
ENC
0
Selects signal output to TEST OUT connector.
Adjustment of lens file flare (R)
1)
LENS R FLARE
1)
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
0
0
0
Adjustment of lens file flare (G)
Adjustment of lens file flare (B)
LENS G FLARE
1)
LENS B FLARE
1)
R compensation value when extender and
shrinker used.
LENS W-R OFST
1)
(–99 to +99)
R/G/B/TEST
0
B compensation value when extender and
shrinker used.
LENS W-B OFST
08
LENS FILE 3 SHADING CH SEL
R
Selects the channel adjusted by this menu. If
TEST is selected, the setting is the same as
the setting of TEST OUT SELECT.
TEST OUT SELECT
LENS R/G/B H SAW
ENC/R/G/B
ENC
Selects the signal output to the TEST OUT
connector.
1)
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
(–99 to +99)
—
0
0
0
0
H Saw white shading compensation
H Parabola white shading compensation
V Saw white shading compensation
V Parabola white shading compensation
Format “Memory Stick”.
1)
LENS R/G/B H PARA
1)
LENS R/G/B V SAW
1)
LENS R/G/B V PARA
M.S. FORMAT
09
MEMORY
STICK
EXEC
OFF
M.S. MS IN > JUMP TO OFF/USER/
ALL/SCENE/
See 8-3 “Jumping to a File-Related Menu Page
153.
LENS/REFER/
USER1
1) “EX” is displayed when the extender is on, and “0.8” is displayed when
the shrinker is on.
Menu List
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIAGNOSIS Menu List
The following table lists and describes the items in the
DIAGNOSIS menu.
No.
Page
Item
Description
01
HOURS METER
OPERATION
Displays the total time that this unit has been powered on,
in units of hours.
OPERATION (rst)
SPINDLE (rst)
LASER (rst)
Displays the total time that this unit has been powered on,
in units of hours (reset possible).
Displays the total time that the spindle has been rotating,
in units of hours (reset possible).
Displays the total number of output parameters to the
optical heads (reset possible).
LOADING (rst)
SEEK (rst)
Displays the number of times that discs have been loaded
(reset possible).
Displays the total seek time by the optical heads, in units of
hours (reset possible).
02
TIME/DATE
ADJUST
HOUR
MIN
SEC
YEAR
MONTH
DAY
03
04
ROM VERSION 1
ROM VERSION 2
AT
Displays ROM version.
PACKAGE
SY1: Ver X.XX
PIER: Ver X.XX
VAIN: Ver X.XX
SYS2K: Ver X.XX
SYS2U: Ver X.XX
DRV: Ver X.XX
FP: Ver X.XX
DSP.A: Ver X.XX
PRX.A: Ver X.XX
PRX.V: Ver X.XX
05
DEV STATUS
I/O
EEPROM
CN:
LSI
PX:
Display only.
IFA :
FP :
CN :
FRAM
AT:
DCP:
PA:
BCS:
SCI
SY:
RM:
06
OPTION BOARD
SDI OUTPUT
COMPOSITE VIDEO INPUT
PULL DOWN (24P)
204
Menu List
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Page
Item
Description
07
DISC STATUS
USER ID:
TITLE:
Displays the user ID of the disc itself.
Displays the title of the disc itself.
REMAIN
REWRITE
SALVAGE
FILE SYSTEM
Displays the remaining capacity of the disc.
Displays the number of times the disc has been rewritten.
Displays “required” when salvage is required.
Displays “unknown” when the file system cannot be
identified, or when there is an error.
08
CLIP STATUS
CLIP LIST MODE
CLIP NO
NORMAL MODE or CLIP LIST MODE
NORMAL MODE: Number of current clip, total number of
clips
CLIP LIST MODE: Nothing particular displayed
NAME
NORMAL MODE: Name of current clip
CLIP LIST MODE: Name of clip list
TITLE
NORMAL MODE: Title of current clip
CLIP LIST MODE: Title of clip list
RECORD DEVICE
NORMAL MODE: Name of device which recorded current
clip
CLIP LIST MODE: Displays “-----”.
SERIAL
NORMAL MODE: Serial number of device which recorded
current clip
CLIP LIST MODE: Displays “-----”.
DATE
TIME
NORMAL MODE: Date when current clip was recorded
CLIP LIST MODE: Date when clip list was created
NORMAL MODE: Time when current clip was recorded
CLIP LIST MODE: Time when clip list was created
09
OPTION BOARD
SDI OUTPUT
Displays installed options.
COMPOSITE VIDEO INPUT
PULL DOWN (24P)
Menu List
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What is MagicGate?
MagicGate is copyright protection technology that uses
encryption technology.
About a “Memory Stick”
Before using a “Memory Stick”
What is “Memory Stick”?
“Memory Stick” is a new compact, portable and versatile
IC (Integrated Circuit) recording medium with a data
capacity that exceeds a floppy disk. “Memory Stick” is
specially designed for exchanging and sharing digital data
among “Memory Stick” compatible products. Because it is
removable, “Memory Stick” can also be used for external
data storage.
Terminal
Write-protect tab
“Memory Stick” is available in two sizes: standard size
and compact “Memory Stick Duo” size. Once attached to
a “Memory Stick Duo” adaptor, “Memory Stick Duo”
turns to the same size as standard “Memory Stick” and thus
can be used with products compliant with standard
“Memory Stick”.”
Labelling position
• When you set the “Memory Stick” erasure prevention
switch to “LOCK,” data cannot be recorded, edited, or
erased.
• Data may be damaged if:
-You remove the “Memory Stick” or turn off the unit
while it is reading or writing data.
-You use the “Memory Stick” in a location subject to the
effects of static electricity or electric noise.
• We recommend that you make a backup copy of
important data that you record on the “Memory Stick”.
Types of “Memory Stick”
“Memory Stick” is available in the following four types to
meet various requirements in functions.
“Memory Stick-R”
Stored data are not overwritten. You can write data to
“Memory Stick-R” with “Memory Stick-R” compatible
products only. Copyright protected data that requires
MagicGate copyright protection technology cannot be
written to “Memory Stick-R.”
Notes
• Do not attach anything other than the supplied label to
the “Memory Stick” labeling position.
• Attach the label so that it does not stick out beyond the
labeling position.
• Carry and store the “Memory Stick” in its case.
• Do not touch the connector of the “Memory Stick” with
anything, including your finger or metallic objects.
• Do not strike, bend, or drop the “Memory Stick”.
• Do not disassemble or modify the “Memory Stick”.
• Do not allow the “Memory Stick” to get wet.
• Do not use or store the “Memory Stick” in a location that
is:
“Memory Stick”
Stores any type of data except copyright-protected data
that requires the MagicGate copyright protection
technology.
“MagicGate Memory Stick”
Equipped with the MagicGate copyright protection
technology.
“Memory Stick-ROM”
Stores pre-recorded, read-only data. You cannot record on
“Memory Stick-ROM” or erase the pre-recorded data.
- Extremely hot, such as in a car parked in the sun
- Under direct sunlight
- Very humid or subject to corrosive substances
Available types of “Memory Stick”
With this camcorder, you can use a Sony “Memory Stick”
whose capacity does not exceed 128 MB or a Sony
“Memory Stick PRO” whose capacity does not exceed
2 GB.
“Memory Stick” Access Indicator
If the access indicator is turned on or is flashing, data is
being read from or written to the “Memory Stick”. At this
time, do not shake the computer or product or subject them
to shock. Do not turn off the power of the computer and
product or remove the “Memory Stick”. This may damage
the data.
Note
You can not use a “Memory Stick Duo” with your product.
Note on data read/write speed
Data read/write speed may vary depending on the
combination of the “Memory Stick” and “Memory Stick”
compliant product you use.
206
About a “Memory Stick”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions
• To prevent data loss, make backups of data frequently. In
no event will Sony be liable for any loss of data.
• Unauthorized recording may be contrary to the
provisions of copyright law. When you use a “Memory
Stick” that has been pre-recorded, be sure that the
material has been recorded in accordance with copyright
and other applicable laws.
• The “Memory Stick” application software may be
modified or changed by Sony without prior notice.
• Note that there are certain restrictions on recording stage
performances and other entertainment events, even if
they are recorded for personal use only.
• “Memory Stick”,
and “MagicGate Memory Stick”
are trademarks of Sony Corporation.
• “Memory Stick Duo” and
trademarks of Sony Corporation.
• “Memory Stick PRO” and
trademarks of Sony Corporation.
• “MagicGate” and
are
are
are trademarks
of Sony Corporation.
About a “Memory Stick”
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the scene selection function of this
unit, and with the supplied PDZ-1
Proxy Browsing Software.
time code value and actual time by
dropping two frames from the time
code value at the beginning of each
minute except every tenth minute.
Glossary
Color bar signal
AES/EBU
A test signal which can be displayed
as vertical bars of different colors on
a color video monitor. This signal is
used to check chrominance functions
of color television and video systems
such as cameras and monitors.
E-E mode
A standard established jointly by the
AES (Audio Engineering Society)
and EBU (European Broadcasting
Union) for serial transmission of
digital audio. Two channels of audio
can be transmitted via a single
connector.
Electric-to-Electric mode. When you
operate a VDR in E-E mode, input
video and/or audio signals pass
through electric circuits only and
then come out from the output
connectors, without passing through
electromagnetic conversion circuits
such as recording heads.
Color subcarrier
In a composite video signal, a signal
superimposed upon the picture
(luminance) information for the
purpose of conveying the associated
color information. Color and
saturation information is conveyed
by the phase and amplitude of the
color subcarrier. Also called
subcarrier.
Aliasing
Distortion which occurs during
sampling to convert analog signals to
digital.
EFP
Electronic Field Production. The use
of electronic equipment such as
portable video cameras, VTRs, and
sound equipment for television
production outside studios.
ATW
Auto Tracing White balance. The
white balance is automatically
adjusted for the lighting conditions
during shooting.
ENG
Color temperature
Electronic News Gathering. The use
of electronic equipment such as
portable video cameras, VTRs, and
sound equipment for the production
of daily news stories and short
documentaries.
The temperature in Kelvins (K) to
represent the color of a light source,
determined by heating a perfectly
black body until its color matches
that of the light source. Color
temperature is higher when the color
is bluish and lower when reddish.
Bayonet mount
A type of lens mount. The lens can be
inserted into the lens mount and
quickly locked in place by simply
rotating the lens locking ring.
Essence mark
A type of metadata that may be set for
a specified frame.
Black balance adjustment
To balance the black levels of the R,
G, and B channels of a video camera
so that black has no color.
Composite video signal
A video signal in which luminance
and chrominance are combined along
with timing reference “sync”
information to make composite
video.
Flare
Dark or colored flashes caused by
signal overload through extreme light
reflections of polished objects or very
bright lights.
Black set
A reference level for black balance
adjustment.
CRT
CCD
Flange focal length
Cathode-Ray Tube. Video camera
viewfinders are equipped with a CRT
image display, so you can monitor
what you are shooting.
Charge-Coupled Device. A solid
state imager used in most video
cameras in place of a pickup tube.
The device converts input light levels
into electrical charges that are first
stored and then output in the form of
voltage variations.
The distance from the plane of lens
mounting flange to the image focal
plane. Abbreviated to Ff.
Flicker
DCC
Repeated change of brightness on the
screen, caused by light sources such
as fluorescent light flashing at the
frequency of alternating current.
Dynamic Contrast Control. A DCC
circuit automatically adjusts the knee
point according to the amount of
incident light. A video camera
containing a DCC circuit can handle
a wide dynamic range of luminance.
Center marker
A cross which indicates the center of
the image on the viewfinder screen.
Genlock
Generator lock. To synchronize the
pulse generator built into video
equipment to an external reference
(master) sync signal.
Clip
Drop frame mode
A recording unit. Clips are created
every time recording starts and stops.
SMPTE time code runs at 30 frames/
second, while the NTSC color
television system runs at about 29.97
frames/second. Drop frame mode
adjusts the running of time code to
eliminate the discrepancy between
Clip list
HAD
A list of locations in the material
recorded on the disc, arranged in any
order. Clip lists can be created with
Hole-Accumulated Diode. A CCD
sensor structure designed to suppress
208
Glossary
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
certain types of noise inherent to
CCDs. See also CCD.
XDCAM can record non-audio as an
input signal.
Shutter speed
The time that the shutter is open.
Slow shutter speeds give bright
images, but motion resolution is
lower.
Hunting
1) Dolby is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories.
Repeated brightening and darkening
of an image resulting from repeated
response to automatic iris control.
Non-drop frame mode
A mode of advancing time code
which ignores the difference in frame
values between real time and the time
code. Using this mode produces a
difference of approximately 86
seconds per day between real time
and time code, which causes
problems when editing programs in
units of seconds using the number of
frames as a reference.
SMPTE
Society of Motion Picture and
Television Engineers, a professional
association established in the U.S.A.
mainly for the purpose of setting
forth motion picture and television
engineering standards.
i.LINK
Another name for the IEEE1394-
1995 standards and their revisions.
XDCAM uses the i.LINK interface to
transfer DV streams by the AV/C
protocol, and to read and write
MPEG IMX and DVCAM data files
by FAM (File Access Mode).
S/N
Signal-to-Noise ratio. The relation of
the strength of the desired signal to
the accompanying electronic
interference, the noise. If S/N is high,
sounds are reproduced with less noise
and pictures are reproduced clearly
without snow.
Interlaced scan mode (CCD
output)
A scanning method in which odd
rows fields are read alternately with
even rows. (Odd-row fields and even-
row fields contain images from
different times.)
Progressive scan mode (CCD
output)
A scanning method in which odd
rows and even rows are read at the
same time. Also called full-screen
scanning.
SNMP
Proxy AV data
Simple Network Management
Protocol. XDCAM uses this protocol
to monitor equipment operating
status via network connectors.
IRE scale
Low-resolution data with a video
bandwidth of 1.5 Mbps and an audio
bandwidth of 64 Kbps per channel.
This unit records proxy AV data
automatically whenever high-
resolution MPEG IMX or DVCAM
data is recorded.
International Radio Engineers scale.
A scale of values that defines the
brightness level of a video signal.
The IRE is now the IEEE (Institute of
Electrical and Electronic Engineers).
Sub clip
One of the sections which make up a
clip list. A sub clip may be part of a
clip or an entire clip.
Metadata
Information about the properties of
video and audio content. XDCAM
records metadata such as UMIDs and
essence marks, and the supplied
PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software
PDZ-1 can be used to record
information such as titles and
comments.
Reference video signal
Thumbnail image
A video signal that contains a sync
signal or sync and burst signals, used
as a reference for synchronization of
video equipment.
A reduced still picture of video for
display on a GUI screen. XDCAM
creates thumbnail images from proxy
video, and displays them as index
pictures on GUI screens.
Return video
A video signal returned to a camera
from a VTR, or a video signal
selected from among several camera
angles in a control room and returned
to a camera so the cameraman can
check the video.
Time code
MXF
A digitally encoded signal which is
recorded with video data to identify
each frame of the video by hour,
minute, second and frame number.
SMPTE time code is applied to
NTSC system, and EBU time code to
PAL and SECAM systems.
Material eXchange Format. A file
exchange format developed by the
Pro-MPEG Forum. Equipment from
different manufacturers can
exchange files in this format.
SDI
Serial Digital Interface. An interface
standardized as SMPTE 259M which
enables the transmission of an
uncompressed digital component
stream.
ND filter
Neutral Density filter. ND filters
reduce the amount of incident light
equally across the entire visible
wavelength range without affecting
color.
Time code synchronization
To synchronize the built-in time code
generator of video equipment to an
external time code.
Shot data
Turbo gain
Data recorded, while shooting, in the
color bars, the user bits data of VITC,
and so forth. Includes the model
name, serial number, date, time, shot
number, and ID1 to ID4.
Non-audio
Video amplifier gain increased from
30 dB by 6 to 18 dB by combining
adjacent pixels of the CCD.
General term for audio signals other
than linear PCM, such as Dolby E
1)
and Dolby Digital (AC-3).
Glossary
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UMID
of the camera lens. This is called
white shading.
Unique Material Identifier. A
standard (SMPTE 330M) for video
and audio metadata. The Basic
section of a UMID contains a
globally unique number and a
material number for the identification
of recorded material. An optional
section called the “Source Pack”
contains information such as the time
and location of recording. A UMID
with the Basic section only is called a
Basic UMID. A UMID with the
Source Pack is called an Extended
UMID.
Zebra pattern
In a video camera, striped patterns
which appear in the viewfinder
screen to indicate areas of the image
where the video level is higher than a
certain value. If a zebra pattern
appears on the skin when the object is
a human being, that is a correct
exposure.
Zoom
To gradually change the field of view
of a camera lens from wide to narrow
angle (zoom in) or narrow to wide
angle (zoom out).
User bits
A total of 32 bits are provided in the
time code which the user can use to
record such information as date,
scene number, or reel number on
video tape. Also called user’s bits.
VBS
A composite signal consisting of
video signal, burst signal and sync
signal.
Vertical smear
A bright vertical line which appears
on the screen when shooting a very
bright object with a CCD camera.
Also called smear.
Video gain
Amount of amplification for video
signals, expressed in decibels (dB).
VITC
Vertical Interval Time Code. A time
code recorded in two horizontal lines
during each vertical blanking period
of a video signal.
White balance adjustment
In the light of a particular color
temperature, to adjust the white
levels of the R, G, and B channels of
a color video camera so that any
white object shot in that light is
reproduced as a truly white image.
See also Color temperature.
White shading
When shooting a white object, the
upper and lower portions of the
screen may appear magenta or green
while the central portion appears
white, depending on the performance
210
Glossary
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
A
B
Basic procedures
Access indicator(for“MemoryStick”)
Adjusting
Current clip list
D
Adjustments and settings
Assigning functions to ASSIGN 1/2/3/
Battery status
BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation
Disc
Black balance
attaching a UHF portable tuner
used for recording and playback
C
connecting line input audio
using the supplied microphone
Checking
Disc status
display on the monochrome LCD
adjustment for input from the front
the last two seconds of the
the recording on the color video
adjustment for inputs from the
connectors 93
E
AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2
Clip
F
Index
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
File ID
Loading
UHF potrable tuner for wireless
system 162
using the supplied microphone
160
user files from a “Memory Stick”
144
Locations and functions of parts and
controls 13
N
M
O
Optical disc drive section,
specifications 178
G
“Memory Stick”
jumping to a file-related menu
page 153
Optional board
H
I
P
i.LINK DV IN/OUT S400 connector
23
assigning functions to ASSIGN 1/
2/3/4 switches 133
resetting USER menu settings
143
setting the color temperature
manually 132
specifying an offset for the auto
133
PLAY/PAUSE button and indicator
24
K
using the Anton Bauer Ultralight
system 155
L
212
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Proxy Browsing Software (See also
“PDZ-1”) 81
Testing
Setting
date/time of the internal clock
135
Time code
Q
R
Shooting
basic procedure (from adjusting
the black balance and
white balance to stopping
recording) 40
basic procedure (from turning on
a disc) 40
Recommended additional equipment
179
Time code display
video signals from external
equipment 67
testing the camcorder before
shooting 169
Recording format
Shooting and recording/playback
functions 19
Shoulder pad, adjusting the position
166
Statusdisplayontheviewfinderscreen
121
setting the audio recording format
83
setting the video recording format
82
Resetting USER menu settings to the
standard settings 143
U
USER menu
V
Video camera section, specifications
177
S
Saving and loading
user files to and from a “Memory
Stick” 144
Scene file
adjusting the focus and screen
156
resetting the settings to the
standard settings 152
Selecting
T
Index
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
using the BKW-401 Viewfinder
Rotation Bracket 157
Viewfinderfront-rearpositioninglever
20
Viewfinder screen
Shot data superimposed on the
color bars 126
W
Warnings and indications on the LCDs
32
White balance
specifying an offset for the auto
white balance 133
Z
214
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The material contained in this manual consists of information
that is the property of Sony Corporation and is intended solely
for use by the purchasers of the equipment described in this
manual.
Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any
portion of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose other
than the operation or maintenance of the equipment described
in this manual without the express written permission of Sony
Corporation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PDW-510/510P/530/530P
(SYL)
Sony Corporation
3-805-941-09 (1)
http://www.sony.net/
© 2004
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Singer Sewing Machine 114 1 User Manual
SMSC Network Card EVB EMC1033 User Manual
Snapper Lawn Mower ZF2100DKU User Manual
Sony Camcorder BMC 110 User Manual
Sony Camera Lens VAD S70 User Manual
Sony Car Speaker CDXGT540UI User Manual
Sony Home Theater System DAV LF1 User Manual
Sterling Microscope Magnifier SSE 5 BL User Manual
Sunbeam Coffeemaker PC3600 User Manual
SUPER MICRO Computer Server AS1041M 82 User Manual